SECTION 16340 Medium Voltage Switch Gear - Part 1 - General

SECTION 16340
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH GEAR

______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A. This section cover the manufacturer, furnish, install and test all equipment, accessories
and materials required for the installation of metal clad switchgear in accordance with
attached specifications and drawings.
1.2
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the contract drawings
and the standards listed hereunder.
The following codes and standards provide an acceptable level of quality for materials
and products:
1. SASO
2. IEC 60298
3. IEC 62271- 102
4. IEC 60694
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
IEC 62271- 100

IEC 60185
IEC 60186
IEC 60801
IEC 60529
Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.

AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated
voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 54 kV.
AC disconnectors and earthing switches,
Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and
controlgear,
High-voltage AC circuit breakers,
Current transformers,
Voltage transformers,
Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process
Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code)
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and products shall be new, sound and uniform in quality, size, shape, colour
and texture and shall be free from defects.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the required standards of quality
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed switchgear.
C. If requested by the client, the supplier shall provide proof of application of a quality
procedure complying with standards. This means:
1. use of a quality manual approved and signed by a management representative,
2. regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable quality
control procedures,
3. ISO 9002 certification.
D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of MV switchgear for not
less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied
equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been in
satisfactory operation in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for at least five years.
E. The equipment shall be approved by Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).
16340-1
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
1.4
SUBMITTAL
A. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data:
The contractor shall submit to the client/client representative for review, detailed
dimensioned shop drawings and manufacturer's literature where deviations from the
contract drawings or specification exist. Shop drawings and/or data sheets shall be based
on information stated in the specifications and as shown on the contract drawings and
shall show all pertinent deviations and data for the fabrication and complete installation.
Manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted indicating the necessary installation
dimensions, weights, materials and performance information. The above information
may be provided by standard catalogue sheets marked to indicate the specific items
provided.
B. Operation and Maintenance Instructions:
The contractor shall furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities,
maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment or apparatus in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents. Operating instructions shall cover all
phases of control.
C. Test Reports:
The contractor shall submit test reports to the client/client representative for review.
D. Recommended Spare Parts List:
The contractor shall submit recommended spare parts list to the client/client
representative for review.
E. As Built Drawings:
The contractor shall submit the as built drawings to the client/client representative for
review and approval.
1.5
COORDINATION
A. The contractor shall be held responsible for the proper coordination of all phases of the
work under this contract.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate the work and equipment as
specified herein with work to be performed and equipment to be furnished under other
sections of the specifications in order to assure a complete and satisfactory installation.
1.6
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site as per manufacturers instructions.
B. Store switchgear in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory wrapping
or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,
water, construction debris and traffic.
C. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to
switchgear internal components, enclosure and finish.
16340-2
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTION
2.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. The following specification is describing air insulated, metal enclosed - metal clad
Medium Voltage switchgear.
B. The equipment to be supplied shall consist of aligned cubicles satisfying the following
criteria:
1. Open-ended design,
2. Easy to install,
3. Safe and easy to operate,
4. Low maintenance.
2.2
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A. The switchgear shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
1. Rated voltage:
17.5 kV three-phase.
2. Operating voltage:
13.8 kV
3. Frequency:
60 Hz.
4. Insulated level:
38kV-60Hz,1min
95 kV-1,2/50s.
5. Busbar rated current: 630A derated at 50 Deg C.
6. Short-circuit current: 25 kA- 3 s
7. Insulation level to be coordinated for the proper altitude.
8. Space heater to be provided in each cubicle.
9. Switches to be provided with DC supply (Battery + Charger) for CB closing / tripping
coils protection relays and CB motor
2.3
SWITCHBOARDS
A. The switchboards shall meet the required criteria for indoor, air-insulated, metal clad
switchgear, in compliance with IEC standard 60298 , section 3, 1990-12 edition.
B. The environment shall be as follows:
1. Altitude: as per site location.
2. Ambient temperature:
- Minimum:
-5C
- Maximum:
+50C.
3. Hygrometry:
- At +20C: less than 90%
- At +40C: less than 50%.
C. The switchboards shall be modular and extendible on site.
D. They shall comprise functional units as defined by IEC standard 60298 , section 3.104:
part of metal-enclosed switchgear including all the main circuit and auxiliary circuit
equipment that contributes to the performance of the same function.
16340-3
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
E. A functional unit will be, for example, a transformer incomer unit, a motor feeder unit,
etc.
F. The factory-made functional units shall be bolted together at the place of use.
G. The switchboards shall be built so as to require no access to the rear section, for
installation or operation, in order to be installed at a distance of 200 mm or less from the
wall behind them.
H. The functional unit power circuits shall be interconnected by a busbar calibrated to
convey the strongest rated current that may flow through the switchboard.
I. The functional unit earthing circuits shall be interconnected by a main earth collector
made of copper, the cross-section of which shall allow the flow of the rated short-circuit
current.
2.4
FUNCTIONAL UNITS
A. Each functional unit shall contain all the elements needed to perform its function.
B. The functional units shall comprise:
1. An air-insulated, metal-enclosed, metal clad cubicle, for indoor use,
2. A withdrawal switchgear device with SF6 breaking medium, sealed for life,
3. A digital protection and control system.
C. Each functional unit shall be identified by a label, which clearly indicates its function and
electrical characteristics.
D. The switchgear shall be provided with the following functional units (refer to the
drawings):
1. Incomers: by withdrawable SF6 circuit breaker.
2. Switchboard coupling: by withdrawable SF6 circuit breaker.
3. Feeders: by withdrawable SF6 circuit breaker.
4. Busbar voltage measurement.
5. Busbar earthing.
2.5
CUBICLES
A. The term cubicles designates all the functional units other than switchgear and the
protection and control system, namely:
1. The metal enclosure.
2. The compartment partitions.
3. The fixed power circuit.
4. The earthing circuit.
B. Architecture and enclosures
1. The cubicles shall be metal-enclosed switchgear type, in accordance with the
definition given in IEC standard 60298 , section 3.
2. The outer enclosure shall therefore be metallic and earthed.
3. Each cubicle shall be built on a self-supporting chassis made of bent steel plates.
16340-4
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
4. With the exception of the painted plates and the cubicle floor, the plates, which form
the enclosure, shall be made of aluminium-zinc and shall be 2 mm thick.
5. The plate shall naturally be protected against corrosion, without requiring additional
treatment.
6. Since the plates comprise the visible parts of the switchboard, both sides shall be
painted.
7. The plate shall be made of zinc-plated steel.
8. The plates, which comprise the cubicle floors, shall be made of galvanised steel and
shall be 3mm thick.
9. The cubicle shall be IP3X in accordance with IEC standard 60529 it must be
impossible to insert a rod 2.5 mm in diameter.
10. The cubicles shall have internal arc withstand, verified according to the six criteria of
IEC standard 60298 , appendix AA, class A accessibility.
11. The tests shall have been carried out, for each type of cubicle and for each of the three
power compartments, with the LV compartment door close.
C. Compartments
1. The cubicles shall comprise four electrically independent compartments, in
accordance with the definition of metal clad switchgear given in IEC standard 60298 ,
section 3.
2. All partitions between compartments shall be metallic and earthed.
3. In order to ensure maximum user safety, it is imperative for the movable intercompartment shutters to be metallic and earthed
4. All the compartments shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle.
5. Compartment access shall however be restricted by the presence of safety
mechanisms and interlocks.
6. The compartments shall be as follows:
I. Busbar compartment
- The busbar compartment shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle or the top of
the cubicle, by removing the bolted plates.
- It shall be equipped with flaps for evacuating overpressure to the top or back of the
cubicle.
II. Switchgear compartment
- The compartment shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle, by means of a door
that may be locked out by a key-type lock.
- It shall only be possible to open the door when the switchgear device is in the
racked out position.
- The compartment shall be equipped with the two earthed, metallic racking in
shutters which, when the circuit breaker is in the rack out position, shall ensure
isolation from the busbar compartment and the bottom compartment.
- The shutters shall be operated mechanically by the movement of the circuit breaker.
- When the circuit breaker is racked out, the shutters shall be mechanically locked out
in the closed position. To open them, it shall be necessary to use a tool.
- They shall be locked out individually by a padlock.
III. Low voltage compartment
- This compartment shall be located in the upper part of the cubicle, on the front, and
shall be included in the overall volume of the cubicle.
16340-5
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
- It shall be accessible, with the cables and busbar energised, by means of a door that
can be locked out by key-type lock.
IV. Bottom compartment
- According to the functional units, the compartment shall contain the cable
connection terminals or the lower busbar, the cable earthing switch, the current and
voltage transformers.
- It shall be accessible via the front of the cubicle by unbolting metal panels.
D. Fixed Power Circuit
1. The power circuit (also called main circuit) is the group of components, within a
cubicle, which participate in conveying power (with the exception of the switchgear
devices, which will be discussed in 2.06).
2. Those components are:
- Busbar.
- Connections.
- Racking in contacts.
- Cable connection terminals.
3. The power circuit insulation medium shall be ambient air.
4. If required by the situation, sheathing may be included to reinforce insulation.
5. Busbar
- A copper busbar of the flat formation type shall ensure the flow of power within
the switchboard: the bars shall be flat, parallel, and identical within each cubicle.
- They shall be bolted to each other and to the cubicle power circuits on the operating
site.
6. Connections
- The connections are the parts of the power circuit that interconnect the main
components (busbar/switchgear device, switchgear device/current transformers,
etc).
- They shall be made of copper.
7. Racking in contacts
- The racking in contacts shall be made of moulded, extruded aluminium, coated with
a silver film.
8. Cable connection terminals
- The cable connection terminals shall be located in the bottom compartment of the
cubicle.
- They shall be made of copper.
- It should be possible to connect up to six XLPE type cables per phase, and the
terminals should have a cross-section of up to 240 mm2.
- Cables shall be connected by bolting.
- Access to the cable connection compartment shall require prior closing of the cable
earthing switch.
16340-6
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
E. Earthing Circuit
1. The earthing circuit of a functional unit is the group of components that contribute to
equipment earthing.
2. The component include:
- The main earth collector.
- Secondary collectors.
- The cable earthing switch.
3. Two solutions shall be possible for busbar earthing:
- An earthing truck, separate from the switchboard.
- A special-purpose functional unit.
4. Main earth collector
- The main earth collector shall be made of copper and must have verified shortcircuit current withstand, in accordance with IEC standard 60298 .
- The collectors of all functional units shall be interconnected and connected to the
facilities main earth connector.
- The earth bar shall be installed in the bottom compartment.
5. Secondary collectors
- All the metallic parts of each functional unit shall be connected to the main earth
collector, by continuity of the metal frames, or by means of secondary collectors
made of copper. Metallic parts must never have floating potential.
6. Earthing switch
- The MV cables shall be earthed by means of an integrated earthing switch.
- The earthing switch shall have full making capacity (2.5 times the short-circuit
thermal current for which the cubicle is calibrated) in accordance with IEC standard
62271- 102.
- A mechanical interlock shall prevent earthing switch operation unless the main
switchgear device is in the racked out position.
- No key-type lock, padlock or electrical lockout solutions shall be acceptable for the
performance of this function.
- The earthing switch operating mechanism shall be of fast-closing type, independent
of the operator.
- A device shall prevent the earthing switch from being opened by reflex reaction
immediately after closing, so as to avoid all risk of arc generation between the
contacts. It should be impossible for the device to be forced.
- A device in the immediate proximity of the earthing switch shall inform the operator
that the cables are energised.
- This device shall include a separate neon lamp for each phase, supplied with power
by an isocapacitor connected to each cable connection terminal.
- A lock or padlock system shall be used to lock out the earthing switch in the open or
closed position.
7. Busbar earthing
- For busbar earthing, a truck specially designed for that purpose might be used.
- The truck shall insert the earthing arms through the racking in shutters near the
busbar.
- The earthing truck shall have full making capacity.
16340-7
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
- It shall be connected to the facilities earthing via the earth collector designed to
normally be in contact with the withdrawable switchgear devices earth collector.
- Should it be impractical to use a truck, the busbar may be earthed by installing a
special-purpose functional unit in the switchboard. That functional unit should have
full making capacity.
2.6
SWITCHGEAR DEVICE
A. Out of concern for equipment efficiency and reliability, it is mandatory for the switchgear
devices that equip the functional units to be made by the switchboard supplier, or by a
manufacturing plant that belongs to the same company.
B. No solutions that include switchgear devices acquired from different suppliers shall be
accepted.
C. The cubicles shall be equipped with withdrawal switchgear devices:
1. A withdrawable circuit breaker,
2. A withdrawable contactor, with or without fuses,
3. A withdrawable earthing switch.
D. Racking in and racking out operations shall be carried out with the door closed.
E. The circuit breaker shall be mounted on its racking in/racking out mechanism in such a
way as to be inseparable from it in normal operating conditions.
F. Withdrawable circuit breaker
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The circuit breaker shall be designed in accordance with IEC standard 62271- 100.
Minimum short circuit breaking capacity, 25KA
Rated current 630A at 50 Deg. C.
It shall be certified by test reports issued by a recognised body affiliated with an
international organisation.
The breaking medium shall be SF6.
In all cases, the circuit breaker and its operating mechanism shall have at least the
following verified endurance characteristics:
- Number of operations:
10 000.
- Number of breaking operations at rated current:
10 000.
The circuit breaker shall be equipped with an electrical operating mechanism with fast
opening and closing, independent of the operator, that is operated by a stored energy
mechanism.
The operating mechanism shall be equipped with:
- Push-button for opening and closing with indication lamps for breaker status
- Mechanical position indicator for the open-closed positions,
- Stored energy spring charging handle,
- Charged-discharged spring position indicator,
- Mechanical system for manual spring discharging,
- System for automatic spring discharging when the switchgear device is extracted,
- Trip units and auxiliary contacts.
The mechanical interlocks between the circuit breaker and the cubicle are summarised
in section 2.12.D mechanical safety devices.
16340-8
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
10. The parts which contain SF6 shall comply with the definition of pressure-sealed
systems given in IEC standard 62271- 100.
11. No handling of gas shall be acceptable during the service life (30 years).
12. Circuit breakers, which require contact servicing or gas filling during their service
life, are not acceptable.
13. The SF6 relative filling pressure shall be 0.5 bar or lower.
14. The breaker shall have been tested at SF6 atmospheric pressure. In such conditions, it
shall ensure:
- Operating voltage withstand.
- Rated current breaking.
15. The breaker shall be equipped with a device for evacuating internal overpressure.
16. This device shall consist of an area in the enclosure calibrated to open when the
internal pressure exceeds 3.5 times the normal operating pressure.
17. This area shall be in a location such that the gases are directed towards the back of the
cubicle.
18. CB shall be provided with necessary auxiliary contacts in addition to 2 NO / NC
contact.
2.7
POTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. General
1. All the relays, instruments and meters shall be incorporated in the LV compartment
location and top of the cubicle.
2. The manufacturer shall provide proof that he has already supplied equipment of the
same type and same make and that this equipment has been in operation for at least
three years.
3. The term protection and control system designates all the elements included in:
- The protection system - current and voltage sensors, relays, automation devices,
trip units, associated auxiliaries.
- The control system - sensors, measuring and counting devices, monitoring and
diagnosis devices.
- The communication interface for integration in a remote monitoring and control
system.
B. Protection and control unit
1. The switchgear shall be equipped with integrated digital protection and control units,
which include the protection, automation, measurement, counting, monitoring,
diagnosis and communication functions.
2. Additional functions may however be provided by complementary devices.
3. Since the Protection and Control unit is integrated as close as possible to the
switchgear, it must meet the severest environmental withstand requirements, in
particular:
- IEC standard 60255- 4
impulse withstand
5kV.
- IEC standard 60255- 22-1
1Mhz wave
Class III.
- IEC standard 60255- 22-4
fast transients Class IV.
- IEC standard 60255- 22-3 electromagnetic radiation 20V/m minimum
(30 V/m desirable).
- IEC standard 60801 -.4 electromagnetic compatibility
16340-9
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
4. The operating temperature shall be from -5 to +55 C.
5. The Protection and Control unit range shall be designed to accommodate wide range
of auxiliary power supply voltages, all types of current sensors and voltage sensors.
6. The unit shall be of disconnectable type to facilitate replacement.
7. It should be possible to withdraw the current circuit connectors without prior shortcircuiting.
8. Each connector shall accommodate 2.5mm2 wiring and 6 mm2 wiring of current
circuits.
9. The output relays shall be capable of withstanding steady state current of 8 A.
10. The logic inputs, which shall have the same voltage rating as the auxiliary power
supply, shall comply with the standards (IEC 60011- 32) relative to PLCs and the
drawn current shall be at least 6 mA (4 mA with 220 V DC).
C. Protection
1. Each Protection and Control Unit shall contain all the necessary protections, the
number and type of which depend on the application being considered (as shown on
the drawings).
2. Each protection device shall have wide setting ranges, in particular for current
protections, providing a choice of curve types (direct time) DT, (IDMT) SIT, VIT,
EIT, UIT, and time delays from Instantaneous (50ms) to 500 s, as a minimum.
3. Setting shall be performed by the direct input of primary current values.
4. Detection fault pick-up may reach 100 mA primary.
5. Protection tripping shall be indicated on the front of the device by a signal lamp and a
message indicating the cause of the fault.
D. Measurement
1. Each Protection and Control unit shall include the measurements needed for operation
and commissioning, i.e. at least the following:
- Phase current measurement.
- Maximum phase current demand.
- Measurement of fault current interrupted in each phase.
- Additional measurements such as residual current.
2. Measurement accuracy shall be 1% (according to IEC 60255- 4).
3. The unit shall include voltage, frequency and energy measurements.
4. For power and energy data, the unit measure real and reactive values and take into
consideration the direction of energy flow (incoming, outgoing).
E. Operation
1. The Protection and Control unit shall include an alphanumeric display unit that
indicates:
- Measurement values.
- Operating messages.
- Maintenance messages.
- Circuit breaker open or closed position, displayed on the front of the device by two
signal lamps.
- It shall be possible to make the settings and perform parameter setting via a portable
terminal or a PC.
16340-10
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
F. Control and monitoring
1. The Protection and Control unit shall include the input resources and logic outputs
required for control of the breaking devices (circuit breaker or contactor) and for
interfacing with the process monitored, comprising at least the following:
- Open and close Control, whatever the type of shunt trip or undervoltage release coil
control.
- Racked in position.
- Earthing switch closed position.
- Lockout of making in the presence of a fault.
- Monitoring of the circuit breaker operating mechanism and trip circuit (power
supply, wiring and coil).
- Detection of unit connected and plugged in connectors.
- Operation counter, fault trip counter.
- Cumulative total of KA interrupted.
- Storage of information (even during auxiliary power supply outages).
G. Communication
1. The Protection and Control unit shall be fitted with a communication interface option
of the JBUS/MODBUS protocol, 38400 baud speed and suitable hardware interface
for connection to PLC or equivalent.
2. The unit shall provide time tagging of events within an ms, with an adapted input
available for an external clock synchronisation contact.
H. Operation dependability
1. The Protection and Control unit shall include:
- An internal function self-monitoring mechanism, which activates fail-safe watchdog
changeover contacts.
- An automatic device for switching to the fail-safe position, with disabling of output
controls when an internal failure is detected.
- Indication on the front of the device by signal lamps and messages indicating selftest status.
I. The protection and control system shall also be equipped with:
1. Test units for the injection of current or voltage into the transformer secondary
circuits, installed on the front of the low voltage compartment:
- 1 unit for voltage,
- 1 unit for measurement current circuits,
- 1 unit for protection current circuit,
- 1 unit for zero current circuit.
2. Low voltage protection circuit breakers, located in the low voltage compartment. Fuse
protections are not acceptable.
3. A local / remote selector switch for integration in the remote monitoring and
control system.
4. The low voltage auxiliaries shall comply with the standard IEC 60298 section 5-4
and IEC 60694 , article 5, section 5.4.
5. The low voltage cables shall be of the self-extinguishing, 1000 V insulation class
type. Both ends shall be identified to facilitate checking during maintenance
operations.
16340-11
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
6. For the current circuits, the cable cross-section shall be 2.5 mm2, and 1.5 mm2 for the
other circuits.
J. Commissioning
1. The Protection and Control unit shall be delivered ready to use. Only settings and
parameter setting specific to the installation will need to be performed on site.
2. However, the unit shall include capacity for customisation and adaptation:
- Extension of the number of logic inputs and outputs.
- Modification of the control logic program on request.
3. After a spare hardware base has been set up, the proposed system shall enable
restarting without any setting or the use of special equipment.
4. The parameter and setting values shall be saved on a movable storage medium, which
is part of the unit.
2.8
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
A. The current transformers shall comply with IEC standard 60185 .
B. The current transformers shall have the same short time withstand current and rated
voltage as the switchgear.
C. The current transformers shall be made of cast epoxy resin and must be labelled
individually.
D. The manufacturer shall be in a position to provide type-test reports certified by an
approved laboratory affiliated with international organisations.
E. Current transformers not satisfying these criteria will not be accepted.
2.9
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
A. The voltage transformers shall comply with IEC standard 60186 .
B. The voltage transformers shall have the same rated voltage withstand as the switchgear.
C. The voltage transformers shall be made of cast epoxy resin and must be labelled
individually.
D. Depending on the needs, the voltage transformers shall be of the phase-to-phase or phaseto-earth type. They shall be protected by MV fuses or by circuit breakers on the power
circuit.
E. The manufacturer shall be in a position to provide type-test reports certified by an
approved laboratory affiliated with international organisations.
F. Voltage transformers not satisfying these criteria will not be accepted.
2.10
ELECTRICAL OPERATING MECHANISM INTERFACE
A. The withdrawable switchgear device circuit breaker shall be operating by a mechanism

that includes the following in the same component:
1. A representation of the position of the switchgear device by an electrical mimic
diagram with LEDs.
2. An opening button.
3. A closing button.
B. This mechanism shall be installed on the front of the low voltage compartment, in the
immediate proximity of the protection and control unit.
16340-12
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
2.11
AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A. The switchgear shall be equipped with auxiliary indication contacts connected to

terminals in the factory.
B. The terminal blocks, which receive the available auxiliary contacts, shall be located in the
low voltage compartment.
C. The available auxiliary contacts shall be the following:
1. Switchgear.
2. Earthing switch.
2.12
USE
A. In order to make the switchgear simple and safe to use, the following construction
requirements must be met.
B. Operating mechanisms
1. All operating mechanisms and access points shall be on the front of the cubicle.
2. In particular, cable and busbar connections must be possible via the front.
3. Racking out and racking in of the circuit breaker or contactor shall be carried out with
the door closed.
4. The door shall include inspection ports for unequivocal viewing of the circuit breaker
position (racked in or racked out).
5. The different operations shall be validated once they have been completed by a
special-purpose selector switch that may be locked out by key-type lock or padlock.
C. Instruction guide
1. The operating procedures for the current operations must be described on the front of
each functional unit:
- Opening/closing of the switchgear device.
- Racking in/racking out of the switchgear device.
- Opening/closing of the earthing switch.
- Plugging in/unplugging of the voltage transformer protection fuses.
2. This shall be described exclusively in the form of explicit symbols and colour codes.
3. Instructions guides, which use text, are not acceptable.
D. Mechanical safety devices
1. The functional units shall have a large number of fail-safe mechanical devices so as to
make the use of the switchgear safe:
- Impossible to earthed cables unless the switchgear device is racked out,
- Impossible to rack in or rack out switchgear device when the earthing switch is
closed.
- Impossible to rack out a closed switchgear device.
- Automatic discharging of the switchgear devices stored energy spring in the event
of racking out.
- Impossible to open the switchgear compartment door unless the device is racked
out.
- Impossible to gain access to the compartment which contains the cables when the
earthing switch is open.
16340-13
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
- Impossible to gain access to the voltage transformers and their protection fuses
unless the fuses have been withdrawn.
- Impossible to extract a switchgear device from a cubicle unless the extraction truck
is solidly locked to the cubicle.
- Impossible to unlock the extraction truck unless the circuit breaker is locked to the
truck or in the cubicle.
- Locking of the switchgear device to the truck when it is disconnected from the
cubicle.
2. None of these safety measures may be ensure by the use of a key-lock or padlock.
2.13
TYPE TESTS AND ROUTINE TESTS
A. The following type-test certificates shall be submitted for the equipment :

1. Impulse dielectric tests,
2. Power frequency dielectric tests,
3. Temperature-rise tests,
4. Short-time and peak withstand current tests,
5. Mechanical operating tests,
6. Short circuit breaking tests.
7. Short circuit making tests.
8. Internal arc withstand
9. Partial Discharge tests.
10. Verification of the degree of protection,
B. The routine tests carried out by the manufacturer shall be substantiated by a test report
signed by the manufacturer's quality control department. The reports shall cover the
following aspects:
1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams,
2. Insulation resistance test.
3. HV Dielectric tests.
4. Phase continuity tests,
5. Functional tests (including mechanical operation).
Testing shall be witnessed by supervising agency representative
16340-14
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the contractor, shall be installed and all
work shall be performed in a first-class workmanship manner, in conformity with the best
trade practices and the printed directions of the applicable manufacturers; by skilled
workers equipped to produce satisfactory results; in a safe, substantial manner so as to
avoid undue stresses, rigid enough to prevent undue movement, so as to present a neat,
orderly appearance and to facilitate operating, servicing, maintenance and repairing.
3.2
FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS

A. The contractor shall provide concrete pedestals, anchor bolts, hangers, channels, saddles,
etc., for installation of equipment and apparatus shown on the drawings and specified in
the various sections.
3.3
EQUIPMENT ERECTION
A. All electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, good electrical engineering practice, and the relevant drawings and
specifications.
B. All metal surfaces to be bolted shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly. The
connections shall be tightened with manual torque wrenches to the manufacturer's
erection instructions.
3.4
INSTALLATION/COMMISSIONING
A. General
1. The switchgear shall be located in premises reserved for electrical facilities.
2. It shall be set up on steel structures, above a utilities space, which allows for the
running of cables.
3. The minimum required clearance to be provided around the switchboard shall be:
- Lateral:
500 mm.
- Behind the switchboard:
200 mm rear access to the switchboard is not
acceptable.
- In front of the switchboard:
1800 mm, to facilitate any subsequent
extraction of functional units.
- Above the switchboard:
700 mm.
4. The equipment, on a forklift, should be able to pass through a door 2500 m high and
1000 m wide.
B. Cable connections
1. Cable inlets should be provided at the bottom of each functional unit.
2. The bottom plates shall be pre-drilled, and all the holes blocked off by cut-out type
plastic cones.
3. The cables shall be connected via the front.
16340-15
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
4. The cables ends shall be bolted to pre-drilled connection terminals.
5. The cables shall be flanged to cubicles by plastic collars.
6. When the cables are connected, the floor of each functional unit shall be closed off by
a non-magnetic panel.
C. Busbar connections
1. Busbar connections shall be via the front or the roof of each functional unit.
2. The bars shall be bolted, to each other and to the ends of the connections, on pins
fastened to the connections.
D. Earth collector connection
1. The switchboards main collector shall be bolted onto the collector of each functional
unit.
E. Low voltage circuit connections
1. The low voltage circuits of each functional unit shall be factory-wired.
2. Only the LV and inter-cubicle cables and connections arriving from outside the
switchboard should be wired in site.
3. The outside cable inlets may be on the bottom of each functional unit or at either end
of the switchboard.
4. The LV cable ends shall be connected to terminal blocks located in the low voltage
compartment.
5. The inter-cubicle wiring shall be supplied by the supplier.
6. The wiring shall be identified by codes, which comply, with indications given in the
wiring diagrams, which the supplier agrees to include with the switchgear.
7. In order to facilitate inspection and servicing operations, connection of the protection
and control unit, carried out in the factory by the suppliers, shall be the plug-in type.
F. Commissioning
1. Commissioning of a functional unit should be simple and quick.
2. All the documents necessary for the operation shall be made available by the
switchgear supplier.
3.5
EQUIPMENT TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. After the installation is complete and properly adjusted, the contractor shall conduct
operating tests. The various equipment and systems shall be demonstrated to operate in
accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Tests shall be performed in
the presence of the client/client representative. The contractor shall provide electric
power, instruments and personnel necessary for performing the various tests.
B. The testing of all electrical equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the items
below. This shall be in addition to testing specified elsewhere in this specification.
1. General equipment check.
2. Field wiring and ground system verification.
3. Equipment adjustment.
4. Insulation Resistance Test
16340-16
SECTION 16340
______________________________________________________________________________
5. HV Dielectric Test
6. Functional Test
END OF SECTION
16340-17
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
and materials required for the installation of L. V. Generator in accordance with attached
specifications and drawings.
1.2

A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the contract drawings
and the standards listed hereunder.
and products:
1. SASO
2. ABGSM
3. BS
4. EEC 89/392
5. EGSA
6. IEEE
7. IEC
8. ISO 9000
9. NEC
10. NEMA
11. NFPA
12. OSHA
1.3

Association of British Generating Set Manufactures
British Standards Institution
Safety and Health
Electrical Generating Systems Association
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
International Standards Organization 9000
National Electric Code
National Electric Manufacturers Association
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Occupational Safety and Health Act
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The complete power generation system, including engine and generator, shall be the
product of manufacturers who has been regularly engaged in the production of
generating and power systems for at least 10 years. All components shall have been
designed to achieve optimum physical and performance compatibility to prove integrated
design capability.
B. SubAssembly and Packaging
Generator set mounted subassemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake system,
exhaust outlet , and generator set controls shall be designed, built, and assembled as a
complete unit by the engine - generator manufacturer.
C. Specific Prototype Reports
Prototype Reports shall include:
Engine:
Performance (part load, full load,)
Fuel Consumption
Exhaust Emissions
Noise Levels, Mechanical and Exhaust
16350-1
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
Generator:
Motor Starting
Wave Form Harmonic Analysis
Insulation Resistance
Winding Resistance
Saturation, Open Circuit
Saturation, Short Circuit
Saturation, Rotating Exciter
Reactance and Impedance, Negative Sequence
Reactance, Zero Sequence
Regulator Voltage Adjustment
No Load Losses
Efficiency
Short Circuit Capability
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Evaluation
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)
1.4
SUBMITTAL
contract drawings or specification exist. Shop drawings and/or data sheets shall be based
on information stated in the specifications and as shown on the contract drawings and
shall show all pertinent deviations and data for the fabrication and complete installation.
Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data sheet
identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including relevant component
design and performance data.
Engine:
Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle
Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders
Engine lubricating oil capacity
Combustion air inlet flow rate
Exhaust gas, flow rate
stack temperature
Exhaust system backpressure (maximum)
Heat rejection to:
coolant
aftercooler
exhaust
atmosphere from engine
atmosphere from generator
Alternator:
Model
Insulation class
Number of leads
Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D)
Time constants, armature short circuit (TA)
Reactance, subtransient - direct axis (X"D),
Reactance, transient - saturated (X'D)
16350-2
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD)
Reactance, negative sequence (X2)
Reactance, zero sequence (X0)
Auxiliary Equipment - Specification or data sheets, including Synchronizing panel , and
day tank.
Drawings - General dimensions drawings showing overall generator set measurements,
mounting location and interconnect points for load leads, fuel and exhaust.
General installation coordinated layout (Electrical, Mechanical, Structural, etc.).
Generator room ventilation and noise control calculations with technical proposal of
materials
Wiring Diagrams - Wiring diagrams, schematics and control panel outline drawings
published by the manufacturer.
maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment or apparatus in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents. Operating instructions shall cover all
phases of control.
C. Test Reports:
Factory test to be witnessed by supervising agency.
The contractor shall submit recommended spare parts list to the client representative for
review.
The contractor shall submit the as built drawings to the client representative for review
and approval.
1.5
COORDINATION
sections of the specifications, (CCMS, MV Switchgears, etc.) in order to assure a
complete and satisfactory installation.
1.6

16350-3
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
B. Store Genset in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory wrapping or
provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,
water, construction debris and traffic.
switchgear internal components, enclosure and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
GENERAL
Provide all labor, materials, and equipment to furnish, install, and place in operation the
power generation system in accordance with the contract documents and design drawings.
These specifications also describe requirements for the design, fabrication, and testing of
the power system.
The installation of the power generation system shall include the following:
Engine-driven generator set
Control system
Cooling system
Fuel supply and storage system
Generator set accessories
Mounting system
System control
2.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The electric power generating system shall be according to the drawings , 0.8 power
factor, 380 volts, Wye connected, three phase, 60 hertz, 1800 RPM at 50 Degree C
ambient temperature. The Generator set shall be derated as required to deliver rated
output at applicable relative humidity and altitude.
2.3
GENERATOR SET CONSIST

The system shall consist of generator set(s), which include all controls, protection, wiring,
and accessories for automatic start-stop operation.
2.4
SYSTEM FUNCTION
The generator set(s) shall include the capability of automatically controlling generator set
operation. After starting, the unit(s) will attain rated speed and voltage, and accept rated
load. The engine governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output
voltage regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator.
Manual adjustment of generator speed and voltage shall be provided.
16350-4
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
2.5
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, GENERAL

The power generating system shall conform to the following performance criteria:
2.6
1.
Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated generator
set kW/kVA when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all engine-mounted
parasitic and external loads such as radiator fans and power generators under
applicable climatical conditions on the basis of Stand-By Power operation.
2.
Start Time and Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve rated voltage and
frequency, and be capable of accepting load within 7-8 seconds after the Engine
receive the starting signal.
3.
The maximum voltage difference between the 3 Phase at 100% balanced load
shall not exceed 1%
PERFORMANCE, SYSTEM
The power generating system shall satisfy the following performance criteria at site
conditions:
Total of Power Capability
Total Load
Frequency
3 Phase Volts
Allowable Voltage Dip
Power Factor
2.7
As shown on drawings
As per the drawings
60 Hz
380 Volts
< 30%
0.80
Minimum Service and Warranty Qualifications

The manufacturer shall have a local authorized dealer who can provide factory-trained
servicemen, the required stock of replacement parts, technical assistance, and warranty
administration.
A.
Warranty Terms - 2 Years

The manufacturer's and dealer's warranty shall be for a period of two (2) years
from date of preliminary handing over acceptance of the system and shall include
repair parts, labor, reasonable travel expense necessary for repairs at the jobsite,
Applicable deductible costs shall be specified in the manufacturer's standard
warranty.
B.
Mechanics and Equipment

The generator set supplier shall have factory trained service representatives and
tooling necessary to test, maintain, and repair all provided equipment.
16350-5
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
C.
Parts Availability - 90%

The generator set supplier shall have sufficient parts inventory to maintain over
the counter availability of at least 90% of parts.
2.8
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A.
Engine
1.
Engine Equipment
The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure
gauge, lubricating oil cooler, filters, water pump and temperature gauge,
service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel housing
2.
Structure
The design of the basic engine shall provide for maximum structural
integrity to extend service life. Materials used in the engine shall
incorporate the highest level of proven metallurgical and manufacturing
technology.
Block shall be of one-piece design and cast of high tensile strength iron in
the system manufacturer's own foundry.
Crankshaft shall be a one-piece forging with regrindable wear surfaces
hardened through heat treat methods. Cylinder wear surfaces shall be
induction hardened over their entire length. Main and rod bearings shall
consist of aluminum bonded by copper to a steel backing. The wear
surface shall be coated with a lead-tin overlay and the bearing covered by
a tin flashing.
Connecting rods shall be high strength steel with tapered pin bore. Drilled
passages to supply oil from rod bearing for piston cooling and lubricating
oil will not be permitted.
3.
Pistons shall be a lightweight aluminum alloy, which is elliptically ground

across the skirt and tapered from crown to skirt. Oil jets shall supply piston
cooling and lubricating oil. Valves shall be hard-faced with replaceable
inserts.
Lubrication System
The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is
integral with the engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. The
system shall incorporate full flow filtration with bypass valve to continue
lubrication in the event of filter clogging.
The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle.
Systems where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are
not acceptable. Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the
underside or inside of the crown and piston pin.
16350-6
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
4.
Diesel Fuel System

The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel
filter, transfer pump, lines, and nozzles.
The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously
controlled by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by
signals from the engine governor.
The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray
pattern for efficient combustion.
-
Primary Fuel Filter

In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a
primary fuel filter between the fuel tank and transfer pump to
screen large contaminants.
Fuel Cooler
Fuel shall be piped from the filter/water separators to the intake of
the engine fuel pump, and then to the engine. Excess fuel shall be
piped through the fuel cooler and returned to the fuel tank. The fuel
cooler shall be capable of exchanging heat rejected at full load with
the cooling medium, including 10% reserve to accommodate
fouling.
Fuel Priming Pump

A manual fuel-priming pump shall facilitate priming and bleeding
air from the system.
Fuel Lines
Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed
to isolate vibration.
5.
Auxiliary Fuel Tank

A fuel tank shall be provided sized for 4 hours autonomy at full
load (2000 Liters minimum). The tank shall incorporate threaded
pipe connections, float switch, Tank Side glass . manual valve on
the fuel line to the engine and a tank drain valve shall also be
included. Fuel will not be supplied to the tank by gravity feed.
Governor
The engine governor shall control engine speed and transient load response
within commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances. It will be selected, installed,
and tested by the generator set manufacturer.
a.
Governor, Electronic - Load Share/Speed Control

The engine governor shall be Electronic Load Sharing and Speed
Control with EG Electro-Hydraulic Actuator. Speed droop shall be
externally adjustable from 0 (isochronous) to 10% from no load to
full rated load. Steady state frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.25
percent. It shall be capable of sharing load within 5% when
16350-7
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
paralleled with similarly equipped engines. Speed shall be sensed
by a magnetic pickup off the engine flywheel ring gear. A
provision for remote speed adjustment shall be included. The
governor shall incorporate provisions for limiting fuel during startup, and include capability for actuator compensation adjustment.
Protection from voltage spikes and reverse polarity shall be
included. In the event of a DC power loss, the forward acting
actuator will move to the minimum fuel position.
6.
7.
8.
Cooling System
The engine jacket water cooling system shall be a closed circuit design
with provision for filling, expansion. The cooling pump shall be driven by
the engine. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect
external cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved.
-
Radiator, Engine Mounted

Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the
atmosphere through a close-coupled radiator. The radiator shall be
sized to cool the engine continuously while operating at full rated
load and at site conditions.
Blower Fan
The radiator-cooling fan shall be a blower type driven from the
engine. Air shall be drawn from the engine side and exhausted
through the radiator core.
Inlet Air System

The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element
-
TurboCharging
Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine
exhaust gases and direct - connected to a compressor supplying
engine combustion air.
AfterCooling
Aftercooler core air surfaces shall be coated with a corrosion
inhibitor to minimize oxidation.
Exhaust System
The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion
gases quickly and silently with minimum restriction. System including
silencer shall be designed for minimum restriction, and in no case shall
backpressure exceed 6.7 kPa (27 in H2O).
Heavy walled piping such as Schedule 40 is preferred, Piping shall be
installed with 229 mm (9 in) minimum clearance from combustible
material or incorporate appropriate insulation and shielding.
Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal growth
being transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings provided to
16350-8
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
accommodate thermal growth. Support dampers and springs shall be
included where necessary to isolate vibration.
Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water Drain
at the lowest point.
9.
Exhaust Noise Control

The exhaust silencer shall be critical type and supplied by the
engine supplier. It shall be mounted near the engine to minimize
noise and condensation, and pitched away from the engine. A
provision for draining moisture shall be included.
Silencer - Residential
The silencer shall provide suitable noise control for environments.
Noise Level
Noise of engine shall not exceed 85 dBA when measured 1 meter
away from exhaust louver.
Acoustic Treatment of Generator Room

Contractor shall provide complete acoustic treatment for Generator Building
and submit detailed technical proposal with calculations based on the
following.
A.
Noise level from the Generator Building shall not exceed max 78 NC at
any location 1 meter from the Generator Building.
B.
Generator set shall be provided with critical type silencer.
C.
All doors and windows shall be sound proof with appropriate acoustic
ratings.
D.
Acoustic lining shall be provided in the inner surface of walls in the

generator room.
E.
Outdoor air intakes and exhausts shall be provided with sound

attenuators, sized based on Engine noise levels.
F.
Radiator fans shall be upgraded for addition static due to sound

attenuators or additional intake booster fans shall be provided.
G.
Acoustic proposal shall include detailed calculations, method statement,

installation details, and testing and commissioning procedures, and shall
be fully coordinated with Genset Supplier / Manufacturer, before
submitting for the review and approval of the Engineer.
16350-9
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
10.
Electrical Starting System

The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor), starter
relay Batteries shall be maintenance free, lead acid types mounted near the
starting motor. A corrosion resistant or coated steel battery rack shall be
located to avoid spillage from servicing of fuel and oil filters. Required
cables will be furnished and sized to satisfy circuit requirements. The
system shall be capable of starting a properly equipped engine within 7-8
seconds.
a.
Jacket Water Heater

Jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain coolant
temperature at 32C while the engine is idle. Heaters shall accept
127 -volt AC single phase power and include thermostatic controls.
Hoses to and from the heater shall be industrial quality, which
exhibit long life in operational environments. Manual shutoff
valves shall be incorporated to isolate the heater during servicing.
b.
Batteries
Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by
the generator set manufacturer. They shall be a heavy duty lead
acid type.
Starting batteries shall be rated 24 volt DC and shall be located as
close to the starting motor as practical, away from spark sources, in
a relatively cool ambient, and permit easy inspection and
maintenance. Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the
generator set manufacturer.
c.
Alternator
An engine-mounted belt driven battery-charging alternator shall be
installed with an automatic voltage regulator. It shall be suitable
for heavy-duty applications with a rating of 24 volts.
11.
Alternator
The alternator(s) shall be rated for Stand-by Power service. Kilowatt rating
will be according to the drawings , 0.8 PF, 380 V, three phase, 60 Hz,
1800 rpm and Class H insulation.
It shall exhibit less than 5% waveform deviation at no load.
a.
Structured,
The alternator shall be close coupled, drip proof and guarded,
constructed to NEMA 1 and IP 22 standards, salient pole,
revolving field, synchronous type with amortisseur windings in the
pole faces of the rotating field. The alternator terminal box shall
provide generous space for entrance and installation of power
cables.
16350-10
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
b.
Mechanical Design
The alternator housing shall be one piece and mount directly to the
engine flywheel housing. The alternator-ventilating fan shall
mount to the engine flywheel and act as a pressure plate to secure
the flexible plates.
The rotor core shall be constructed of low loss non-orientated steel
laminations attached to the core lengths . The rotor assembly shall
have 125% overspeed capability
c.
Excitation
The alternator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting
of a three-phase armature and a three-phase full wave bridge
rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge suppressors shall be
included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage spikes.
-
d.
Exciter - Permanent Magnet

The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive
excitation current from a pilot exciter mounted on the rotor
shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of rated
current for ten seconds during a fault condition.
Voltage Regulator
The automatic voltage regulator shall maintain alternator output
voltage by controlling the current applied to the exciter field of the
alternator.
The regulator shall be a totally solid state design, which includes
electronic voltage buildup and overcurrent protection. It shall
incorporate volts per Hertz characteristics.
The regulator shall be suitable for mounting external to the
alternator assembly, and have provision for remote voltage level
control, using 16 gauge-shielded wire.
As installed, the voltage regulator shall meet the applicable
sections of the following standards:
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
12.
Mounting
The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by the
engine-generator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be designed
and built by the engine-generator manufacturer to resist deflection,
maintain alignment, and minimize resonant linear vibration.
-
Mounting Base - Package Generator Set

The base shall be constructed of formed steel "C" channel members
with a minimum 6-mm thickness. The base arrangement shall
incorporate a common interior width for furnishing dedicated stub
16350-11
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
up areas for mechanical and electrical connections. Steel cross
members shall support genset.
-
13.
Isolator - Spring Type

Steel spring isolators shall be installed between the generator set
base and the mounting surface. The isolators shall bolt to the base,
and have a waffled or ribbed pad on their bottom surface. The pads
shall be resistant to heat and age, and impervious to oil, water,
antifreeze, diesel fuel, and cleaning compounds.
Fuel Storage
The work required under this section shall conform to the following
requirements
a.
Storage Below Ground

A fiberglass tank with a capacity of sized for 5 days full load
operation of all Gensets (Minimum of 50,000 Liters) shall be
provided for fuel oil storage below ground. It shall have an
Underwriter's Laboratory label permanently attached and visible.
Submittals and drawings shall be submitted showing all
dimensions, and connections.
Connections - All piping shall be connected and supported by the
building structure or independent supports.
All manways shall be furnished complete with UL
approved gaskets, bolts, and covers.
All fittings shall meet UL requirements and be supplied
with threaded plugs.
Lifting lugs shall be provided that are capable of
withstanding weight of tank with a safety factor of 3.
b.
Day Tank
A auxiliary fuel tank shall be provided sized for 4 hours full load
operation (Minimum 2000 Liter). The tank shall incorporate
threaded pipe connections, float switch, fuel side glass .A manual
shutoff valve on the engine supply line and a drain valve shall be
included.
14.
Controls, Protection
The controls, and protection systems of the generator set and its operation
shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer.
a.
Automatic Start - Stop Control

The 24 volt DC system shall incorporate energize to run logic and
include:
16350-12
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
Control:
Alternator voltage level rheostat and ammeter/voltmeter
phase selector switch shall be mounted on the panel door.
The engine start-stop switch shall be door mounted and
include positions for off/reset, manual, automatic, and stop.
Shutdowns/Annunciation:
The generator set shall shut down and signal operational
faults of high water temperature, low oil pressure,
overspeed, and overcrank.
Monitor:
Monitoring devices shall include AC voltmeter, AC
ammeter, ammeter/voltmeter phase select switch, frequency
meter, electric hourmeter, oil pressure gauge, and water
temperature gauge.
Safety Devices:
ISO red emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided.
b.
Cycle Cranking
A cycle crank timer shall provide four 10 second cranking periods
separated by 10-second rest periods.
c.
Engine CoolDown
A cool down timer shall provide an adjustable 0-30 minute enginerunning period before shutdown .
d.
Alarm NFPA-99 requirements for the alarm panel shall be satisfied by a

24 volt DC alarm module mounted in the panel and including red
indicating lights and silencable alarm horn to annunciate alarm
conditions for high and low coolant temperature, low oil pressure,
low DC voltage, and system not in automatic.
e.
Battery Charger
A 10 ampere 24 V DC constant voltage battery charger shall be
provided which shall accept 220 volt AC single phase input to
provide 24 volt DC output. It shall be fused on the AC input and
DC output, and incorporate current limiting circuitry to avoid the
need for a crank disconnect relay. An AC ammeter and voltmeter
shall be available to monitor the charging.
16350-13
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
The following articles and paragraphs are intended to define acceptable procedures and practices
of inspecting, installing, and testing the generator set and associated equipment.
3.1
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
A.
3.2
3.3
PRE-DELIVERY TESTING
A.
Prior to delivery and acceptance, the generator set shall be tested to show it is free
of any defects and will start automatically and carry full load. This testing shall
be performed at the facility of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer in
the presence of supervising agency representative
B.
The testing shall be done on dry type, resistive load banks. Salt water brine tanks
or load banks requiring water as a source of cooling will not be allowed.
C.
Load bank testing shall be done in the presence of the owner's engineer or his
appointed representative. Testing shall be according to NETA and NFPA-110
Standard test procedure. (See Division 16 Section for Testing)
E.
Any defects, which become evident during the test shall be corrected by the bidder
at his own expense prior to shipment to the jobsite.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
A predelivery inspection must be performed by client representative at the

manufacturer local dealer facility to insure no damage occurred in transit and all
genset components, controls, and synchronizing panel .
The installation shall be performed in accordance with shop drawings,

specifications, and the manufacturer's instructions.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
The complete installation shall be checked for procedural and operational

compliance by a representative of the system manufacturer's authorized local
dealer. The engine lubricating oil and coolant , as recommended by the system
manufacturer, shall be provided by the generator set dealer. If different
manufacturers furnish switchgear and generator sets, technical representatives of
both manufacturers' authorized dealers shall verify the installation meets
requirements. Any deficiencies shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor.
B.
The system manufacturer's dealer representative shall be present to assist the

Contractor during start-up, systems check, adjusting, and any site testing required
after the installation is complete.
16350-14
SECTION 16350
L.V. GENERATOR
______________________________________________________________________________
3.5
ORIENTATION
A.
3.6
The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation

for the owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include
hands-on instruction. Which include control operation, and routine maintenance.
OPERATION / MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND PARTS MANUAL

A.
The system manufacturer's authorized local dealer shall furnish four (4) copies
each of the manuals and books listed below for each unit under this contract:
B.
PARTS Manual - which illustrate and list all assemblies, subassemblies and
components, except standard fastening hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.).
C.
PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS - on the genset that

cover daily, weekly, monthly, biannual , and annual maintenance requirements
and include a complete lubrication chart.
D.
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST - showing all consumables anticipated

to be required during routine maintenance and test.
E.
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS - showing function of all electrical

components.
END OF SECTION
16350-15
SECTION 16360
RING MAIN UNIT SWITCHGEAR (RMU)

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A. This section cover the manufacturer, furnish, install and test all equipment,
accessories and materials required for the installation of metal enclosed, RMU type
switchgear in accordance with attached specifications and drawings.
1 .2

A. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the contract
drawings and the standards listed hereunder.
and products:
1. SASO
2. IEC 60298
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1 .3
IEC 60265
IEC 62271-102
IEC 60694
IEC 62271- 100
IEC 60801
IEC 60529

AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated
voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 54 kV.
High-voltage switches,
AC disconnectors and earthing switches,
Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and controlgear,
High-voltage AC circuit breakers,
Electromagnetic compatibility for industrial process
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All materials and products shall be new, sound and uniform in quality, size, shape,
color and texture and shall be free from defects.
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed switchgear.
2. regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable
quality control procedures,
D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of switchgears for not
less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already
supplied equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been
in satisfactory operation in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for at least five years.
E. The equipment shall be approved by Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).
16360-1
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
1.4
SUBMITTAL
contract drawings or specification exist. Shop drawings and/or data sheets shall be
based on information stated in the specifications and as shown on the contract
drawings and shall show all pertinent deviations and data for the fabrication and
complete installation.
provided.
maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment or apparatus in
accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Operating instructions
shall cover all phases of control.
C. Test Reports:
1 .5
COORDINATION
A. The contractor shall be held responsible for the proper coordination of all phases of
the work under this contract.
sections of the specifications in order to assure a complete and satisfactory
installation.
1.6

B. Store switchgears in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory
wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units
from dirt, water, construction debris and traffic.
16360-2
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
switchgears internal components, enclosure and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTION
2.1
GENERAL
A. The following specifications apply to the factory-built, RMU type, compact,
extensible, metal-enclosed indoor switchgears complete with instrument transformers.
B. The equipment to be supplied shall come in the form of a compact switchboard and
shall meet the following requirements :
1. Easy to install
2. Safe and easy to operate
3. Compact
4. Low maintenance
C. Upon the request, units shall be available either in standard compact range or in
extensible versions (see the contract drawing).
D. For extensible version, extensibility shall be easily possible on site by the contractor,
without SF6 handling , without any particular floor preparation and specific tools.
When assembled, extensible units shall respect integral insulation and insensitivity to
environment.
2 .2
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. The RMU shall be suitable for operations at a height of 1000 meters or as per site
location.
B. The RMU shall be capable of operating normally within the following temperature
range
1. Maximum air temperature
+ 50 C
2. Minimum air temperature
- 25 C
C. Manufacturer shall declare whether RMU is able to operate in air temperature higher
than + 40 C and if current derating is necessary.
D. The RMU shall be capable of being operated in electrically exposed locations.
E. The RMU shall be capable of being exposed to high relative humidity and ambient air
pollution.
16360-3
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
2.3
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Network
Rated Voltage
Service Voltage
System Frequency
Lightning Impulse withstand Voltage
- Phase to phase, phase to earth
- Across the isolating distance
Power Frequency withstand voltage
Rated Normal Current
- Network disconnector
- Transformer circuit breaker feeder
Three phases - Three wires

17,5 KV
13.8 KV
60 Hz
Rated Short time current withstand ( 3 sec )

Rated Short circuit making capacity of
network disconnectors and earthing switches
Rated load interrupting current
Rated cable charging interrupting current
Rated magnetizing interrupting current
Number of mechanical operations
- Network disconnectors and earthing
switches
- Circuit breaker
Number of electrical operations at rated
current for network disconnectors
21
50
KA
KA peak at Rated Voltage
630
A rms
95
KV
110 KV
38
KV rms - 1 minute
630 A
200 A
30 A
16 A
1000 O/C
2000 O/C
100 O/C
All of the switchgear shall be capable of withstanding this current without any damage being
caused, in accordance with the recommendations IEC 60694 4.5, 4.6, 4.7 and IEC 60298
4.5.
2 .4
CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT
A. The different configurations may be used as follows, for exact requirement refer to
contract documents :
1 . Standard compact range with different
configurations between network

disconnector, transformer protection feeder and branch circuit breaker feeder.
2 . Extensible range with different configurations between network disconnector,
transformer protection feeder.
16360-4
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
2 .5
GENERAL
STIPULATIONS
REGARDING
DEVELOPMENT OF SWITCHGEAR
THE
DESIGN
AND
A. Introduction
1. The RMU shall meet the criteria for compact, metal-enclosed indoor switchgear in
accordance with IEC 60298 .
2. It shall include, within the same metal enclosure, the number of MV functional
units required, such as network disconnector and feeder circuit breakers to

transformer or branch supply.
B. Switchboards
1. The switchgear and busbar shall all be contained in a stainless steel enclosure
filled with SF6 at 0.2 bar relative pressure to ensure the insulation and breaking
functions. Sealed for life, the enclosure shall meet the "sealed pressure system"
criterion in accordance with the IEC 60298 standard (appendix GG 2.3 and 3.3 ):
a system for which no handling of gas is required throughout the 30 years of
service life. So, refilling valve is not required .In addition, manufacturer shall
confirm that maximum leakage rate is lower than 0,1 % / year.
2. It shall provide full insulation, making the switchgear insensitive to the
environment (temporary flooding, high humidity...), IPX7 degrees of protection in
accordance with recommendation IEC 60529 .
3. Thus assembled, the active parts of the switchgear shall be maintenance-free and
the switchboard shall be low-maintenance.
4. The switchboards shall have an IP2 XC protection index.
5. The tank shall be made of at least 2 mm AISI 304 unpainted stainless steel and be
able to withstand an accidental internal overpressure of at least 3 bars.
6. The switchboards shall be suitable for mounting on a trench, utilities space or
base.
7. Each switchboard shall be identified by an appropriately sized label which clearly
indicates the functional units and their electrical characteristics.
8. The switchgear and switchboards shall be designed so that the position of the
different devices is visible to the operator on the front of the switchboard and
operations are visible as well.
9. In accordance with the standards in effect, the switchboards shall be designed so
as to prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.
10 . Switchboard to be provided with DC supply (battery + charger) for operation of
switches, breakers and control
C. Dielectric medium
1. SF6 gas is the preferred dielectric medium for RMUs. Oil filled switchgear will
not be considered. SF6 gas used for the filling of the RMU shall be in accordance
with IEC 60376 .
2. It is preferable to fit an absorption material in the tank to absorb the moisture from
the SF6 gas and to regenerate the SF6 gas following arc interruption.
16360-5
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
D. Earthing of metallic parts

1. There shall be continuity between the metallic parts of the switchboard and cables
so that there is no electric field pattern in the surrounding air, thereby ensuring the
safety of people.
2. The substation frames shall be connected to the main earth busbar without
dismantling any busbars.
E. Earthing of the main circuit
1. The cables shall be earthed by an earthing switch with short-circuit making
capacity, in compliance with IEC 62271- 102 standard. The earthing switch can
only be operated when the switch is open.

2. The earthing switch shall be fitted with its own operating mechanism and manual
closing shall be driven by a fast-acting mechanism, independent of operator
action.
3. The moving contacts of the earthing switch shall be visible in the closed position
through transparent covers.
4. Mechanical interlocking systems shall prevent access to the operating shaft to
avoid all operator errors such as closing the earthing switch when the switch is
closed.
F. Network Disconnectors
1. The switches shall be of the maintenance-free, with breaking in low pressure SF6
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
gas. The position of the power and earthing contacts shall be clearly visible on the
front of the switchboard. The position indicator shall provide positive contact
indication in accordance with IEC 60265- 1 standard. In addition, manufacturer
shall prove reliability of indication in accordance with IEC 62271- 102 standard.
The switches shall be of the "increased operating frequency" in accordance with
IEC 60265- 1 3.104 standard. They shall have 3 positions, open-disconnected,
closed and earthed, and shall be constructed in such a way that natural
interlocking prevents unauthorized operations.
The switches shall be fully mounted and inspected in the factory.
Manual opening and closing shall be driven by a fast-acting mechanism,
independent of operator action.
Each switch shall be fitted with an electrical operating mechanism in a specially
reserved location, without any modification of the operating mechanism and
without de-energizing the switchboard.
The switch and earthing switch operating mechanism shall have a mechanical
endurance of at least 1000 operations.
Loop side switches shall be rated 630 A.
Each side of the RMU shall be equipped with a grand sensor relay.
16360-6
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
G. Feeder circuit breaker

1. Feeder shall be:
- Transformer protection feeder by circuit breaker (200 A).

2. The circuit breakers shall be of the maintenance-free, with breaking in low
pressure SF6 gas. The position of the power and earthing contacts shall be clearly
visible on the front of the switchboard. The position indicator shall provide
positive contact indication in accordance with IEC 60265- 1 standard. In addition,
manufacturer shall prove reliability of indication in accordance with IEC 62271102 standard.
3. The circuit breakers shall have 3 positions: open-disconnected, closed and earthed
and shall be constructed in such a way that natural interlocks prevent all
unauthorized operations.
4. They shall be fully mounted and inspected in the factory.
5. An operating mechanism shall be used to manually close the circuit breaker and
charge the mechanism in a single movement.
6. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping by an integrated push
button. There shall be no automatic reclosing.
7. The circuit breaker shall be associated with an integrated protection unit that will
operate without any auxiliary power supply and shall include:
- Three toroid transformers incorporated in the feeders tee-off bushings,
- An electronic relay,
- A low energy release,
- A "fast-on" test receptacle for protection testing (with or without CB tripping)
8. The protection system shall ensure circuit breaker tripping as of a minimum
operating current (Is) which is the rated current of the transformer or underground
cable network to be protected and may be set from 8 to 200 A for transformer
protection feeder and from 8 to 600 A for branch circuit breaker feeder.
9. For transformer protection feeder, phase to phase protection shall be able to work
from 1,2 time the minimum operating current Is.
10 . For transformer protection feeder, ground fault protection shall also be provided.
11 . For branch circuit-breaker feeder, the phase protection shall have two separately
adjustable settings:
- The low setting may be chosen with definite time or IDMT. The IDMT curves
are in compliance with the IEC 60255- 3 standard. They are of the standard
inverse, very inverse and extremely inverse types.
- The low setting may also be used with the RI curve.
- The high setting is of the definite time type.
12 . For branch circuit-breaker feeder, The earth fault protection shall be operated by
residual current measurement, which it uses the sum of the sensor secondary
currents.
13 . Like phase protection, earth protection shall be fitted with two separately
adjustable settings.
14 . Electrical characteristics of the circuit-breaker function shall not be less than the
following values:
- Rated current
200 A
- Short-circuit breaking capacity
21 KA / 17,5 KV
16360-7
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
H. RMU bushings and Cable terminations

1. Bushing
- It is preferable to have all bushings accessible from the front of the RMU.
Bushings along the sides or the rear of the RMU are not acceptable.
- The bushing should be conveniently located for working with cables specified
and allows for the termination of these cables.
2. Cable clamps
- A non Ferro-magnetic cable clamp arrangement shall be provided for all

network cables terminated on the RMU
I. Padlocking facilities
1. The circuit breakers and earthing switches shall be lockable in the open or closed
position by 1 to 3 padlocks 6 to 8mm in diameter.
J. Voltage indicator lamps and phase comparators

1. Each function shall be equipped with a voltage indicator box on the front of the
device to indicate whether or not there is voltage in the cables. The capacitive
dividers shall supply low voltage power to the lamps.
2. Three inlets shall be provided to check the synchronization of phases.
3. This device shall be in compliance with IEC 61958 standard.
K. Safety of people
1. Any accidental overpressure inside the sealed chamber shall be limited by the
opening of a pressure limiting device in the lower part of the enclosure. Gas shall
be released to the rear of the switchboard away from the operator.
2. Manufacturer shall provide type test report to prove compliance with IEC 60298
appendix AA 'Internal fault'.
L. Operating lever
1. An anti-reflex mechanism on the operating lever shall prevent any attempts to
reopen immediately after closing of the switch or earthing switch.

2. All manual operations shall be carried out on the front of the switchboard.
3. The effort exerted on the lever by the operator should not be more than 250 N for
the switch and circuit breaker.

M. Front plate
1. The front plate shall have an IP2XC degree of protection. The front shall include a
clear mimic diagram which indicates the different functions.

16360-8
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
2. The position indicators shall give a true reflection of the position of the main
contacts. They shall be clearly visible to the operator.
3. The lever operating direction shall be clearly indicated in the mimic diagram.
4. The manufacturer's plate shall include the switchboard's main electrical
characteristics.
N. Cable insulation testing
1. It must be possible to test the core or the sheath insulation of the network cables
while the RMU remains energized at rated voltage. It shall be preferable to carry
out the phase by phase testing through a built-in facility without necessity to have
an access to cable compartment.
2. The maximum test voltage shall be less than 42 kV DC for 10 minutes.
O. Remote control of the RMUs
1. A number of applications for remote operation of the RMU shall be possible.
2. Remote operation of the RMUs network disconnectors shall be possible using
motors fitted to the operating mechanism.

3. It shall be possible to fit the motors either directly in manufacturing plant or on
site when required. Installation on site shall be possible with the RMU fully
energized and manufacturer should provide detailed instructions for installation to
the control mechanism. Auxiliary contacts for remote indication of switch status
are also required.
4. The fitting of the motors to the mechanism must not in any way impede or
interfere with the manual operation of the switches. An auxiliary contact to
prevent motorised operation of the mechanism while the operating handle is
inserted into the operating point must also be provided
P. Finishing
1. The device shall be fully designed for use in a hot, humid atmosphere and shall be
low-maintenance. Manufacturer shall provide type test report to prove salt fog
withstand for at least 200 hours on operating mechanism according to IEC 600682-2 standard.
2. All metallic parts shall have rust protection.
3. Two lifting rings shall be installed on the top of the switchboards for handling.
2.6
TYPE AND ROUTINE TESTS

A. The following type-test certificates shall be submitted for the equipment :
1. Impulse dielectric tests,
2. Power frequency dielectric tests,
3. Temperature-rise tests,
4. Short-time and peak withstand current tests,
5. Mechanical operating tests,
6. Short circuit breaking tests.
7. Short circuit making tests.
8. Internal arc withstand
16360-9
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
B. The routine tests carried out by the manufacturer shall be substantiated by a test report
signed by the manufacturer's quality control department. The reports shall cover the
following aspects:
1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams,
3. HV Dielectric tests.
4. Phase continuity tests,
5. Functional tests (including mechanical operation).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1
WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the contractor, shall be installed and
all work shall be performed in a first-class workmanship manner, in conformity with
the best trade practices and the printed directions of the applicable manufacturers; by
skilled workers equipped to produce satisfactory results; in a safe, substantial manner
so as to avoid undue stresses, rigid enough to prevent undue movement, so as to
present a neat, orderly appearance and to facilitate operating, servicing, maintenance
and repairing.
3.2

A. The contractor shall provide concrete pedestals, anchor bolts, hangers, channels,
saddles, etc., for installation of equipment and apparatus shown on the drawings and
specified in the various sections.
3.3
EQUIPMENT ERECTION
specifications.
3.4

operating tests. The various equipment and systems shall be demonstrated to operate
in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. Tests shall be
performed in the presence of the client/client representative. The contractor shall
provide electric power, instruments and personnel necessary for performing the
various tests.
16360-10
SECTION 16360

FROM 3 TO 17.5 KV
___________________________________________________________________________
END OF SECTION
16360-11
SECTION 16425
STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
______________________________________________________________________________
1. General
An LVSTS is a device that will provide a source of uninterrupted electrical power to a load.
This function is based on the assumption that two independent and reliable sources of power
are available. If the source designated as the Preferred Source is determined by the LVSTS to
be out of tolerance, the LVSTS will transfer the source to the remaining source, designated as
the Alternate Source. This determination and transfer will take place in less then of a 60
Hz cycle or less then 4.17 mSec. The transfer from preferred to alternate source will be seen
by the load as a closed transition and by the sources as an open transition. The switching is
accomplished through the use of solid state devices known as thyristors or SCRs. No
mechanical switching such as wrap-around breakers or paralleling devices shall be allowed.
The thyristors must be rated for continuous duty at the LVSTS rated current.
2. LVSTS Technical Requirements
The following describes the technical requirements for the proper specification of a Low
Voltage Static Transfer Switch.
2.1. Electrical Requirements
2.1.1. Voltage
The operating range shall be 380 VAC- 1 2 wire or 3 4 wire systems. A neutral and
ground buss shall be provided. A bonding jumper between the ground and neutral bus
shall be provided for service entrance applications.
2.1.2. Frequency
The standard operating frequency shall be specified as 60Hz.
2.1.3. Switching
The main switching shall be accomplished through solid-state devices. The solid-state
devices shall be thyristors and shall be rated for 100% continuous current. Hybrid
switching using underrated thyristors and paralleling mechanical breaker or switches is
not allowed. 4-pole switching shall switch the three phases and the neutral, ABCN. The
switching of the neutral shall not result in a voltage shift between the phase voltages or a
cross-connection of the two neutrals.
2.1.4. Current Ratings
The LVSTS shall be rated for 100% continuous operation at rated current. The overload
rating of the unit shall be a minimum of 125% for 30 minutes. Fault withstand ratings
shall conform to UL1008. Short circuit ratings shall be determined in accordance with
UL1008 requirements of X/R=6.6 for three cycles. The repeatable UL1008 fault
withstand requirement is 20X or 10kA minimum at 380 VAC. The LVSTS shall have a
one time fault withstand of 65 kA at 380 VAC with rupture of the thyristors or damage to
internal bus or switchgear.
16425-1
SECTION 16425
______________________________________________________________________________
Operating Limits
The LVSTS shall supply any load with a power factor from 0 lead or lag to unity. The
efficiency shall exceed 99% with a power factor of 0.8. Load current harmonics are
unlimited. Source voltage harmonics cannot exceed 5% maximum or 3% for any single
harmonic.
2.1.5. Devices
The thyristors used as the static switch portion shall be properly sized to meet the
requirements of UL1008 without the need of series fuses or wrap-around switchgear.
2.2. Mechanical Switching Requirements
2.2.1. Devices
The LVSTS shall employ molded case circuit breakers or switches (breaker). Two of the
breakers shall serve as the disconnect means to each of the thyristor assemblies. One
breaker shall serve as the common output disconnect for the common output of the
thyristor assemblies. The remaining two breakers shall serve as bypass devices for each of
the thyristor assemblies. A sixth, breaker shall be added in parallel with the existing
output breaker. This sixth breaker provides redundancy for a potential single point of
failure. The breakers shall be plug-in. The breakers shall not be capable of being removed
unless the breaker is open.
2.2.2. Operation
The disconnecting means shall be non-automatic type with instantaneous tripping only.
Motor operators shall not be used. Shunt trips shall be provided on all breakers except the
output breaker. All breakers shall be equipped with 1 Form A and 1 Form B dry auxiliary
contact. The controller shall determine the status of each breaker. The breakers shall not
have under voltage tripping devices. Kirk Key interlocks shall be employed on all
breakers except the output breaker. The output breaker shall have a tag out/lock out
means for maintenance. The Kirk Key sequence shall not allow a cross connection of
sources during bypass operation. The bypass operation shall be conducted without the use
of any portion of the control circuit. The controls shall continue to monitor the status of
all breakers and thyristors, even in bypass. In addition to the Kirk Key lock, the controls
will not allow a closure of any breaker, via shunt tripping, which would results in a cross
connections of sources.
2.3. Mechanical And Environmental Requirements
2.3.1. Cooling
Natural convection cooling shall be provided for all units rated at 400A and below.
Forced air-cooling shall be available for all units 100A and above. All cooling fans are
to be redundant. NEMA 1 enclosure designs shall have the air inlet on the bottom of the
unit and the exhaust on the top of the unit. Filter and fan replacement shall be possible
with the LVSTS in bypass mode. The continuous operating temperature range shall be
between 0OC to 50 OC with a relative humidity not to exceed 95% non-condensing at an
16425-2
SECTION 16425
______________________________________________________________________________
altitude below 6000 . Screening on the inlet and exhaust areas shall not admit any object
greater then in diameter.
2.3.2. Enclosure
The standard enclosure shall conform to NEMA 1 requirements. Units rated between
100A and 600A shall be a single unit enclosure. Each unit shall be mounted on selfleveling casters. Units rated between 800A to 1200A shall be a two-unit enclosure. Units
rated 1600 A to 4000 A shall be three or more units. Ratings above 600A shall mount
directly on the floor.
In wet and/or hard atmospheric conditioned areas, NEMA 3R enclosures shall be used
and to have front inlet, exhaust and meet all applicable NEMA requirements. NEMA 3R
requirements may be met by placing a NEMA 1 LVSTS inside a NEMA 3R enclosure.
2.3.3. Cable Entrance And Service
Cable entrance shall be from the top, bottom or sides. Access for connections and
maintenance shall be from the front and side and/or the rear. Dedicated points shall be
provided to land all cable connections without drilling holes in the bus. All front doors are
to be lockable. All major components, thyristor assemblies, breakers, controls, are to be
removable from the front.
2.3.4. Internal Arrangements
All bus and cable connections are to be available for infrared scanning (IR) from the
front. All bus is to be copper or aluminum and rated at 1000 A/in2. All internal cables are
to be bundled and labeled. Fiber optic cables are to be used for critical control
connections to minimize impact from EMI and RFI.
2.4. Standards
The LVSTS shall conform to the following requirements and standards:
2.4.1.
ANSI/NFPA 70
2.4.2.
National Electric Code (NEC)
2.4.3.
NEMA ST-20: Dry Transformers
2.4.4.
NEMA AB1: Molded Case Circuit Breakers
2.4.5.
NEMA PB1: Panel Boards
2.4.6.
Zone 4 Seismic
2.4.7.
UL1008
2.4.8.
UL991
2.4.9.
CBEMA/IEEE 488
2.4.10. ETL
2.4.11. CE
2.4.12. cUL
2.4.13. CSA
2.4.14. UL50 Cabinets & Boxes
2.4.15. UL489 Molded Case Breakers & Enclosures
16425-3
SECTION 16425
______________________________________________________________________________
2.4.16. UL1950 Standard For Safety
2.4.17. IEEE 587/ANSI C62.41 Surge & Noise Suppression
2.4.18. ISO 9001
2.5. Controls
2.5.1. Metering
The display shall toggle between a control screen and a meter screen. In the meter mode
the following values shall be displayed simultaneously on the front panel display screen:
Preferred Source Voltage: Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn. Vcn
Alternate Source Voltage: Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn
Output Voltage: Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn
Preferred Source: Ia, Ib, Ic
Alternate Source: Ia, Ib, Ic
Output Current: Ia, Ib, Ic
Preferred Source: Frequency
Alternate Source: Frequency
Phase Angle: Between Preferred & Alternate Source
Output KVA
Output %THD to 13 Harmonic
Output Power Factor
2.5.2. Display Panel
A mimic bus shall display the status of the following LVSTS points via red/green LEDs:
Open/Closed status of each breaker
Off/On status each thyristor switch (1 LED per 6 thyristors)
Preferred/Alternate Source Selected
Source Available
Bus energized (3 LEDs: Preferred Source, Alternate Source, Load Bus)
The mimic bus shall also display the following system status indications. An
unacknowledged alarm shall also include an audible indication:
Overload
Circuit Breaker Trip
Over Voltage Condition
16425-4
SECTION 16425
______________________________________________________________________________
Under Voltage Condition
Over Frequency Condition
Under frequency Condition
Open/Shorted Thyristor
Sources In Sync
Sensor Failure
Over Temperature
Controller Failure
2.5.3. Control Setpoints
The following operating parameters and set points shall be available and shall be
adjustable via the front panel keypad:
Voltage Limits
The voltage detection thresholds may be set within the following limits. This applies to
the fast and slow detection thresholds.
Over Voltage:
0% to +100%
Under Voltage:
0% to -100%
Frequency Limits
The limits established are for synchronizing with a potentially unsynchronized alternate
source such as a diesel generator or UPS.
Over Frequency at 60Hz:
to 62Hz
Under Frequency at 60Hz:
to 58Hz
Phase Angle
The phase angle between the two sources is referenced from the active source to the
inactive source. This limit also applies when the two sources have met the frequency
criteria defined above.
Source Phase Difference:
2 Degrees to 50 Degrees
Retransfer Enable
Upon restoration of the Preferred Source, an automatic retransfer may be allowed after
the Retransfer Time Delay has expired. Retransfer Holdoff blocks any automatic
retransfer for a brief period. This allows the new source to recover from any sag or
voltage regulation reaction as a result of the initial transfer.
16425-5
SECTION 16425
______________________________________________________________________________
Automatic Retransfer: Allow/Inhibit Retransfer
Retransfer Delay:
Return to Preferred Source Upon Restoration

from 30 seconds to 12 minutes
Retransfer Holdoff:
5 seconds to 44 seconds
Source Selection
Either source can be designated as the Preferred Source. This designation will define the
retransfer source as well. This designation can be changed at will without an actual
transfer taking place until the retransfer delays have expired.
Source Selection:
Designate Preferred Source
Forced Retransfer
In the event the Alternate Source is degraded prior to the Preferred Source being restored,
a transfer can be forced to the original Preferred Source regardless of the status of the
source.
Forced Retransfer:
Automatic retransfer is Alternate Source Is also lost
Reverse Current Limit

If regenerative current, from the load to the active source, is detected above the defined
current threshold, a transfer from the active source will be initiated. Any retransfer will be
inhibited until the source is restored unless the Forced Retransfer is enabled.
Reverse Current:
5% to 190%
Overcurrent Threshold:
10% to 390%
2.5.4. Control Features

The following control features are available via the front panel or are carried out
automatically by the controller:
Auto/Manual Transfer Select
The automatic or manual transfer feature shall be selected. If the manual option is
selected, the switch will not transfer upon degradation of the Preferred Source.
Preferred Source Select
Either source may be designated as the Preferred Source. This selection may be changed
at will.
16425-6
SECTION 16425
______________________________________________________________________________
Emergency Shutdown
To allow a total interruption of all current paths, the gating signals shall be removed from
all thyristors and all circuit breakers, so equipped, shall be shunt tripped.
Emergency Transfer
An emergency transfer to the opposite source will be carried out regardless of the voltage,
phase, or frequency. This is only available as a manual function from the keypad.
Manual Transfer
Allows the operator to transfer to the opposite source even if the present source is within
tolerance.
Local/Remote Operation
Disables the local keypad and allows remote operation.
Transfer upon detection of open thyristor and alarm
In the event an open thyristor is detected in the conducting thyristor assembly, the
controller will switch to the opposite source, inhibit any future transfers, and signal an
alarm.
Inhibit transfer upon detection of shorted thyristor and alarm
In the event of a shorted thyristor detected on the non-conducting side, the switch will
transfer to the shorted side, inhibit any future transfers, and signal an alarm.
Event log
All transfer events shall be recorded with regard to conditions at the time of the transfer
along with a time stamp.
Transfer upon detection of reverse current
If reverse current from the load to a fault at the active source is detected, the switch will
transfer from that source to the opposite source.
Retransfer upon restoration of Preferred Source
The switch can be programmed to automatically return to the Preferred Source upon
restoration of that source. There is a programmable time delay that can be set between
30s seconds and 12 minutes.
16425-7
SECTION 16425
______________________________________________________________________________
Transfer inhibit into fault

If a large current accompanies a voltage drop on the active source, the switch will wait 10
seconds before initiating a transfer. This is to allow the downstream or upstream
protective device to clear the fault or the large load to start. If the condition still persists,
the switch will shutdown when the thermal limits are reached.
Sources synced transfer
If two sources such as a utility and a generator are attempting to synchronize, the switch
will transfer when the frequency and phase angles enter the transfer window.
2.5.5. Communications
The following communications options shall be available:
RS-232
RS-485
ModBus
SCADA
TCP/IP
2.6. Reliability
All critical signal paths shall be redundant or isolated. Each thyristor shall have an
independent date drive and power supply. The gate drive signal path shall be fiber optic to
eliminate issues with EMI, RFI, and voltage dielectric. Allow power supplies shall be
supplied via an inter UPS. In addition to the UPS, an additional UPS shall supply the logic
controller.
END OF SECTION
16425-8
SECTION 16440
WIRING DEVICES
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
This section cover the manufacturer, furnish, install and test all accessories and
materials required for various types of receptacles, connectors, switches and finish
plates.
1.2
APPLICATION CODES AND STANDARDS

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
SASO
Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
BS 3676
Lighting Switches
BS 1363
Socket Outlets
BS 4293
RCD
BS 4343 & BS 5420 Industrial Sockets
Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical devices,

sizes, and ratings. These products have been in satisfactory use and in service
for not less than 2 years. Products shall be complied with requirements of
local codes, British and IEC Standards.
SUBMITTAL
Submit the followings:A.
Product Data: Data shall be submitted for each product specified in this
section, with catalog clippings and manufacturer technical specifications.
B.
Samples: Provide sample for each device which shall be used and for all
relevant accessories (cover, plates). Colour selection and technical
features shall be complied with the requirements of codes and of the
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
General
Wiring devices shall comply fully with the relevant Local, and International
Standards and all types shall be of the same manufacturer to provide consistent
appearance and finish.
Rated voltage and ampere should be indicated on all wiring devices
16440-1
SECTION 16440
WIRING DEVICES
________________________________________________________________________
2.2
Wiring Devices
Boxes and Fittings

Boxes shall be provided with means for securely terminating conduits.
Heavy-molded rigid PVC boxes shall be provided with brass insert threads and
fixed lugs to receive cover screws.
Plates
Plates shall be of square or rectangular shape to adequately cover corresponding
outlet boxes and be designed to fit the electrical devices, Various samples shall be
submitted for approval and/or selection by the Engineer.
Fixing screws shall be recessed chromium plated, polished. Screw head shall be
finished to suit the plates.
Plates for socket outlet shall match switch plates in each particular area.
Plates shall be designed to match associated devices and to cover the outlet boxes.
Plates for flush mounting devices shall be constructed of metal or stainless steel or
moulded materials of white in colour, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Socket (Receptacles) Outlets

The Contractor shall supply a unified standard type socket (receptacle) outlet for
the whole project.
Standard socket outlet for use in single phase circuits 220V (service) shall be rated
13 amp, 250 volts with two poles plus earth. The earth terminal of each socket
shall be effectively connected to the earth continuity conductor, phase and neutral
conductors to the respective terminals.
Receptacles shall have fire-resistant non-absorptive hot moulded phenolic
compositions or equal bodies with metal plaster ears, internal with supporting
member. Receptacles shall be flush type except where otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
Contacts shall be self-adjusted and have a non-expanding size limiting entry, to
prevent permanent distortion.
Where duplex socket outlets are shown on Drawings, two of this type of socket
shall be mounted under one common plate.
16440-2
SECTION 16440
WIRING DEVICES
________________________________________________________________________
Weatherproof socket outlets shall be mounted in the box specified with a gasketed,
weatherproof cover plate, with individual cap over each socket outlet opening and
stainless steel mounting screws. Caps shall be tightly closed with spring-retained
cover when socket outlet is not in use.
Terminals for 220V outlets shall each be capable of receiving and satisfactorily
connecting two (2) conductors (solid or stranded), each of 4 mm2 minimum.
Socket outlets for flush fitting shall be mounted in appropriate recessed box.
All power sockets for use in three-phase circuits 220 volts (Service) shall be, 4 wire, 32
amps. or 45 amps as indicated on the drawings, 3P+E, 400V weatherproof type. The
locations of these receptacles are shown on the drawings.
Power sockets shall be provided with matching plugs
250V general purpose Socket outlets shall be mounted with correct polarity, such that
switch shall cut the hot wire.
Socket outlets used for UPS shall be marked UPS Outlet engraved on it.
Receptacles in hazardous areas in which flammable gases or vapours may occur shall be
of explosion proof type in accordance with IEC-79.
Industrial socket outlet shall be 16 or 32A, 250 V or 400 V, 2P+N+E or 3P+N+E,
single with polycarbonate housing switch and matching plug.
All sockets located in wet areas are to protected with earth leakage module.
D
Switches
-
Switches shall be quick make and quick break type, suitable for use
with standard interchangeable plates. Switches for use in incandescent
or fluorescent lighting circuits shall be of the A.C. general use type
and be fully rated 10 amps at 250 volts and as indicated on the
drawings.
Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cap
type with entire body of moulded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fiber,
paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or
cover. Switch handles shall be of white colour. Metal yoke shall not
extend beyond the sides or constitute the switch body cover. The
mounting yoke shall be insulated from the mechanism, equipped with
plaster ears and fastened to the switch body or bolts, screw rivets or
other substantial means that meet test requirements. Provision of an
equipment grounding screw in the yoke is optional. The section of the
yoke normally intended to bear on the surface outside the box shall
have a minimum over-all dimension of 20 mm measured at right angles
to the longitudinal axis of the coke.
16440-3
SECTION 16440
WIRING DEVICES
________________________________________________________________________
Contacts shall be made between silver or silver alloys. Switches shall
be back and side wired with terminal of screw or combination screwclamp type. Terminal screw shall be not smaller than M3 and shall be
captive or terminal type. Back wire devices shall have separate access
holes for wiring. The screwless type shall have an additional hole for
wire release.
-
Switches shall not be connected in the neutral conductor. Switch shall

be rigidly attached to outlet boxes by means of two screws.
Adjacent switches used in different phases must be provided with

marking indicating this.
20 amp or 30 Amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light,

and shall have the Works "Water Heater" engraved on it when used
for that propose.
45/50 amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light, and
shall have the work "Cooker" engraved on it when used for that
purpose.
Switches assemblies shall be of the grid switch system, comprising

grid switches and cover plates of metal or stainless steel or moulded
material with white finish, unless otherwise indicated and approved by
the Engineer
Switch assemblies shall comprise 16 or 20 amp lighting switches, and
other units if so indicated on the drawings.
Cable Outlet
Cable outlet shall comprise a moulded cover plate with a side groove for 3 x
16mm2 multicore flexible cord, a cable clamp, 3 terminals for 16mm2
conductors.
F.
Wiring Devices Assignment
Location
General Areas, Corridors,
Offices and small electrical
rooms
Out door;
Roof top
Major Electrical /
Mechanical rooms
Laundry / Kitchen
Finishing / Protection
Flush Mounting;
White Plastic
Surface Mounting
Ingress Protected IP 56
Polycarbonate housing with
cover and seal
Metalclad,
Surface Mounting
Polycarbonate housing
Surface Mounting
Manufacturer
To the approval of the
Engineer
Engineer
Engineer
Engineer
16440-4
SECTION 16440
WIRING DEVICES
________________________________________________________________________
IP 44 Splash proof
PART 3 - EXECUTION
General:
Flush-mounted boxes shall be cast in concrete walls and grouted into hollow walls.
Metal boxes threaded to raceways in exposed installations shall be separately
supported.
Boxes installed in concealed conduit or raceway systems shall be set flush with the
finished surfaces. The location of all boxes shall be easily accessible and any
interference with mechanical equipment or structural features shall be relocated as
directed by the Engineer.
Sockets:
The sockets shall be located and installed as shown on the Drawings. The location
shall be easily accessible. Receptacles shall be so installed that the neutral
(grounded) pin is always on the left side or top side,
when viewed facing the installation.
Switches:
Local wall switches near doors, shall be located at strike side of doors as finally
hung, whether so indicated on Drawings or not.
A junction box shall be placed in the back of each wall mounted switch or socket
outlet.
If thickness of wall does not permit such an installation, adjacent position shall be
accepted.
The switches shall be installed as shown on the approved Drawings. Where more
than one switch is shown for one indoor outlet box, the switches shall be installed
under one plate. Toggle switches for lighting, except for 3-way and 4-way
switches shall be installed so that the contacts are closed when the handle is in the
up position.
Switches shall be mounted with longer dimension vertical and operating handle in
upward position when in the "ON" position.
Single pole switches shall switch the (phase) wire circuit. Neutral wire shall not
run through switches provided with a neutral shunt or bridge.
Device Plates:
16440-5
SECTION 16440
WIRING DEVICES
________________________________________________________________________
Device plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with
finished wall surfaces without the use of mats or similar devices. device plates shall
be installed vertically with an alignment tolerance of 0. 16 mm (1/16 inches).
Mounting Height:
The mounting height of wall-mounted outlet and switch boxes; measure between
the bottom of the box and the finished floor, shall be as specified and as approved
by Engineer.
ID
Switches
: 110cm FFL
Socket
: 30cm FFL
Above Counter : 20cm from top of counter sockets
F/A Break galss : 190 cm FFL
F/A Srumder
: 220 cm FFL
END OF SECTION
16440-6
SECTION 16441
SAFETY SWITCHES
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
1.2
The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non-fused
switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.
REFERENCES
A.
The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in
accordance with the latest applicable standards:
1.
2.
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW / APPROVAL

A.
The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:

1.
Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in paragraph

1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.6
Dimensioned outline drawing.

Conduit entry/exit locations.
Switch ratings including:
a.
Short-circuit rating
b.
Voltage
c.
Continuous current
Fuse ratings and type
Cable terminal sizes
Product data sheets
SUBMITTALS FOR CONSTRUCTION

A.
1.5
NEMA KS-1
UL 98
For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or
9002 certified.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
The safety switches shall bear a UL label.
SECTION 16441
SAFETY SWITCHES
___________________________________________________________________________
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
PART 2 2.1
Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturers

instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the
equipment at time of shipment.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Products in compliance with the specification shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
2.2
GENERAL DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES

A.
Provide switches as shown on drawings with the following ratings:

1.
30 to 600 amperes
2.
240 volts AC maximum
3.
2- and 3-pole plus S/N
4.
Fusible and non-fusible
5.
Mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or copper conductors.
B.
Construction
1.
Switch blades and jaws shall be visible and plated copper.
2.
Switches shall have a black handle through 100A (except on plug-fuse
type) that is easily padlockable with two 3/8-inch shank locks in the
OFF position. Higher rating shall have a red handle that is easily
padlockable with three 3/8-inch shank locks in the OFF position.
3.
Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door
from opening when the handle is in the ON position.
4.
Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the
enclosure.
5.
Switch blades shall be readily visible in the ON and OFF position.
6.
Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasable, positive quickmake/quick-break type (except 30A plug-fuse type).
7.
Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment and be
equipped with factory installed neutrals.
8.
All switches (except 30A plug-fuse type) shall have side opening doors.
Door padlocking capability shall be provided.
9.
Suitable for systems capable of 100kA with Class R Fuses (except 30A
plug-fuse type).
10.
Double-make, double-break switch blade feature shall be provided
(except 30A plug-fuse type).
11.
30A to 100A shall have R fuse rejection capability (not applicable to
plug-fuse type)if on the drawings specified as fused switch.
SECTION 16441
SAFETY SWITCHES
___________________________________________________________________________
C.
2.3
NAMEPLATES
A.
PART 3 3.1
Nameplate shall be front cover mounted, containing a permanent record of

switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating.
EXECUTION
FACTORY TESTING
A.
3.2
Enclosures
1.
All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 general purpose unless otherwise
noted.
2.
Other types, where noted, shall be:
a.
NEMA 3R approved for outdoor application.
b.
NEMA 1 plug fuse indoor
3.
Paint color shall be ANSI 61 gray.
4.
30A to 60A NEMA 1 enclosures shall have tangential knockouts on the
top, bottom, and sides of the enclosure. NEMA 3R enclosures shall
have tangential knockouts on the bottom and sides. (Not applicable to
NEMA 1 plug-fuse type).
Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this
section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and
NEMA standards.
INSTALLATION
A.
The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendations.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16450
OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
and materials required for the installation of oil-immersed distribution transformer in
accordance with attached specifications and drawings.
1.2

and products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
SASO
IEC 60076- 1
Power transformers to 60076- 5
IEC 60354
Loading guide for oil-immersed type power transformers.
CENELEC Harmonization Documents:
- HD 398-1 to 398-5: 1980.
- HD 428-1 S1: 1992.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed transformer.
2. regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable quality
control procedures,
D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of transformers for not
less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied
equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been in
satisfactory operation in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for at least five years.
E. Equipment shall be approved by Saudi Electricity Company
16450-1
SECTION 16450
OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV
___________________________________________________________________________
1.4
SUBMITTAL
provided.
C. Test Reports:
1.5
COORDINATION
16450-2
SECTION 16450
OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV
___________________________________________________________________________
1.6

B. Store transformers in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory
transformers internal components, enclosure and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTION
2.1
GENERAL
A. The following specifications apply to three-phase oil-immersed transformers,
hermetically sealed with integral filling, insulation system with oil natural air natural
(ONAN) cooling for indoor installation destined for use in three-phase MV/LV
distribution systems.
2.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Magnetic Core
1. This shall be made from laminations of grain oriented silicon steel, insulated with
mineral oxide; the method of cutting and stacking shall be "step lap", so as to
optimize the level of no-load losses.
B. LV Windings
1. These shall be made from copper profile wire.
C. MV Windings
1. These shall be made of copper profile wire or copper round wire.
D. MV Connections
1. Fixed MV plug-in bushings straight or elbow according to the orientation of the
incoming cables shall be provided.
16450-3
SECTION 16450
OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV
___________________________________________________________________________
E. LV Connections
1. The LV connections shall be made using porcelain bushings up to 200 KVA, and
flat-bars from 250 KVA onwards.
2. A LV air-insulated terminal cover shall be provided.
3. Neutral shall be fully rated and brought out
F. MV Tapping
1. The tapping which act on the highest voltage adapting the transformer to the real
supply voltage value, shall be provided with an off-circuit tap-changer switch with
a padlocking facility on the top cover of the transformer.
2.3
MAIN CHARACTERISTIC OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Tank
1. The tank of the transformer shall be made with flexible cooling corrugations, in
order to absorb the expansion of the dielectric due to temperature variations.
2. The cover shall be bolted on top of the tank.
3. The tank shall be built in such a way as to avoid any water accumulation.
B. Dielectric and Component Material
1. The dielectric shall be mineral oil, class I & II according to IEC 60296 .
2. The concentration in PCB has to be lower than the minimum detection rate of 2
ppm (parts per million).
3. The components of the transformer such as insulation material, varnish, painting,
etc. have to be new and PCB-free.
4. The filling of the transformer shall be made under vacuum, in order to guarantee
the maximum preservation of dielectric properties.
5. The live part of the transformer shall be previously oven dried so as to remove all
residual humidity.
C. Gaskets
1. All the gaskets shall be resistant against the action of the mineral oil, at the
working temperature.
D. Protection Against Corrosion
1. The anticorrosion treatment of the tank and the cover shall comprise:
- An external degreasing and rinsing
- A hot phosphating operation
- A powdering through application of a polyester resin with an electrostatic spray
gun (minimum thickness 40 to 50 microns)
16450-4
SECTION 16450
OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV
___________________________________________________________________________
2. The main characteristics of the coating guarantee:
- A gloss of 30 to 60 % for an angle of 60 (measured according to ASTMD523)
- A salt spray resistance of 1000 hours (measured according to ASTM-B117)
- A UV resistance without losses more than 10% gloss according to the RAL
scale 1 (measured according to NFT 30-057, over a 3 months period).
- An adherence of between 0 and 1 (measured according to ASTM-D3359)
2.4
ACCESSORIES AND STANDARD EQUIPMENT

A. The transformers shall be equipped with:
1. 4 bi-directional flat rollers
2. 2 lifting and untanking lugs
3. 2 earthing terminals
4. 1 filling plug
5. 1 draining device
6. 1 Presuure relief device
7. 1 rating plate
8. 1 "Danger Electricity" warning label
9. 1 routine tests certificate
10 . 1 instruction manual for installation, commissioning and maintenance in English.
B. Protection
1. The transformers shall be equipped with a DGPT2 protection relay (or equivalent)
including:
- 1 gas detector/flow level indicator with one contact (for gas discharge and drop
in liquid level)
- 1 over pressure contact (for internal pressure increase)
- 2 thermostats for alarm and tripping (for internal temperature increase)
- 1 dial type thermometer without contact.
2.5
ROUTINE AND TYPE TESTS

A. Routine Tests
The following tests shall be carried out on all the transformers after the manufacturing,
enabling an official test certificate to be produced for each one:
1. Measurement of windings resistance.
2. Measurement of the transformation ratio and vector group
3. Measurement of impedance voltage and load loss
4. Measurement of no load loss and no load current
5. Applied voltage dielectric test
6. Induced voltage dielectric test
16450-5
SECTION 16450
OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV
___________________________________________________________________________
B. Type Tests and Special Tests
The following tests shall be submitted for the transformers:
1. Temperature rise test.
2. Lightning impulse test.
3. Short circuit test.
4. Noise level measurements in accordance with IEC 60551 .
5. Measurement of partial discharges.
C. The manufacturer shall produce a test report from an official laboratory on a
transformer of the same design as those produced.
Transformer Technical Data
Type
Rated power
Cooling
Standard
Thermal Class
Dielectric
Max. ambient temperature
Dielectric temperature rise
Winding temperature rise
Average daily temperature
Average yearly temperature
Vector Group
Winding material
Rated primary voltage
Rated primary insulation level
Power-frequency withstand voltage-rms
Impulse withstand voltage - peak
MV tapping range (off-circuit)
Rated secondary No-load voltage
Frequency
Rated impedance voltage
Hermetically sealed
as shown on the drawings at
50 Deg. C. and shall be derated
for relative humidity and altitude
applicable to site.
ONAN
IEC 60076 and SASO
A
Mineral oil
50 Degree C
50 K
55 K
40 Degree C
30 Degree C
Dyn11
Copper
13.8 KV
17.5 KV
38 KV, 1 minute
95 KV
+/ - 2.5 % +/- 5 %
400 V
60 HZ
6 % max
16450-6
SECTION 16450
OIL-IMMERSED MV/LV
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials, products and equipment furnished by the contractor, shall be installed and all
work shall be performed in a first-class workmanship manner, in conformity with the
best trade practices and the printed directions of the applicable manufacturers; by
and repairing.
3.2

3.3
EQUIPMENT ERECTION
specifications.
3.4

provide electric power, instruments and personnel necessary for performing the various
tests.
END OF SECTION
16450-7
SECTION 16520
EXTERNAL LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
Without restricting the generality of the foregoing, the installation covered under this
section of the Specifications shall include the supply, delivery to site, storage,
installation and putting into satisfactory operation the following:
Cables from external lighting panel to all fuse junction boxes of external lighting
columns, including trenching concrete encasement when needed, backfill, and the
like.
External lighting columns with foundation holding - down bolts and accessories,
excavation and backfill, painting and the like.
External lighting luminaires with lamps, control gear, outlets, junction boxes, internal
wiring and the like.
Luminaires generally shall comply with IEC 598 and the applicable C.I.S.P.R
recommendations. Manufacturer shall verify compliance with these standards and the
applicable local regulations and design standards.
Earthing system with the pit, earthing rod and accessories, earthing conductor,
excavation, backfill and the like.
Making good any impaired surface or grade finish and transportation of excess earth.
Calculations, preparation of 'shop' and 'as-built' drawings, equipment data, technical
literature, instruction manuals, samples and the like.
Labelling of all equipment
Testing of installation and hand-over upon completion of the work.
A
General Design Conditions

The electricity to the lighting pillars (FPP) shall be made available at
380 /220 V declared volts, three phase, four wire 60 Hz, with solidly grounding
neutral from the existing L.V. supply point.
Power supply to each luminaire shall be at 220 V, 60 Hz.
The lighting loads shall be evenly balanced across the three phases in
accordance with the Drawings.
Unless otherwise stated, all equipment shall be designed and derated for
continuous and trouble free service under 40 oC maximum ambient
temperature, 90% relative humidity and maximum sun radiation temperature
16520 -1
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
reaching 50 oC, with a high content of ultra violet rays. The equipment shall
be able to withstand full load operation
exposed to sun, corrosive agents, vermin and the like. Unless otherwise
indicated or specified all low voltage equipment shall be of the 600/1000 volt
class.
The component parts of each electrical system or piece of equipment shall be
the latest standard product of a single manufacturer to provide operation and
performance in accordance with the general design intent of the Specification.
Where the use of components by different manufacturers is permitted such
components must be of standard designs and dimensions and be fully
interchangeable.
1.2
PERFORMANCE AND STANDARDS

A
Testing
Testing and inspection of the installation shall be carried out in accordance
with the Regulations and Standards listed in the documents after completion
of the work prove compliance with the Specification. The tests will be carried
out in the presence of and to be satisfaction of the Engineer.
Manufacturer's test certification for appropriate equipment shall be handed to
the Engineer prior to the Site testing being carried out.
All result of the tests on Site shall be recorded and signed by all witnessing
parties. Subsequently, three copies of all such documents shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
Prior notice shall be given to the Engineer of proposed tests together with a
list of equipment to be used. In particular the Contractor shall submit his
proposals for measuring the illumination levels and for calculating the average
levels as specified.
All tests including where applicable, insulation test, continuity tests,
effectiveness of earthing, measuring of earth electrode resistance shall be
carried out under the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs involved in testing and
commissioning and shall re-test at his own expenses any item that fails. No
repeat test shall be carried out until the cause has been established and
rectification of the failure has been carried out.
16520 -2
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
The Contractor shall include the following tests to be carried out on Site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
lighting panel tests

insulation resistance test with 500 volts megger
phasing out of polarity check
operation and protection gear tests
visual inspection: The Contractor shall include for carrying out the
following tests in addition to those previously called for:
*
*
*
Condition of equipment and quality of the workmanship

Level, perpendicularly and alignment of the columns and
Luminaires.
Actual characteristics of equipment.
Measurement of insulation resistance: Insulation resistance tests on the

various LV circuits, shall be performed after insulation, in accordance with
approved Standards to determined the adequacy of insulation between phases,
neutral and earth (lamps shall be removed during these tests where
applicable).
Resistance tests of the earthing of all metallic frames and earthing conductor
and pits.
The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer after completion of
all tests for authorization of connection of the power supply to the
installation.
Also the following operational tests must be performed:
-
Normal functioning of all lamps.
Operational tests on all switchgear and power equipment including

recording the voltage at the terminals of each ballast on the final
column in each circuit.
Performance tests after 100 hours of normal functioning:
Measurement of illumination levels and uniformity's.

1.3
SUBMITTALS
The manufacturer shall supply the following technical documentation and information
for each type of luminaires:
A
Catalogue sheet of the luminaire
Detailed construction drawing of the luminaire
16520 -3
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
C
Polar diagram of luminous intensity in roadway vertical plane and transverse

vertical plane.
Utilization factor curve for actual inclination of luminaire
Isolux diagram for actual inclination of luminaire
Intensity table, in the C-gamma co-ordinates recommended by C.I.E. Nr. 27

publication.
Computer calculation printout as detailing photometrical performance, with

illuminance and luminance levels and uniformities and TI values.
Tightness test certificate confirming the IP 65 protection degree from the

optional compartment of the luminaire and the IP 23 protection degree for the
control gear compartment. This test certificate shall be issued by an
independent official laboratory.
Wind resistance of one luminaire (value of Cx. s product).
Total weight of the luminaire (with lamp and control gear).
Power factor of one complete luminaire.
Total electric consumption of the luminaire, including control gear losses.
Mark and type of lamp to be used.
Rated lumen output of the lamp under nominal conditions.
Depreciation curve of the luminous flux with burning hours.
Luminous flux variation with the main voltage.
Mark and type of ballast, ignitor and capacitors with their electrical
characteristics.
Approval Of Equipment
The Contractor shall not order any equipment before submitting to the
Engineer, and receiving approval of, three copies of the detailed technical
characteristics of the equipment proposed for the installation, including
catalogues. Documents shall be in English.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, submit samples to the Engineer for
approval of each type of luminaire, piece of equipment and cable proposed
for the contract, complete in every respect, after the technical characteristics
have been approved by the Engineer.
16520 -4
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
The approval of the proposed columns will only be given after the acceptance
by the Engineer for the detailed calculation and design to be submitted by the
Contractor as detailed on the Drawings.
The Engineer reserves the right to verify the performance and quality of the
samples by instructing that tests of his choice to be carried out at the
Contractor's expense before granting approval of the sample.
Approval of samples by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from his
contractual obligations in respect of suitability of equipment or its final
performance once installed.
The Engineer reserves the right to reject any sample, piece of equipment or
cable presented by the Contractor which, from examination is found not to
comply with the general intent and meaning of the Specifications and/or
Drawings.
No claims whatsoever shall be allowed against the Employer and/or the
Engineer due to rejection of a sample and the Contractor shall be wholy
responsible for any delay resulting from such rejection.
S
Calculations
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval before ordering
equipment, luminaires construction details and photometric performance
characteristics certified by a laboratory, together with supporting
documentation of illumination levels and uniformity's calculations and
luminaries settings based on CIE standards to prove compliance of the
propose installations with the Lighting Design Criteria.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A
Manufacturers
The list of approved manufacturers appearing in the following sub-sections
indicates the minimum quality and standard of equipment to be accepted.
Products of unlisted manufacturers having equivalent repute and standard will
be considered by the Engineer on an equal basis. In this respect, the
Engineer's decision shall be final and not subject to any justifications.
Lighting Design Criteria

Road surfaces on which the lighting levels shall be measured is defined as the
width of all traffic lanes of all roadways.
The illuminanced and luminance levels of the roadways as specified below are
the maintained average levels to be calculated and substantiated by
16520 -5
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
measurements by the Contractor, after 100 hours of operation. The
Contractor shall specify the anticipated lamp lumen and luminaries dirt
depreciation factors after two years of operation certified by the
manufacturers, to assist the Engineer in assessing the maintained levels of the
installation.
Upon the completion of the installation the Contractor shall be required to
carry out measurements of illumination on site in accordance with Subsection
'Testing of Installation'.
The following lighting design criteria has been applied.
1.
Arrangement:
The columns are spaced at intervals as shown on plans.
Contractor shall check location of all columns, to ensure that the
installation does not cause any conflict with other installations.
Clearances required by International Regulations shall be applied. In
case of a conflict, the issue shall be raised to the Engineer
accompanied with the proposed solution for approval before
proceeding with any works. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
ensure that above Regulations and Clearances required are met.
Roadway Lighting Columns

Lighting columns shall have an octagonal section, tapered type, made from
sheet steel electrically welded.
Column walls shall have a minimum thickness as detailed on the drawings
and the overall diameter of the column at its base shall be sufficient to accept
the cable termination and control equipment as shown on the Drawings.
The column tops shall be designed to receive the approved luminaires or
group of luminaires to form an aesthetic homogeneous assembly. Special
brackets shall be supplied for a multiple luminaires assembly.
The columns shall be made of sheet steel with a minimum rupturing resistance
of 37 kg/mm2 and minimum yield strength of 24 kg/mm2 .
The Contractor, shall obtain assurance from manufacturer, so that the column
once installed and fully equipped shall be able to withstand a wind of 160
km/hr blowing in the most unfavorable direction, at a height of 5 meters
above ground level taking into consideration the effect of two luminaries
heads assumed having not less than a resistance of 25 kg/luminaires plus any
special bracketing. Appropriate reinforcement shall be provided where needed
to increase the strength.
16520 -6
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
Access door of weatherproof construction shall be positioned at column base
and shall be suitably sized to insert and service the supply cable termination's
and protective device. Door shall be flush fitting with retaining mechanism
and positive locking arrangement with removable hexagonal key. Column
shall be reinforced at door opening. Opposite each door, a non-hygroscopic
baseboard of suitable size to accept appropriate equipment shall be fixed to
inside of column by purpose-made brackets. Stainless steel earthing stud
with washers and nuts shall be welded inside the column near the access door.
The fatigue of the steel shall in no case exceed half of the elasticity limit,
taking into account dynamic stresses due to vibrations.
A steel flange plate of adequate thickness shall be solidly welded onto the
lower edge of the column as shown on the Drawings. The plate shall have the
required number of holes for columns to accept the holding down bolts
together with a clearance hole in the center as shown on the Drawings.
D
Finish
All welds shall be smooth and spatter removed. The interior and exterior
surfaces of the columns shall be cleaned by pickling or blasting and shall be
free of any grease trace.
All components of the column shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
No further touching up, finishing or modifications shall be carried out after
galvanizing. The minimum thickness of zinc coating shall be 500 g/m2 on both
the inside and
outside faces of the column. Galvanizing shall be carried out by total
immersion in molten zinc bath.
The galvanizing standard used shall be at least equal to French Standard NFA
91 121 (June 1985 ) or U.K. Standard BSS 729/71 .
Any damage to the galvanized shall be corrected and repaired during erection
by wire brushing affected area and treating with an approved rust inhibitor to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
At site after weathering, the galvanizing shall be washed down with a mild
detergent solution (one percent tepol by volume) and well rinsed with clean
sweet water. The following coatings shall than be applied by brush working
within a temporary enclosure to be erected on Site by the Contractor to
maintain suitable conditions for painting:
One coat Mordant Solution ref. 45/0141 . After 16 hours drying all surfaces
shall be checked to have turned black. Any area remaining metallic gray shall
be degreased and a further coat of Mordant Solution applied.
One coat of Tower phosphate primer ref. 151/1544 to a thickness of microns.
16520 -7
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
E
Foundation Columns
Concrete for columns bases shall be class A concrete made with sulphate
resisting cement all as specified in subsection 'Civil Works' of these
Specifications.
The position of the anchor bolts and the level of the top surface shall be
exactly determined and adjusted. PVC conduits of sizes as shown on the
Drawings shall be installed in the foundations for incoming and outgoing
feeder lines.
The tops of the foundation blocks shall be horizontal and mid-point level
adjacent back edge of should or kerb or as detailed on the Drawings. Any
error exceeding plus or minus 25 mm shall be corrected.
Columns shall be installed on the concrete bases as shown on Drawings.
Holding down bolts, plumbs adjusting nuts and washers shall be anticorrosion treated steel.
Erection of the lighting columns along the roadways shall be such that
luminaires shall be located on a line parallel to the theoretical profile of the
road. Alignment of the columns both horizontally and vertically must be exact
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Handling, off loading, storing on site, erecting and adjusting of columns shall
be carried out carefully to avoid any damage to columns and to the anticorrosion painting coat.
Concrete Footing For Floodlight Pole

The bases for the light poles shall be constructed in reinforced Portland
cement concrete or lean concrete in accordance with the requirements of the
section for structural concrete of the general specifications for Civil Works
and as shown on the drawings.
The concrete bases shall be built on prepared foundations, Conform to the
dimensions indicated on the drawings or as required by the Engineer.
Instructions of the manufacturer of the poles shall strictly be followed with
regard to Conduits, anchor bolts, etc. The required reinforcement, anchor
bolts, lighting poles and conduits shall be placed as indicated on the drawings
and shall be approved by the Engineer before the concrete is poured. In order
to achieve a firm bond between the base and the surrounding soil, backfilling
along the vertical faces of the base will not be permitted. The volume of
poured concrete shall be equal to the volume of excavation, as indicated on
the drawings.
16520 -8
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
G
Column Mounted Luminaires

Luminaires shall be factory assembled and wired, complete with lamp,
electrical gear and accessories. Each luminaires shall be provided with the
necessary 3 x 2.5 mm2 heat resistant thermoplastic 3 -core cable for
connection to the column fuse/junction box and shall be tested on ground
before installation. The third core of the above cable shall be connected to the
earth bolt inside the Luminaires and the fuse box respectively.
Luminaires adjustment shall be made at the factory to provide a
predetermined composite light distribution. Luminaires shall be installed on
top of columns single, twin or in multiple arrangement as shown on drawings.
Purpose made brackets shall be to the manufacturer's specifications. The
angle of inclination shall be in accordance with the design requirements.
Luminaires shall be set at 90 oC to the longitudinal axis of roadways.
Fuse/Junction Box
The fuse/cable junction box shall be of cast metal with hinged lockable cover.
It shall house a 4 A HRC fuse to each luminaire, terminal blocks for maximum
3 incoming feeder cables up to 25 mm2 and outgoing cables to luminaires up
to 4 mm2 with cable holding clamps. All cable entries, fuse supports and cable
connection joints shall be made of porcelain or special backelite suitable for
the weather conditions encountered on site. Each luminaire shall be fed by at
least 3 x 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated and sheathed heat resistant copper cable
drawn inside the column from the junction box.
Luminaires-Mechanical Specification
All luminaires material shall support without damage or aging or alteration in
structural or physical properties, severe climatic conditions (tropical climate)
in addition to heat emitted by the lamp. Plastics and other similar materials are
not acceptable.
Exposed non aluminium metallic parts of the luminaires shall be factory
finished, stove enamelled with a suitable corrosion resisting paint not affected
by the heat emitted by the lamp during continuous operation every if
necessary under maximum sunlight conditions. Colour to be agreed with the
Engineer.
Luminaires shall be firmly fixed on top of the column so that rotation or
falling of the luminaires will not occur even if the column is subject to heavy
impact.
Description Of Street Lighting Luminaires

16520 -9
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
Luminaires shall be dust and splash proof IP65 to IEC529 specifically
designed to house the lamp and accessories. The luminaires shall be able to
withstand a wind speed of 160 km/hr during a short period.
Luminaires shall be made of extruded or pressure die-cast aluminium alloy of
the corrosion resistant type with exterior totally smooth. The copper content
shall be less than 0.05 percent to prevent intercrystalline corrosion.
The luminaires shall incorporate a die-cast aluminium control gear support
casting with side entry facilities. Access to the spigot entry fixing screws shall
be from the underside allowing tightening when canopy is fixed to the casting.
-
The casting shall be finished with stove enamelled acrylic or epoxy

polyester in black, or other approved paint treatment processes.
The casting shall support the control gear assembly, which must be
easily removed as one unit for maintenance purposes with plug and
socket electrical connection.
High pressure die-cast entry pieces of non-corrosive aluminium and a

light weight glass fibre re-inforced polyester housing of outstanding
quality will be accepted if meeting the following requirements.
Housing shall be a one-piece pressure die-cast GRP moulding finished

in high reflectance white inside and outside. The molecular structure
of the polyester shall be of the long chain type providing
for maximum resistance against corrosive atmospheres and the effects

of the sun's radiation and ultra-violet rays.
The GRP housing shall be guaranteed in writing by the Manufacturer

for a minimum of ten years for the intended environment. It shall be
the tenderer's responsibility to ensure the luminaire canopy's
suitability, as luminaires without guarantees will not be considered.
Mirror reflectors shall be of high purity (99.9% ), glazed and anodized

aluminium rigidly fixed to be body and easily replaceable. The reflector shall
be adjustable to predetermined positions to obtain the suitable light
distribution.
Optical compartment or unit shall be protected by a very high shock resistant
clear glass refractor and shall be dust and water-tight to the recommendation
of IEC publication No. 144 . Both faces of the refractor shall be smooth to
reduce to a minimum dirt accumulation and maintenance and have a
coefficient of transmission of the order of 90 percent.
16520 -10
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
Plastic bowls (acrylic, or methacrylate) shall be permitted if they have a
maximum resistance to atmospheric corrosion and the ultra-violet effects of
the sun polycarbonate bowls shall not be accepted.
-
The Engineer shall be the sole judge to approve plastic bowls on the
basis of the technical characteristics submitted by the supplier.
If approved, plastic bowls shall be smooth externally and internally

and shall be injection moulded, one piece.
Bowl/frame assembly shall be hinged to the body and maintained in

place with stainless steel fixing spring clips and a neoprene gasket
ensuring complete dust tightness. Removal of bowl frame assembly
from the hinge shall be possible without tools.
The housing to bowl gasket shall be continuous polyurethane without

joints and shall be capable of withstanding the temperature, radiation
and elements to which they may be exposed, and designed to exclude
dust and water when fitted. It shall be attached to the luminaire
canopy in such a manner that it will be retained in position when lamp
bowl is opened. When the bowl pressure is removed from the gasket,
the gasket shall assume its original shape as though new, ie., 100%
recovery rate.
The housing and lamp compartment shall be complete with necessary bosses
and fixings to support and hold firm the lampholer die cast U shape & support
bracket and lamp reflector/optical systems to ensure precise lamp
position throughout life of luminaire. A locking system shall prevent the
loosening of the lamp.
-
The support bracket shall allow the socket to be moved into at least
three different vertical positions to adjust the lamp for focal point.
The lampholder should be fixed securely to the canopy and designed

in a way that it cannot be disturbed during its normal lifetime,
(vibrations) or during maintenance operations (lamp replacement).
The luminaire optical system shall be removable for maintenance

purposes with a replacement only possible in the correct position in
relation to the light source for correct light distribution.
Lamp, control gear and ignitor shall be mounted in two different and isolated
compartments. Heat emitted by lamp shall not be conducted to control gear
components. An enclosed terminal block composed of plug-in quick
disconnect
electric leads shall be included such that all electrical connections shall not be
exposed to weather the canopy shall hinge downwards from the support/gear
16520 -11
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
casting to give access to the control gear compartment from above for
maintenance purposes, allowing a complete and easy visual check of all
electrical parts and connections. The hinge point shall be between lamp
compartment and support casting to provide canopy stability during
maintenance in the event of high winds, and shall be restrained/steadied with a
chain connected between the spigot casting and canopy. It shall be possible
to gain access to the control gear compartment without having to disturb the
separate lamp compartment.
Manufacturer's name and catalogue reference of lighting luminaires are given
for general reference only. It shall be understood that the actual fixtures
supplied shall meet all the requirements of the specifications, and, if
necessary, the standard fixture indicated for reference, shall be modified
accordingly.
Material of other manufacturers complying with the
Specifications will be considered on equal basis.
Luminaires shall bear manufacturer's name and the factory inspection label.
Luminaires shall be completely wired and constructed to comply with IEC
Publication 162 , unless otherwise specified.
Relamping the fixture shall be possible without having to remove the fixture
from its place.
K
Cable
Power will be distributed to the lighting installation by directly buried
underground cables or in conduits (refer to drawings) at 38 0 /220 volts, 60
Hertz, 3 phases, 4 wires, solidly earthed neutral.
Cables for low voltage distribution in External lighting installation shall be as
specified under "Wires & Cables".
Earthing
Earthing system shall be in full compliance with the requirements of the
Regulations and the Specifications.
All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of columns, pillars,
Luminaires, cable armour, shall be grounded. Series earthing of one piece of
equipment to another shall not be permitted.
Earthing installation shall consist of:
-
Earthing of each column by the armour of the cable. The final column
in each circuit cable run shall be connected to an earth pit as shown on
the Drawings.
16520 -12
SECTION 16520
________________________________________________________________________
-
Luminaires shall be earthed by means of the third conductor (2.5

mm2 ) and connected to the earth terminal inside fuse/junction boxes
of columns.
Bonding to the column and panels shall be made by means of 16 mm2

stranded copper single core bare cable bolted to the earth rod. Bolts, washers
and nuts shall be of the zinc copper alloy. Ferrous hardware will not be
accepted.
M
Labelling
All items of equipment shall be adequately and clearly labelled. Lighting
columns shall be fitted with Trifoliate or similar labels to give black lettering
on a white background of sufficient size to be visible from a passing vehicle.
These labels shall be attached to the columns by means of stainless steel nuts
and bolts positioned just above the access doors. The columns shall be
identified in accordance with the coding and locations shown on the
Drawings.
External lighting feeder pillar labels shall be engraved on Trifoliate to give
black lettering on a white background, and shall indicate the voltage, current
rating and phase colour, together with the manufacturer mark.
All accessories such as local switches, switch-fuses and isolators used for the
control of equipment, lighting fittings etc. shall carry engraved identification
plates to indicate the circuit number and phase to which accessory is
connected as shown on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
16520 -13
SECTION 16550
UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 1.1
GENERAL
SCOPE
The Contractor shall supply, install and connect a complete underground distribution
system as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
General routing of the underground distribution system shall be adhered to, except
that any interferences with other trades or with existing underground installation
shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
Underground distribution shall be either directly buried or in concrete duct
banks as specified or shown on the Drawings. Roadway crossings shall in any case
be in concrete duct banks.
Manholes and handholes shall be used as required and/or as indicated.
Concrete used shall be class A.
1.2
PERFORMANCE AND STANDARDS

A
Testing - General
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and appliances for
testing the underground cable circuits. The Contractor shall test to his con
satisfaction and then request in writing the presence of the Engineer to
witness and demonstrate to his satisfaction the following:
1.
That all lighting, power and control circuits are continuous and free
from short circuits.
2.
That all circuits are free from unspecified earth.
3.
That all circuits are connected in accordance with applicable wiring

diagrams.
4.
That all connections are corrosion free and mechanically sound.
5.
That all circuits are operational. Demonstration tests shall include

operating each Control not less than 10 times and the continuous
operation of each lighting and power circuits for not less than 4 times
4 hours.
High voltage insulation resistance tests shall be performed in the presence of

the Engineer.
16550 -1
SECTION 16550
__________________________________________________________________________
Test sheets shall be supplied in triplicate to the Engineer signed by
Contractor's Electrical Engineer and counter-signed by the Engineer's
Electrica1 Engineer.
B
Electrical Tests On Cable

Cables buried in earth (that is, not in duct) should be tested before and after
backfilling the cable trench.
Site Tests
1.
Power Cables
a)
Conductor Resistance Test

When the installation of cables and associated jointing
accessories has been completed, the d.c resistance of each
conductor shall be measured and recorded and shall not
exceed the values given in IEC/BSS.
b).
Insulation Resistance Test

Insulation resistance test shall be carried out on all cables
installed with an insulation resistance tester.
c)
Continuity Tests
Continuity tests shall be carried on each core of power and
pilot cables, after the cables are installed and jointed.
2.
Inspection
Inspection by appropriate authority shall be carried out at the
following stages of work:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Cable trench before laying of cables.

Cables laid in trench before back filling.
After protection tiles are laid.
After warning tape is placed.
Further work at each stage shall proceed only after inspection and
approval.
16550 -2
SECTION 16550
__________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 A
PRODUCTS
Directly Buried Cables
Directly buried cable shall be laid underground as shown on the Drawings
and as herein specified.
Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall be excavated to
approved formations and dimensions. Trenches shall have vertical sides and
shall be close timbered and strutted where necessary to prevent subsidence.
All unsuitable excavated material shall be removed from site.
All cables laid in the same trench shall be placed in the same horizontal
plane leaving a space of at least 7.5 cm except as otherwise shown on the
Drawings and specified hereinafter.
Cable trench depth shall be as shown on layout drawings, with minimum
depth of 100 cm for a single layer of HV cables unless otherwise indicated on
drawings. Minimum depth from the top of cables to finished grade, unless
otherwise, indicated on layout drawings, shall be 100 cm for LV power
feeders, and 45 cm for street lighting cables.
High tension cables shall, where possible, be laid in separate trenches.
Otherwise a space of at least 50 cm shall be left between these cables and
any other cable unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Direct buried cables shall be laid in a clean soft sand bedding with nominal
depth of 100 mm below cables and at least 100 mm above the top of cables.
Bedding shall be of clean small-grained sand or equivalent, free of stones
and other material liable to damage the cables.
After the cables have been laid, the trenches shall be backfilled in 150 mm
thick layers which shall be well watered and rammed and consolidated.
Backfill containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large/sharp angular
material, or corrosive material shall not be placed in an excavation where
materials may damage ducts, cables or other substructures, or prevent
adequate compaction of fill or contribute to corrosion of ducts, cables or
other substructures.
Trench filling shall be well-watered and compacted to obtain highest possible
thermal conductivity and to avoid cavities in the trench-top covering
following any settling of the soil.
The surface of refilled trenches shall be temporarily reinstated in a thoroughly
safe condition until complete consolidation of the soil is achieved.
Direct buried cables shall be protected by suitable PVC cable covers,
complete with marking indicating the presence of electrical cable Covers
16550 -3
SECTION 16550
__________________________________________________________________________
shall be standard interlocking type laid a nominal 100 mm above the top layer
of cables throughout their full length. Covers shall extend to full width of
cables laid, giving an overlap of at least 50 mm, beyond outer cables.
A red PVC strip marked 'DANGER' and as specified in the design
specification shall be installed 100 mm above cable protection covers.
Adequate guarding and/or fencing shall be provided to all excavations for
the protection and safety of the public, traffic and adjacent properties.
Where trench/joint pit excavations involve removal of pavement
slabs/interlocked tiles, permission for taking them out shall be obtained from
the Ministry of Communications/Municipality. All care and attention shall
be excercised in their removal and later reinstatement to the entire
satisfaction of the Ministry of Communication/Municipality.
Cables shall be laid direct from drums.
Sufficient number of rollers shall be provided to avoid twisting of cable on its
longitudinal axis during the pulling operation.
Rollers shall be placed as close as possible to avoid abrasion to the cable
serving.
If power driven cable pulling is employed, it shall be by bond pulling method
using steel carrier wire.
Cable laying operations shall be carried out with all care and attention, to
ensure that no damage to the sheath, armour or its serving is caused
during the process. The ends of cross linked polyethylene cables shall be
capped to prevent ingress of moisture into the filler or other hygroscopic
elements of cable. The caps shall remain intact during transport and laying
operations.
All cable or armour shall have links to earth to enable testing of sheath.
Earth resistance shall not be greater than 10 ohms.
All schemes employing power cables having on extruded outer covering shall
be installed as an insulated system.
Cable screens shall be solidly bonded to earth at each end of the route.
Bonding leads shall be of sufficient cross section to carry the maximum short
circuit current.
16550 -4
SECTION 16550
__________________________________________________________________________
B
Manholes And Handholes

Manholes and handholes shall be constructed of class A concrete cast in
place or of precast-concrete sections with leakproof joints.
Frames and covers shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings.
Manholes shall be provided with cable racks, hooks, pulling irons and other
features as shown on the Drawings and as required.
A 15 cm crushed-stone base shall be placed under each manhole and
handhole.
Conduits entering manholes and handholes shall terminate in end bells.
Additional openings in manhole walls for future conduit entrance shall be
provided where required or as indicated. Such openings shall be sealed with
necessary courses of brick.
The exterior surfaces of all manholes and handholes shall be given two
heavy coats of bituminous water proofing material.
Cable Identification
Cable Identification shall consist of :
a)
b)
Cable route and joint markers.

Identification markers of the cable itself.
Cable route and joint markers shall be placed at intervals of 50 metres and at
points of route alignment changes and at both ends of road for road or pipe
crossings. Cable trenches less than 100 cm side shall be provided with single
markers on the center line of the run.
Trenches wider than 100 cm shall be indicated by markers mounted on each
side of the trench at the intervals specified.
Markers shall be 60 x 40 x 10 cm class B concrete block with 2.5 chamfer
around edges. The top of the markers shall be flush in paved areas, shall
protrude 5 cm in unpaved areas and 2 cm in finished lawns.
The words "Electrical Ductbank" with directional arrows shall be impressed
both in English and in Arabic on the markers used for ductbanks.
The words "Electrical Cables" shall be impressed both in English and in
Arabic on the markers used for direct burial Cables.
Similar materials suitably inscribed shall be used to indicate the position of
underground joints.
16550 -5
SECTION 16550
__________________________________________________________________________
All power and control cables shall be provided with identification markers at
their termination, and at points along the route at intervals of not more
than 25 metres apart. Markers shall be made of permanent material of an
approved type.
D
Cable Records
Records of cables shall be carefully taken on site during the execution of the
works. The records shall show the routes, the exact location of each cable,
the position of joints and terminations, the date of jointing, weather
conditions prevailing, the date of testing, the name of jointer, the lengths
between joints, the serial number of cable drums, the direction of lay of
cable, that is A to Z ends, and where more than one cable is laid, sectional
insert of cable trench. Any other services that cross the route of the cable
shall be recorded.
Power Cables End Sealings

Power cables terminating in cable pits shall be left slack at least 2 meters.
Cable end sealing caps shall be used to terminate all cables in cable pits.
Sealing cap, shall be constructed of rubber with high density polyethylene
ends, factory assembled onto removable collapsible cores supplied for site
installation in a prestretched condition.
Sealing caps shall provide moisture, ozone, acid, alkali, ullraviolet and
contamination resistance. In addition they shall provide puncture resistance
due to sharp conductor strands.
Sealing caps shall be similar to PST 8520 , 1,2,3 .
Power Cables Jointing

Power cables of long stretches that cannot be continuous may be jointed
with an approved method of jointing suitable for directly burial.
Tape shall be of self-fusing EPR based material insulation, Corona and water
resistant. Physical and electrical properties shall be unaffected by the
degree of stretch.
Tape shall be similar to Scotch 23 .
In-line mould assembly shall be used to encapsulate the joint. Mould shall
be similar to Scotchcast In-Line joints 91 -A15 , 16 , 17 etc. when using steel
wire armoured cables. Proper moulds shall otherwise be provided for other
approved types of armoured cables.
Standard cable resin shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer.
16550 -6
SECTION 16550
__________________________________________________________________________
G
Installation In Duct Or Conduit

The maximum number and voltage ratings of cables installed in each single
duct or conduit, shall be as follows:
a.
Power cables of the same voltage may be installed in the same duct.
b.
Power cables of different voltage, but less than 600 volts may be
installed in the same duct.
c.
Power cables of less than 600 volts should not be installed in the same
duct, with control, telephone, or coaxial type cables.
d.
Power cables of more than 600 volts should not be installed in the
same duct, with control, telephone, Coaxial or power cables of less
than 600 volts.
e.
control, telephone, and coaxial cables may be installed in the same

duct.
Connections or joints made in any cable shall not be installed in any Conduits
or ducts.
The Contractor shall make sure that the Complete duct is open, continuous
and clear of debris before installing cables. The pulling wire installed in the
pipes is to be used for pulling the rope for the cable installation. The cable
shall be installed in a manner to prevent harmful stretching of the conductor,
injury to the insulation, or damage to the outer protective covering.
Moistureseal tape or crimp socket before installing and it shall be left sealed
until Connections are made. Where more than one cable is to be installed in a
duct or conduit under the same contract, all cables shall be installed at the
same time.
The pulling of cable through ducts or conduits shall be accomplished with the
use of cable grips or pulling eyes. Maximum pulling tensions shall be
obtained from the manufacturer of the cable for straight ends and bends.
A lubricant recommended for the type of cable being installed shall be used
where pulling lubricant is required. Duct or conduit markers temporarily
removed for excavations shall be replaced as required. Kinks or cuts in the
insulation or the sheath of the cable shall not be permitted and will cause
rejection of that part of the cable length.
Such cable shall be replaced by the Contractor without any additional cost to
the project. After installation of cable in ducts or conduits, Contractor has to
make sure that the pulling wire in each pipe of the duct/conduit is re-installed
and that the ends of ducts/conduits are provided with plugs.
16550 -7
SECTION 16550
__________________________________________________________________________
In manholes or handholes, the cable shall be carefully formed around the
interior, avoiding sharp bends. Cables and splices shall be properly supported
by plastic cable racks where necessary.
H
Installation In Trenches
Cables shall be unreeled in place alongside or in the trench and shall be
carefully placed on the sand bedding on the bottom of the trench as indicated
on the standard Detail Drawings. Cables shall not be unreeled at one spot
along the trench and then from there pulled into the trench and dragged
through the trench. Where two or more cables are laid parallel in the same
trench, they shall be placed apart with a minimum distance of 10 cm center.
The trench shall be wide enough to accomplish this. Cables crossing over
each other shall have a minimum of 10 cm vertical displacement with the
topmost cable depth at or below the minimum required depth below finished
grade. At least 100 cm of cable slack shall be left on each side of dusting to
light units or transformers and at all other points where cable is connected to
field equipment. The slack cable shall be placed in the available space of the
trench.
Low Current Cables Jointing

All low current cables splicing shall be done in handholes. Splicing straight or
butt) shall be direct burial grade. Splicing shall comprise a PVC transparent
enclosure with end caps with required sizes and configurations to meet exact
requirement. End caps shall have 1 , 2 or 3 stepped openings which shall
accomodate at least 4 different cable sizes by trimming off the unwanted
portion. Stainless steel clamps shall hold the mold halves and end caps
firmly in place.
Closures shall be filled with approved
encapsulate the splice for burial application.
compound
to
completely
Splicing shall be done under the following situations:
When standard cables lengths are not adequate for a long run.
When number of pairs entering a handhole is different than number
of pairs outgoing.
Cables shall moreover be left 2 meters slack in the handhole.

Cable terminations shall be treated in a similar manner with end seal
enclosures. Future connection will be performed by removing this
enclosure, doing the in-line jointing and encapsulating in a new
enclosure.
END OF SECTION
16550 -8
SECTION 16610
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
______________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION:
A.
1.2
The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installation of a

complete uninterruptible power supply system as shown on the drawings
and as specified herein.
REFERENCES:
A.
ANSI - American National Standard Institute

ANSI C84.1 Voltage Rating for Electric Power Systems and
Equipment (60 Hz)
B.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

Pub/No. 1B 4 Amperehour and Watthour Capacity of Lead-Acid
Industrial Batteries for Stationary Service
Pub/No. 1B 5 Life Testing of Lead-Acid Industrial Batteries for
Stationary Service
Pub/No. PE 1 Uninterruptible Power Systems
Pub/No. 250 Enclose for Electrical Equipment
C.
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

NFPA 70
NFPA 71
NFPA 75
NFPA 99
NFPA 101
D.

Installation, Maintenance and Use of Central Station
Signaling Systems
Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment
Health Care Facilities
Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 59
IEEE 446
Semiconductor Rectifier Components

Practice for Emergency and Standby, Industrial and
Commercial
Power Systems
16610-1
SECTION 16610
______________________________________________________________________
E.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

UL 486A
UL 486B
UL 924
UL 1778
1.3
1.4
1.5
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data : Submit manufacturers data on uninterruptible power

supply systems and components.
B.
Shop Drawings : Submit layout drawings of UPS systems and

accessories including, but not limited to, rectifiers/chargers, batteries,
and instruments.
C.
Maintenance Data : Submit maintenance data and parts lists for

uninterruptible power supply and accessories including trouble
shooting maintenance guide.
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A.
Handle uninterruptible power supply equipment carefully to prevent

damage, breaking, and scoring. Do not install damaged units or
components; replace with new.
B.
Store units in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.
C.
For further requirements follow manufacturer's written instruction

regarding storage and handling.
WARRANTY:
A.
1.6
Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors
Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors
Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment
Entire system and components shall be warranted by manufacturer for

period of minimum 2 years from the substantial completion against
defective materials and workmanship. Warranty shall be jointly signed
by the manufacturer and the contractor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture

of uninterruptible power supply systems, of types and ratings required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not
less than 5 years period, and shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
16610-2
SECTION 16610
______________________________________________________________________
B.
Installer Qualifications : Firm with at least 3 years of successful

installation experience on projects with uninterruptible power supply
systems similar to that required for this project, and shall be authorized
by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
C.
Comply with the applicable requirements of the following codes :

1.
NEC as applicable to installation and construction of electrical

equipment.
2.
NFPA 71, 75 and 101.
3.
UL 1778, ANSI, IEEE and NEMA.
4.
Provide UPS system components which are UL-Listed and Labeled

or Otherwise to the approval of engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1
2.2
GENERAL:
A.
Provide UPS systems, or type, rating, details on charger and electrical

characteristics as shown on drawings; consisting of rectifiers/chargers,
inverters, AC transfer switches, maintenance switches and batteries with
charger. Construct the ancillary instruments, indicators and controls
required for UPS systems to operate as complete and independent
installation. Mount ancillary components on front of enclosures. Finish
enclosure in manufacturers standard finish and color. The entire system
including converter, inverter, battery charger, transfer equipment, and
battery shall be designed for maximum reliability in emergency service
and shall be designed with modular construction for easy field
replacement.
B.
All solid state components shall be rated at twice the actual duty
requirements.
EMERGENCY INVERTER SYSTEM:

A.
Furnish and install emergency AC inverter system capable of serving a

127 volts, 60 Hertz connected load for a period shown in the drawing.
B.
The system shall be designed to operate from 400 volts, 3phase, 60

Hertz (or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service), and supply the
maintained power load at 400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or 230 volts, 1
phase, 60 Hertz service) under both normal and emergency conditions.
16610-3
SECTION 16610
______________________________________________________________________
2.3
2.4
2.5
DC to AC INVERTER:
A.
The DC to AC inverter shall be of the solid-state type with ferroresonant output transformer to provide 400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or
230 volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service) output.
B.
Design shall be such that the output voltage shall be regulated within 3/4
5% from no load to full load to unity power factor over the entire range
of input battery voltage and the frequency shall be regulated within +/- 1
Hz.
C.
Design shall be such that the inverter will automatically shutdown on

high battery voltage.
D.
Total conversion efficiency shall be within 75% minimum and shall

have a sine wave output with 10% nominal total harmonic distortion.
E.
Self-protective feature shall include automatic 130% current limit, short

circuit protection, fail-safe start-up, automatic low battery shutdown, and
reverse input polarity protection. The input power and control circuitry
shall be separately fused.
AC to DC CONVERTER:
A.
AC to DC converter shall be capable of keeping battery fully charged

during time utility power is on and supplying DC power to inverter to
prevent interruption of AC load power.
B.
System shall incorporate sensoring diode method of switching upon loss

of utility AC and shall be equipped with automatic bypass switch in
event of inverter malfunction.
BATTERY:
A.
The battery shall be sized to power the fully loaded inverter for one (30)
minutes or as indicated on drawings and shall be of the high capacity,
sealed, lead-calcium requiring no addition of water during service life.
B.
Batteries shall be re-chargeable after being fully dis-charged.
C.
Rechargeable battery shall have an expected service life in excess of 10

years and shall be guaranteed for 10 years; 1 year unconditionally and 9
years pro-rata.
16610-4
SECTION 16610
______________________________________________________________________
2.6
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS:

A.
2.7
2.8
Instrumentation and controls shall be suitable to determine that the

system is operating in a satisfactory manner. As a minimum, these shall
include a light for battery low/high voltage, ready normal power ON
light, charge light, inverter supplying load pilot light, battery voltmeter,
ammeter, and test switch to check system operation.
FINISH AND MOUNTING:

A.
The entire system shall be enclosed in a free-standing, 14 gauge, sheetsteel NEMA 1 enclosure, painted chlorium blue, with hinged door. The
doors shall be key-locked.
B.
The inverter and charger shall be mounted above the battery on isolating
shelves in the unit. All components shall be mounted on easily
removable chassis with quick disconnect interwiring.
C.
All potentially hazardous components shall have safety covers and be

properly marked with tags to indicate care handling. The battery shall be
arranged for easy maintenance. Every possible care shall be taken to
main installation and connection easy and fast.
PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE
Rating
:
As shown on drawings
Voltage Input
:
400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or 230
volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service) as drawings
Voltage Output
:
400 volts, 3phase, 60 Hertz (or 230
volts, 1 phase, 60 Hertz service) as drawings
Input Frequency
:
60 Hz +/- 1 Hz
Output Frequency
:
60 Hz +/- 1 Hz
Steady State Output Voltage :
400 (or 230) VAC as drawings) +/5%
Output Wave
:
Sine wave, with approximately
10% distortion
:
into resistive load, 5% distortion
optional
Power Factor
:
0.75 lag to 0.90 lead
Inverter Efficiency
:
80% during emergency run
Overload Capability
:
130% for 5 minutes
Ambient Temperature Limits :
0 C to 49 C (32F to 120F)
MTBF
:
In excess of 20,000 hours
Switching
:
Automatic by-pass upon inverter
failure
Minimum Load
:
10%
16610-5
SECTION 16610
______________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION:
A.
The uninterruptible power supply system shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturers drawings, instructions, and recommendations.
B.
All electrical wiring and methods shall conform to the requirements of

Section 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.
TESTING:
A.
The completed installation shall be tested in accordance with the

manufacturers recommendations. Testing shall be conducted by the
representatives of the manufacturer. The Client and the Engineer shall be
notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the test.
Certified copies of test procedures and results shall be forwarded to the
Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
16610-6
SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
______________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION:
A.
The Work consist of furnishing and installation of a complete lightning

protection system conforming to as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.2
APPLICABLE CODE :
BS 6651
SASO 16600 - 2 05
1.3
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data for each type of product specified herein.
B.
Material Samples.
C.
Shop Drawings.
D.
Qualifications: Submit proof that the installer of the lightning protection

system has had suitable and adequate experience installing other lightning
protection systems, and is capable of installing the system specified
herein.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A.
B.
1.5
Coordinate installation of lightning protection system with the installation

of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring,
supporting structures and building materials, and metal components
requiring interface with lightning protection systems.
Complete coordination shall be required with structural works .
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Materials and workmanship shall comply with applicable requirements of

BS 6651 and SASO
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL:
A.
Lightning protection system shall be air terminal type and shall conform to
the applicable requirements of BS 6651 .
16670 -1
SECTION 16670
______________________________________________________________________
B.
Air Termination System:

No part of the roof within the air termination network should be more
than five meters from a conductor.Roof conductor shall be bare copper
tape of size as shown on drawings.
Roof conductors shall be installed within 0.5 m of the roof perimeter or
on top of parapet. All metal equipment mounted on the roof (e.g. Air
conditioning equipment, exhaust fans) shall be bonded to the air
termination system.
Air Terminals
Air terminals shall be copper , and shall be a minimum of 500-mm long
15-mm diameter, and taper pointed.
Down Conductor System
All metal building structures (e.g. shading structures, metal window
frames) shall be bonded to the down conductor system.
There shall be a minimum of two down conductors, with at least one
down conductor for each 20 m of building perimeter. Each down
conductor shall terminate in an earthing rod or plate and provided with a
test link.
C.
Earth Termination System

Earth rods
Earth rods shall be
inch minimum diameter by
-feet long, copper
clad steel , stainless steel or copperbonded steel.

Unless specific site conditions indicate otherwise, copperbonded steel rods
shall be preferred ,constructed of low carbon steel with tensile strength of
at least 600N/mm2. Copper cladding shall be 99.9 % electrolytic copper,
molecularly bonded to the steel, to a thickness of 0.25 mm.
Threads shall be rolled. Machined threads or threads in which the steel
core is exposed shall be rejected. Rods shall be inspected and rejected if
there is any indication of separation between steel core and copper
cladding.
Rod couplings shall be high copper alloy and shall completely cover the
thread when in position.
Earthing conductors shall be connected to earth rods with a clamp
consisting of high copper alloy with phosphor bronze screw.
Earth rods shall be installed close to the building. In rocky soils they shall
be installed in predrilled holes, with conducting material such as bentonite
packed down around them. Where it is necessary to have several rods in
parallel to achieve the desired resistance level, the distance between rods
shall be not less than their length or 2 metres minimum.
16670 -2
SECTION 16670
______________________________________________________________________
Earth Plate - solid copper
Solid copper Earth plates shall be minimum 600 x 600 x 1.5 mm,
constructed of high purity copper.
Earth plate - lattice copper, minimum thickness 3 mm may be used as an
alternative.
Earthing Service Manhole
The main connection to the earth rod system shall be in an earthing
service manhole. The manhole may be constructed of concrete or clay
pipe with concrete, galvanized steel or cast iron cover plate. In all cases
the device must be sufficiently strong to sustain traffic load in the location
selected. The manhole, or inspection pit shall be large enough to permit an
earth bar with multiple earth connections to be fitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
A.
Air terminals:
1.
B.
C.
Conductors or Tapes:
1.
Roof conductors shall be installed and coursed where applicable.
2.
No bends along the conductor shall be angled at less than 90

degrees and a radius shall not be less than 20 cms.
Bonding or Metallic Bodies:

1.
3.2
Air terminals shall be base-mounted as shown on the drawings in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shop
drawings.
All metal parts of the building or equipment exposed to lightning

strike or within 180 cms. of the lightning protection grid shall be
bonded to the grid by approved type of bolted connectors.
TEST:
A.
Resistance of the Earth termination system to ground shall be less than 10

Ohms. Where the system consists of several rods or plates (one for each
down conductor) the resistance of each shall be less than ten times the
total number of rods or plates.
- END OF SECTION 16670 -3
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, apply to work of this

Section.
Bill of quantities
Related section
1. all section related to fire alarm interface with other system
(CCTV, HVAC, Elevatorsetc)
2. Grounding
3. Conduit and fitting
4. Basic materials and methods
5. Cable trays
6. Wires and cables
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope shall include but not limited to the following
Supply system equipments according to approved list of materials
Handle and store equipment in appropriate environment condition
Install system devices according to system specification
Start up system
Programming system according to required function and specification
Test and commission all system according to related specification
documents
Put into operation all system components
Integrate all other system with fire alarm systems
Provide all other services as indicated in this specification
Provide necessary documents and final shop drawing for obtaining
approval from authorities having jurisdiction
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The fire alarm system shall have Main Fire Alarm Central Panel MFACP at
Security Room.
There is separate network between all fire panels in ring configuration for
redundancy.
The system shall provide manual means of alarm initiation at every exit from
every level.
The system shall provide automatic initiation using intelligent addressable
detectors
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
The system shall be interfaced to electromechanical system such as HVAC,

Fire fighting and Elevator.
The provided fire alarm system shall be suitable for the functions of the
premises as provided by the local fire authority and by the relevant
international codes. Alarm shall be selective using audiovisual alarm. Alarm
shall be also circuit, point and software defined for group annunciation.
Wiring and devices shall be supervised with all operations as described in
Specifications.
Extent of Work: The extent of work of the fire alarm system is indicated in the
documents (Drawings, single line diagram, B.O.Q, etc.). Work shall include all
labor, equipment and services to furnish and install a complete system.
1.4
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The fire alarm system shall consist of the following components:
- Intelligent addressable main Fire Alarm Control Panels (MFACP) with
printer with auto dialer
- Intelligent addressable Fire alarm control panels (FACP)
- Intelligent Addressable Manual pull station.
- Intelligent addressable detectors smoke type
- Intelligent addressable detectors heat type
- Intelligent addressable detectors multi sensor
- Intelligent photo smoke detector with sounder base.
- Fire alarm sounder with flashing beacon
- Mounted flashing strobe.
- Repeater panel (RFACP)
- Conventional heat detector
- Beam detector transmitter
- Beam detector receiver.
- Fire men's telephone jack
- Control modules
- Monitor module
- GDT: graphical display terminal with GUI
- Network including conduit cabling , pull boxes and all necessary
accessories
1.5
REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS

Equipment and installations shall be performed in strict accordance with the
following Local Standard and International Codes:
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
National Fire Protection Association Standards

NFPA No.:
72A
Local Protective Signaling Systems
72B
Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems
72C
Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems
72D
Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems
72E
Automatic Fire Detectors
72G
Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems
72H
Testing Procedures for Protective Signaling Systems
101
Life Safety Code
International Electro-technical Commission

IEC No.:
60331
Tests for Electric Cables under Fire Conditions Circuit integrity
60754
Tests on Gases Evolved During Combustion of Material From

Cables.
61034
Measurement of Smoke Density of Cables Burring Under Defined

Conditions.
60228
Conductors of Insolated Cables.
60332
Tests on Electric Cables under Fire Conditions.
British Standard Specifications

BS No
6387
Specification for Performance Requirements for Cables Required

Maintaining Circuit Integrity Under Fire Conditions.
Local Standards:
Saudi Civil Defense Regulation and Approval
1.6
SUBMITTALS
System installer shall submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
the Contract and Division-1 Specification Sections:
1.6.1
General: System installer shall submit complete sets of documentation as stated

by the contract conditions indicating the type, size, rating, style, catalog number,
manufacturer's names, photos and/or catalog data sheets for all items to ensure
compliance with these specifications. This documentation shall be subject to
approval and no equipment shall be ordered without this approval, for all
equipment and devices, which are shown on Drawings.
-
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
1.6.2
Shop Drawings: System installer shall submit shop drawings showing

equipment/device locations, all boxes, back boxes (types, sizes) and connecting
wiring of entire fire alarm system including riser diagrams.
1.6.3
Product Data: System installer shall submit manufacturer's technical product

data, including specifications and installations for each type of fire alarm system
equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, operation and
maintenance instructions for inclusion in maintenance manuals.
1.6.4
Maintenance Data: System installer shall submit maintenance data and parts
lists for each type of fire alarm equipment installed including furnished specialties
and accessories. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Division-1 and other
relevant documentation.
1.6.5
Instruction Manuals: The System installer shall provide with the assistance of
the equipment manufacturer and its authorized, local representative complete
operating instructions, pertinent system orientation documents and system
service, testing, and alarm documentation in the fire control area (Fire Alarm
Control Panel) for the permanent use of the Employer and the Fire Department.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The system and all its components shall be according to the listed codes and
standards.
1.7.1
Manufacture Qualifications: Manufacturing firms should be regularly

engaged in manufacture of fire alarm systems of type, size and electrical
characteristics and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
services for not less than 5 years.
1.7.2
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a factoryauthorized sale and service representative to perform the work of this section.
Installer shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience in
projects with fire alarm systems similar to those required for this project.
1.7.3
Training: Equipment's manufacturer and his authorized, local representative

shall provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to
selected Employer's personnel for at least two weeks.
1.7
Coordination
1. all interface protocols and required hardware and software needed to
submit and satisfy system operation shall be part of this contact
2. Fire alarm zoning shall be coordinated with Public Address system ,
HVAC , Elevators , smoke managements and fire fighting systems
-
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
and BMS
1.8
Spare Parts and Extra Material

The system shall have spare parts not limited to:
- 2 % of fire alarm detector
- 2 % of manual pull station
PART 2
PRODUCTS
All equipment and materials shall be designed to operate and provide maximum
continuous performance at temperature and humidity of the project location.
Provisions should be inherently provided in the equipment to protect them from
reduction in performance or damage at peak climatic conditions.
The system shall be complete, electrically supervised multiplex style fire
detection with intelligent analogue alarm initiation to device addressable and
annunciated as described and shown on drawings.
The system shall be extendable in capacity.
The system shall be based on a central architectural concept.
Devices connected to the signal line circuits shall be individually identifiable
at the control panel for alarm and trouble identification. Detectors shall be
monitored for sensitivity settings from the control panel and logged for
changes in sensitivity indicating need for changing.
The system shall include a self-diagnostic capability.
2.1
SYSTEM OF OPERATION
Alarm shall be initiated from an individual alarm initiating circuit(s),
device(s), manual switches, addressable device(s) and software defined group
of addressable devices reporting the alarm condition at the MFACP/FACP
equipment. This condition shall operate the alarms and counter measures.
Fire alarm signals shall be initiated automatically from the FACP and
transmitted to selected device circuits or to all of them. This condition will
sound an alarm signal together with a flashing LED.
Pressing the acknowledge key at the FACP shall silence the alarm sounders
and cause the LED to light continuously during the alarm condition. This
shall be repeated for any subsequent alarm condition.
All zones are manually re-settable from the MFACP/FACP after initiating
devices are restored to normal
One main Graphic User Interface (GUI) located in the Main Fire Station
shall control and monitor all fire alarm system points of the existing system
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
and the new system specified herein. It shall have full control and monitoring
of the combined systems (existing + new) through 2-way communication. It
shall be possible to connect multiple GUI in the network if desired by the
Client to have backup.
Basics alarm performance requirement if activation fire alarm initiating from
devices (detectors, switches fire protection device through monitoring
modules) shall cause the following indication and action:
1- Activation of positive alarm sequencel at MFACP/FACP
a. Local alarm in the control panel for the period of a
Programmable time T1.
b. During this delay time (T1), a local (staff) alarm (stage 1)
Only is to be given. If the alarm is not acknowledged
Before timer T1 runs out , this is to result in notificationAppliance operation (stage 2)
c. If the alarm is acknowledged while T1 is still running, T1 is
To be reset and a Programmable timer T2 is to be started.
T2 is to delay the notificationappliance operation (stage
2) Further, and so provide time for human Investigation of
The alarm cause.
d. If no reset action takes place before T2 runs out, notificationAppliance Operation (stage 2) is to be given.
e- Display a drawing of the floor, location of fire and instructions to be
followed on GDT (graphical display terminal) with GUI (graphical
user interface).
2. Notification-appliance operation (stage 2).
a. Evacuation signal in zone of incident and adjacent zones;
Alert signal in remaining parts of building.
b. Evacuation signal throughout the building.
c. Activation of visual strobes.
3. Identification at the MFACP/FACP and the remote annuncitor(s) of the
Zone origination the alarm
4. Identification at the MFACP /FACP and the remote annunciator(s) of the
location and the type of device originating the alarm.
5. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
6. Recall of elevators.
7. CCTV camera(s) shall start recording the event.
8. Use PA system to broadcast the fire alarm evacuation/alert signals.
-
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
9. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when
alarm was initiated.
10. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm
was initiated.
11. Recording of the event by the system printer.
The fire alarm system shall comprise of components capable of providing the
following features when appropriate and specified:
-
All sectors alarm notification

Private alarm notification
Occupied/unoccupied notification
Voice alarm notification
AC shut down in case of fire
Smoke evacuation operation in case of fire
Fire fighting monitor
Private Alarm Notification: When allowed, the public alarm must provide
programmable time delay to allow time for investigation. The private alarm
must be audible and visual.
IF no response is made at the FACP within a set time, the public alarm must
sound, keyed override must be provided.
Occupied/Unoccupied Notification: When appropriate, the FACP must
provide an OCCUPIED/UNOCCUPIED control to allow the disabling of portions
of the public alarm to reduce panic hazard.
Voice Alarm Notification: The audible portion of the public alarm must be
voice and signals alarm using speakers & sirens.
HVAC Interface: The fire alarm system shall generate the necessary control
function to stop required HVAC equipment and operate other HVAC equipment
which keeps high pressure inside the path of escaping ladder.
Generator Room Procedure: In case of fire inside generator room, fire alarm
panel shall send a signal to solenoid valve to shut down fuel through a control
module and another control module to shut down the generator it self.
Fire Fighting Monitoring: The fire alarm system shall monitor the flow and
tamper switches of the fire protection Sprinkler system (zone valves) and give
alarm when detect flow of water.
The flow switch monitor module shall have a delay time to compensate for
water surged without sending an alarm.
The monitor module shall monitor the fire pumps (standby fault - run).
-
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
Fire alarm shall monitor also clean agent system (CO2 or FM 200) using
three monitor module to connect fire fighting panel with fire alarm panel to
monitor ( trouble, first alarm , supervisor) the fire fighting shall be double
knock system zone with two zones.
Electrical power shut signals shall be initiated according to the zone under fire.
Sound system Interface: Fire alarm system shall supervise and control
public address system using Monitor and Control modules for monitoring the
operation feedback function of public address and control relay module to
activate the digital pre-recorded massage module to announce the prerecorded evacuation 3 messages (one fire and two warning for fire floor up
and down level)
2.2
SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
The fire alarm system shall consist of the following:
- Intelligent addressable main Fire Alarm Control Panels (MFACP) with
printer with auto dialer
- Intelligent addressable Fire alarm control panels (FACP).
- Intelligent Addressable Manual pull station.
- Intelligent addressable detectors smoke type
- Intelligent addressable detectors heat type
- Intelligent addressable detectors multi sensor
- Intelligent Addressable photo smoke detector with sounder base.
- Fire alarm sounder with flashing beacon.
- Mounted flashing strobe.
- Repeater panel(RFACP)
- Conventional heat detector.
- Beam detector transmitter.
- Beam detector receiver.
- Fire man's telephone jack.
- Control modules.
- Monitor module.
- GDT: graphical display terminal.
- Network including conduit cabling, pull boxes and all necessary
accessories.
Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP): The Fire Alarm Control Panel
(MFACP) shall have intelligent addressable with no of loops as indicated on
drawings
- Interfacing and Communication Circuits
- System Printer
- Emergency Power `Supply and Batteries.
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
The Central Processing Unit (CPU):
CPU shall be programmable; intelligent micro-processor based and includes
programs, which support all functions of the fire alarm system.
CPU shall also include all necessary interfacing circuits, which enable it to
communicate with another FACP and addressable and non-addressable
devices and equipment pertaining to the fire alarm system as described in the
previous Clauses.
Event initiating functions shall be performed in accordance with stored logic
(firmware) in a non-volatile memory (PROM or EPROM).
The CPU shall also perform all communication-oriented tasks on digital error free
concept using addressable routines to manage all addressable devices.
The software programs, which operates and manage the system shall be
resident and have complete immunity against noise, interference and supply
fluctuations and failure. This software shall also be protected against intended
or by-mistake alterations.
All supervisory and trouble functions shall also be supported by the program
which runs the system including reporting routines which display all necessary
information and alarms.
Special Diagnostic program shall also monitor all vital functions such as
communication and data processing cycles of operation and run diagnostic
routines to detect errors and report it.
The MFACP shall have a capacity which can be able to handle all the devices
with 15% spare for each signaling line circuit.
The fire alarm control panel MFACP shall have the following features:
-
Modular system to allow future extension

LCD of minimum 80 character alphanumeric
Automatic day and night sensitivity
Automatic drift compensation
Dirt detector reporting
Ground fault detection
Internal self diagnosis
Minimum of 1000 history events
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
Trouble Signals: Trouble due to the following faulty events shall activate
audio-visual display on the MFACP:
- Power and battery failure or loss
- Open or grounded Cable network, which interconnects devices and system
components
- Communication failure
- System software and hardware failure
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
-
All requirement specified in MFACP apply to fire alarm

FACP.
control panels
Capable of operating the system on a stand-alone basis
Each panel maintains the statues and control of its own dedicated circuit
points
The only difference between an MFACP and FACP is it an FACP does

not have any monitoring and controlling activity at other locations.
System Printer:
A. Description: Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.
B. The system is to have a strip printer capable of being mounted directly in
the main MFAC enclosure. Alarms are to be printed in easy-to-read RED,
other messages, such as a trouble, are to be printed in BLACK. This printer is
to receive power from the system power supply and shall operate via battery
back up if ac mains are lost.
C. The printer is to provide hard-copy printout of all changes in status of the
system and shall time-stamp such printouts with the current time-of-day and
date. The printer is to be standard carriage with 80-characters per line and is to
use standard pin-feed paper. The printer is to be enclosed in a separate cabinet
suitable for placement on a desktop or table. The printer shall communicate with
the control panel using an interface complying with Electrical Industries
Association (EIA) standard EIA-232D.
D. The event and status printer shall be a 9 pin, impact, dot-matrix printer with a
minimum print speed of 200 characters per second at 10 characters per inch.
Printer parameters shall be set up with a menu drive program in the printer. The
serial cable connecting the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the Printer shall be
supervised. The serial printer shall support short haul modems or Fiber-Optics
modules. The printers shall list the time, date, type, and user defined message for
each event printed. It shall be possible to support multiple printers per CPU. It
shall be possible to define which event types are sent to the printer(s) including
-
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
alarm, supervisory, trouble, monitor, and service groups.
Emergency Power Supply: The system shall be equipped with an Emergency
Power Supply system capable of supplying the necessary power of 12/24
VDC to run the fire alarm system for 24 hours on stand-by mode and for 30
minutes in case of alarm state. The emergency power supply shall include
battery of sufficient capacity, battery charger and non break change over
circuitry. Battery calculation sheet must be submitted by system installer.
Automatic Telephone Dialer (ATD): ATD shall provide the system with
automatic ability to dial a remote fire fighting location and deliver prerecorded emergency message through a dedicated line. Message length shall
be of four (4) minutes at least. Telephone dialer shall have the ability to store
and dial 4 different telephone numbers. Telephone dialer shall provide
message test speaker and a message test switch. The dialer shall be provided
with battery backup operation and programming facility.
Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Manual Stations shall be
documented compatible with control equipment. They shall be (break glass).
Manual station with normally open, single-pole alarm contacts
Each break glass plate shall include operating instructions in both Arabic and
English.
The addressable manual station shall contain addressable circuitry to
communicate with the FACP and shall report alarm or trouble status changes.
Addressable Intelligent Smoke (Photo) Detectors: Detectors shall be
documented compatible with the control equipment to which it is connected.
The detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel
through the same supervised signaling detection loop.
To minimize nuisance alarms, voltage and RF transient suppression
techniques shall be employed as well as an insect screen. All detector designs
shall provide full solid-state construction and compatibility with other fire
alarm detection loop devices, (smoke detector, pull stations, etc.).
Each detector base or the detector itself shall have a flashing status indicating
LED for visual supervision. When the detector is activated, the flashing LED
will latch on steady and at full brilliance until it is reset by the reset switch,
from the control panel.
Detector has an on-board microprocessor that evaluates its Photoelectric
light scattering chamber activity and makes an
Intelligent decision based on light obscuration history as to whether an alarm
condition is present.
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
Detectors shall be plug-in lockable with separate base, including all addressable
circuitry.
The detector shall provide indication of the analog value corresponding to
detection of fire (smoke) to the FACP. The detectors shall be continually
monitored to detect any change in sensitivity due to dirt or environmental
conditions, which could be corrected from the control panel within certain limits.
The smoke sensitivity range 0.3%: 3.7% per foot and the air velocity range 0610 m/min
Detectors shall be intelligent microprocessor controlled and connected with
two wires class A type.
The detectors shall be sensitive to visible and invisible products of combustion.
Addressable Intelligent Heat Detectors
Detectors shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to
which it is connected. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from
the fire alarm panel through the same supervised signaling detection loop.
Thermal Detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 58C and
have rate-of-rise element rated at 9.4C per minute. It shall connect via two
wires to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling line circuit
The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions
caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to
the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements.
Addressable Intelligent multi sensor (smoke/heat) Detectors
Detectors shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to
which it is connected. The detectors shall obtain their operating power from
the fire alarm panel through the same supervised signaling detection loop.
-
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
Multi sensors combine smoke and thermal detection
The detector shall provide indication of the analog value corresponding to
detection of fire (smoke//thermal ) to the FACP. The detectors shall be
continually monitored to detect any change in sensitivity due to dirt or
environmental conditions, which could be corrected from the control panel within
certain limits.
The smoke sensitivity range 0.3%: 3.7% per foot and the air velocity range 0610 m/min
The thermal range can be programmed from FACP as fixed temperature at 135o
F (57.2o C) or rate of raise at 15o F (8.3o C)
Electronic Horn with Strobe Light: The horn shall be electronic and it has
SPL up to 95 dBA or higher with strobe light flasher type with 15/75 candela
CD (ADA). The strobe light shall be wall or ceiling mounted.
Remote LCD Annunciator (repeater RFACP): LCD Annunciator allows you
to monitor and control compatible Fire Alarm Control Panels from anywhere
within your facility
Remote LCD shall be meet this specification:
80-character (4 x 20) backlit LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Six common system status lights: Alarm (red), Supervisory (yellow), Trouble
(yellow), Monitor (yellow), AC On (green), and Ground Fault (yellow)
Four system hotkeys for Ack, Silence, Reset, and Lamp Test
Access-controlled Silence and Reset hotkeys require the key switch to be in the
enable position
Four sets of scroll keys for Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor
Conventional heat Detectors (Rate of Rise)
Detectors shall be two wires to connect to monitor module at parking area
the detectors shall obtain their operating power from the fire alarm panel
through monitor module
Heat detectors are used where property protection is desired and where life safety
protection is not required or is performed by other equipment
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
The addition of rate-of-rise heat detector operation provides forms of heat
detection depend on fluctuate more quickly
LED for visual supervision. When the detector is activated
Monitoring Modules (MM) This device is intended for addressable
communication with non-addressable devices (fire protection etc.). They will
be installed in remote locations of devices or in tenant area to be supervised
by FACP on digital bases.
Control Modules (CM): The function of the control module is to provide
command signal to equipment of other system that should act in case of fire
Commands shall be relayed to the control module from the FACP through an
addressable and supervised communication link as a slave to it.
Interfacing circuits shall be included which generate the required actions
command signals in response to received information (i.e. relay modules).
Command signal shall be passive (i.e. open/close) contacts of sufficient rating
and shall be electrically isolated from the system.
Back Boxes: All fire alarm devices shall be mounted with galvanized steel
back boxes with all accessories.
Wiring: The wiring which interconnects detectors and devices with control
equipment shall be fire resistant low smoke zero halogen twisted pair and
shielded, 1.5 mm2 copper (solid) cables, constituting supervised class A circuit
(loops). Cross section area of wiring of high current devices such as speakers or
DC cables should not be less than 2 mm2 and should not cause more than 5%
voltage drop. All wiring shall be color coded and labeled. Pull and Junction boxes
shall be red colored and include wiring identification numbering.
Wiring system shall include all wires and cables necessary for complete fire alarm
system. It will interconnect all equipment and devices as described in specifications
and drawings. This wiring includes also the supervisory and control circuits
interconnecting the system with other systems as described before.
Connection with clean earthling is a part of the fire cabling.
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm system shall be
installed. System installer shall not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM MATERIALS

Install wiring, raceways or conduits and electrical boxes and fittings in
accordance with Section 16120 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"
Clauses "Raceways", "Wires and Cables" and "Electrical Boxes and Fittings"
for wiring of non-power limited circuits.
Install wiring of power-limited circuits in raceways or conduits or exposed on
wall or ceiling where properly protected. Use conduit for runs through
floors or in shaft ways to height of 2.30 m above floor.
Install wires and cables without splices. Make connections at terminal strips
in cabinets or at equipment terminals. Make soldered splices in electronic
circuits in control cabinets.
3.3
GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's
written instructions to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the
greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode returns, noise
pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet.
Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.
C. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as
indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division
Section
"Grounding and Bonding."
D. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits,
minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common-mode
returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide -ohm
ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground
resistance.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other Works of the
Contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trades.
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
The equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to its
authorized, local representative to:
-
Coordinate the selection of system equipment

Generate the system software programming
Supervise the installation of the complete fire alarm system
Perform a complete functional test of the system
Submit a written report to the Contractor attesting the proper operation of
the completed system.
Install fire alarm system as indicated, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and complying with applicable portions of
local standards of installation.
Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Color code
wiring and install per manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram.
Provide extra wiring or extra power supplies required to fulfill any
requirement for extra power such as in case of strobe lights. In addition,
provide extra or larger size wiring to alleviate voltage drops, which make
device, operate beyond voltage limits for which it was designed. Determine
above with manufacturer's representative while equipment is being installed.
3.5
3.5.1
Connection and Supervision: Make connections to panel under manufacturer's

supervision. Run wiring to main terminal cabinet located adjacent to main
fire alarm panel. Complete connections from this cabinet to panel utilizing
manufacturer's technicians.
3.5.2
System Test and Approval: System installer shall submit shop drawings for
function and operation only, pre-approved by authority having local jurisdiction.
Prior to final acceptance of system, manufacturer of system shall, in presence
of the Contractor, Employer's representative test each sensing or detection
and alarm device.
3.6
TRAINING
Equipments manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall provide,
in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to selected
Employers personnel for two weeks.
SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
3.7
WARRANTY
The FACP shall have a 2-year manufacturers warranty against product
defects. This warranty shall be for material only. Installation and labor shall
be warranted for a period of 1 year or as indicated elsewhere in this
specification. Manufactures that do not provide a standard 2-year warranty,
must provide an extended warranty with their bid package.
END OF SECTION
SECTION
ACCESS CARD CONTROL SYSTEM
________________________________________________________________________
PART
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract,

including General Conditions, Conditions of Particular
Application and Division Specification Sections, apply
to work of this Section.
Bill of quantities
Related section
. All sections related to access control with other
systems (CCTV , BMS , fire alarm system)
. Earthing System
section
. Conduit and fitting
section
. Cable trays
section
. Wires and cables
section
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of the work shall include but not limited to the
following
Supply system equipments according to approved list of
materials
Handle and store equipment in appropriate environment
condition
Start up system
Programming system according to required functions and
specification
Test and commission all system according to related
specification documents
Integrate all other system with access control system
Provide necessary documents and final shop drawing for
obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The Access Control systems is a security system, which shall
control access in the parking , entrance, exit areas and give
alarm in case of unauthorized activities in order to achieve
maximum-security for the project.
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
The work shall cover all equipment, systems and power cable
networks, workmanship, software, programming, testing,
commissioning and all related activities.
The supplier/contractor is fully responsible for the delivery and
installation of totally integrated system in case of having multi
vendor equipment and interfacing between the different
components of the system and the other related systems.
The scope includes the interfacing and connection with the,
CCTV system, BMS, Fire alarm systems and any other related
systems.
The system shall use unified network IP Ethernet to connect
between main server and intelligent control panels using TCP/IP
protocols
The system shall be expandable for future extension of the
facility.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

The access control system shall consist of the following:
-
Main Redundant access control server

PC and connections
Intelligent door control equipment
Proximity card reader
Electric strike /electromagnetic lock
Printer
Door sensor (magnetic contact)
Card issuing unit.
Identification cards
Network for the system
Badging Unit with camera

All works shall be performed in strict accordance with the
drawings, specifications and stipulations of the KSA Codes, the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), International
Electrical Commission (IEC), the Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
Listing.
Equipment and installations shall comply with the latest revision
of the current provisions of the following codes and standards:
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
- Standards of local authorities having jurisdiction
- Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying
with applicable requirements of NFPA
"National Electrical
Code"
- CCIR Compliance: Comply with the relevant CCIR standards
or approved equal
- UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL
and UL
A
- IEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirement
standards pertaining to system and wiring
An equal standard could be accepted, which should be listed in detail
as an alternative. Such alternative standards shall be indicated in
detail together with their equivalent IEC, CCIR, NFPA and UL. A
copy of the approved alternative standard shall be available for
submittal upon request, free of charge.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division Specification Sections:
. .
General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation

indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturer's
names, photographs and/or catalog data sheets for all items to
ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall be
ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices, which
are shown on Drawings, Schedules and in Bill of Quantities.
. .
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and

device locations and connecting wiring of entire system,
including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
-
Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment and

the size, type and number of all conductors including signal
strengths and cable loss
Pin to pin connection diagram
Large scale drawing of the main address equipment
Large scale drawing of control panels, and other devices
Provide calculations to support the loss in cables and signal

strengths of the different equipment, the size of wiring and
signal loss.
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
- Provide installation instructions and installation manuals
-
Complete description and data including UL listing, or

equivalent, for all system components
Complete sequence of operations and functions of the

system
Complete system wiring diagrams for components and

interfaces to equipment provided by others
A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local

representative responsible for installation coordination and
service
. .
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,

including specifications and installations for each type of the
equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams
and operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in the
maintenance manual.
. .
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for

each type of the system equipment installed, including furnished
specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and
shop drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with
requirements of Division and other relevant documentation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
. .
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the security

system shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing of the system of
type, size and characteristics similar to those required for the project
and whose products have been in satisfactory service in similar
projects for not less than five ( ) years.
. .
Installer Qualifications:
The installer firm shall have at least five ( ) years of successful
installation experience of the security systems similar to that
required for the project.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of system components

and suspension system with other construction that
penetrate ceiling or is supported by them , including light
fixture , HVAC equipments, partition assemblies
The contractor shall be responsible for coordination with
other systems under this contract and the contractor
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
involved works
SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall provide the following:
PART
No. of % Proximity card reader
No. of
No. of
No. of
Door Sensor (magnetic contact)

Proximity card
Electromagnetic door lock
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
The Access Card Control systems, which shall control access to
parking area and entrance/exit to give alarm in case of
unauthorized or any intrusion activities in order to achieve
maximum-security in the selected project areas Alarm shall be set
also in case of leaving the door open more than an adjustable
time.
The access control shall allow only those who are holding valid
cards, in accordance with a pre-determined security scheme to enter
the controlled areas.
The system will achieve maximum security in the project and allow
monitoring the activities in the covered areas through the Central
Control Equipment.
The system shall be programmed allowing access to areas during
specified periods according to pre-programmed security scheme.
The system shall permit entry only when valid access cards are
presented to a card-reader.
Every card shall have unique pre-programmed code.
Access Control System consists of network distributed intelligent
door controllers connected to Main Access Control server
equipment and access control redundant.
Door controllers shall be dedicated to each door and shall be
connected with the Proximity card reader, the electrical door
lock and the door sensor.
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
Communication of door controllers shall be done using a
dedicated network for the system.
This means using network type intelligent door controllers that

work together as one system (stand alone), having sustained
operation in case of failure of the Central Control equipment.
Programming and monitoring shall be done using a dedicated PC.
Full time/date, key/cardholder number based access control
continues, using the intelligence in the local controllers even if
the Central Control equipment is off line.
Any unauthorized attempt shall trigger alarm on the PC of the
system.
The main features are as follows:
-
PC-based programming
Ability to monitor multiple locations
Ability to integrate multiple reader technologies
Remote upload/download control
Stand-alone intelligent card readers/controllers
Computerized video imaging (Photo ID)
Card Issuing system
Employee Time Attendance
System Operation: The access control system shall be provided

to manage and control access of personnel to areas in accordance
with a pre-determined security scheme.
Proximity cards shall be used to activate Proximity card readers
connected to intelligent door controllers to give command to
door locks or vehicle gates to open and elevator microprocessor
to access the authorized floor according to access level.
This shall release the locking mechanism (electromagnetic lock
or electric strike) and allow entry. Whenever a door, equipped
with the system, is closed, it shall also be locked. The Central
Control Equipment shall constantly monitor the data concerning
all door events and status of all secured doors such as
(open/close) and the status of all locks (locked/unlocked).
The system shall be supplied via the UPS. The door locks shall
be released in case of system power failure.
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
The cards shall include cardholder data and his colored photo.
All data (cardholder ID, time of entering and exit, etc)
corresponding to access activities and emergency release shall be
recorded.
Central Control Equipment shall be used to program, operate,
control and produce reports using a dedicated printer.
Dedicated network shall be used to control communication.
PC connected on the dedicated network shall communicate with
the Central Control for management and reporting.
Special operating software under windows shall be used execute
all functions of the system.
Card issuing unit shall be programmed and controlled through
the Central Control Equipment and the PCs according to data
extracted from the database of the employees saved on the PCs.
Door controllers shall be connected to the Proximity card readers
and the doors shall be opened manually by exit push button
beside operator.
The system shall be work with antipass back function
Alarm shall be set in several cases, in case of trial from
unauthorized person to open a door, trial from a person to open
a door not the authorization time or days.
Fault in any of the system component, power failure, etc... Shall
report fault alarm.
The system shall be capable saving events for one year.
The system should be fully redundant and self-diagnostic.
Emergency supply shall run the system with appropriate UPS.
The system includes connection, hardware and software
interfacing and with the BMS, fire alarm systems, CCTV system,
security system and any other related systems.
The system shall be open ended and expandable for future
extension of the facility.
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
Equipment and Materials

-
Main Redundant access control server with work station

Network for the system
Intelligent door control equipment
Proximity card reader
Electrical door lock
Printer
Door sensor (Magnetic Contact)
Card issuing unit.
Identification cards
The Central Processing Unit (CPU)- Main Access Control Server:
CPU shall be programmable, support all functions of the AC
system.
CPU shall also include all necessary interfacing circuits, which
enable it to communicate with devices and equipment pertaining
to the system with IP connectivity as described in this
specification.
The software programs, which operates and manage the system
shall be resident and have complete immunity against interference
and supply fluctuations. This software shall be also protected
against unauthorized intended or by-mistake alterations.
All supervisory and trouble functions shall also be supported by
the program which runs the system including reporting routines
which display all necessary information and alarms.
The CPU shall monitor the state of all the doors and set alarm in
case of unlocked door or unclosed door.
Special Diagnostic program shall also monitor all vital functions
such as communication and data processing cycles of operation
and run diagnostic routines to detect errors and report it.
The communication with the PC, Proximity card readers, door
controllers, the BMS systems and all other system devices shall
be done through the appropriate dedicated data network and
built in communication software.
System Printer: A desktop printer shall provide hard copies for
record of all the system activities in details. Print outs shall
contain the following information:
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
- Unscheduled events
- Normal events
- Operator commands and operator definition
- All alarms
- Time Attendance
- Faults and supervisory conditions
Print outs shall include the time of event, date and clear
description.
Emergency Power Supply: The system shall be equipped with
an Emergency Power Supply capable of supplying the necessary
power to run system for
hours the emergency power supply
shall include battery of sufficient capacity, battery charger and no
break change over circuitry.
Software: Master program operating the system shall be under
windows using dedicated PC. The operating system shall include
report generation, printing and self-diagnostic capability. It shall
starts up, operate, control and check for errors in the integrated
system. The requirements of the software shall include but is not
limited to the following:
-
Operating under windows, multi tasking environment

Real time data exchange
Interface with the other systems
Install the system.
Start up, manage and control the system functions and
activities.
Control all the constituents as one unit and separately.
Identify every unit for control and other purposes
Database and search facilities.
Up to
assignable ID card No. expandable to be
Up to
doors shall be controlled
Attendance time recording
File creation generator for host connection
Blocking of unauthorized repeated access
Print out data reports.
Employee time attendance
PC: The minimum requirements of the PC shall be latest version
including
MB D.D. RAM, GB HD, Video capture camera
and card, communication and interface cards, etc.., or according
to the manufacturers requirements.
Operating software to allow it to manage all the system activities
Card Issuing Unit: This unit shall handle the adopted type of the
proximity cards and shall provide non erasable, color printing
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
technique including ID data such as code numbers, names,
occupation, colored photo etc.. The printing shall be on a double
side.
The unit shall be linked to the system through data network to

import the printing data from the database saved on the PC.
Intelligent Door Controller: Door control equipment shall be
used to communicate with the computer digitally in order to
relay the captured data to the central control equipment and to
control the door lock. Every door controller shall have its own
battery and power supply to feed the internal electronics and the
electronic lock as well.
Door controller shall contain network interface RJ
to be
connected via IP Ethernet network to main Access control server
Proximity Card Reader: It shall be located at locations
identified on the drawings and connected, controlled by the Door
control equipment
Communication signals to and from the Central Control
equipment shall operate and control visual indicators.
The Card readers shall be proximity type readers and fully
compatible with the system equipment, and shall communicate
digitally with the system.
Units shall be equipped with integral LEDs (red, yellow and green)
to provide visual confirmation of access granted/denied and
prompting of card entry.
The sensitivity of the card reader shall be of min 50 mm with
reading, verification and activation maximum time of 5 sec.
Unit enclosures shall be designed to be tamper resistant and
visible element of the system.
The proximity card readers shall be linked to the system through
data network taking into consideration distance limitations.
Card readers at entrances shall be programmed for employee's
time attendance in connection with employee's database
Electrical Door Lock: The electrical door lock shall be electronic
strike with technique so as to push and release the door latch and
dead latch if exists.
The electrical door lock shall be operating at low level voltage.
The operating voltage shall be equal to the same value of the
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
other component of the system. The electronic lock shall have
status monitoring by means of micro contact single or double
pole, double through to be connected to the door controller, so
as to know whether the lock is opened or closed. In case of fire
the lock shall release the door latch to open the door. The size
and model of the electric door lock must be coordinated with the
door supplies. The electrical door lock shall be normal open to
release the door lock in case of power failure.
Electromagnetic door lock
Main feature
Dual Voltage Selectable ( VDC or VDC)

Low Current Consumption
Reliable Holding Force
Hall Effect Sensor Monitoring Output
Green/Red LED Indication for EM Lock Status
Durable and Silence Operation
Cosmeticize Anodized Aluminum Casing
Surge & Spike Protection PCB
Compact Size for Small Doors,
Full Range of Optional Brackets
Zero Residual Magnetism Design
Technical specification
Voltage Input:
Current Draw:
Holding Force:
Hall Effect Contact:
Anti-Rust Surface Treatment:
Operating Humidity:
VDC / VDC
V/
mA; V /
mA (
Up to
lbs (
kg)
SPDT rated A at VDC
Blue Zinc Plating
~
(non condensing)
Exit Push Button: The PB-EXIT control button is a spring loaded, square
green exit button mounted on a stainless steel plate. The SPDT contacts
switch when the button is depressed and return when released.
This button can be used for momentary release of fail-safe or failsecure electric locks. It may also be used to input an exit signal
to the access control system. In some areas, local building or fire
safety regulations may limit the use of exit buttons
Door sensor: surface mount magnetic contacts are designed for use in doors
to monitor status of doors (open /close) it consist of two parts
Switch and Magnet
Contact Configuration:
N.O.
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
Electrical Configuration:
Normally Open/Normally close
Maximum Current:
A
Maximum Voltage:
VAC/DC or
VAC/DC
Proximity Cards proximity card reader with suitable format

shall be match this technical specification
- Dual encoded cards
- Wigand format (W )
- Read range up to omm
- Long-life passive card for unlimited number of reads
Dye-sub card, print directly to the front or back of the
Card with a direct image or thermal transfer printer
-Marks for vertical and horizontal slot punch
Emergency Power Supply: AC system shall be supplied
through an emergency power supply. Emergency power supply
shall be capable to keep the system fully operating for
hours.
Batteries and battery chargers shall be supplied with the system.
CABLE NETWORK
This section covers the work of the signal, power, control and
earth cabling systems required for the security system.
Wiring shall be installed inside PVC and steel conduits according
to situation. Routs running inside walls, ceilings and under floors
shall be in PVC. Exposed routs shall run in steel conduits (false
ceilings, etc).
The networks shall comply with the requirements of the
manufactures of the equipment.
Cables shall be in accordance with the relevant codes and
standards and shall meet the manufacturer's requirements.
Maximum number of wires to run inside one conduit shall allow
for
extra wires to be added in the future.
Connection between wires shall be in accordance with same
standards as mentioned before.
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
Extra earth wires shall be provided in all distribution networks
starting from the main to the last terminal box before the
equipment outlets
Grounding Considerations: Grounding systems are normally an
integral part of the specific signal or communications cabling system
that they protect. In addition to helping protect personal and
equipment from hazardous voltages, a proper grounding system may
reduce EMI to inform the communications cabling system. Improper
grounding can produce induced voltages and those voltages can
disrupt other communications circuits.
The system shall include connection with the ground.

Distribution Boxes: Shall be in accordance with the
requirements of manufacturer(s) of the equipment.
All boxes shall be flush mounted and shall be fitted with anti
corrosion treated brass metal terminals. The boxes shall be
constructed in a way to facilitate maintenance.
All boxes shall be tamper proof by means of micro switch.
Covers shall be provided with the numbering scheme for all
wiring fitted to it and their destination, to facilitate service.
Cable Conduits: Exposed wiring shall be installed inside steel
conduits (false ceilings, etc). Routs running inside walls, ceilings
and under floors shall be in rigid PVC. Exposed routs shall run in
steel conduits
Steel conduits shall be used for installations outside structure and
shall be painted with corrosive resistant paints. Clamps and
collars shall be used for installing conduits. Conduits shall be
inspected before installation to be free from any internal defects,
which may oppose or damage the cables during installation,
provided with metal wire to easily extend the cables.
Standard ELL (L) or TEE (T) conduit fittings shall be used instead
of bending conduits more than -mm diameters. A distance
separation of
mm minimum shall be kept with other power
cables.
PART
EXECUTION
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
EXAMINATION
Examine conditions, in the presence of the installer, for
compliance with the requirements and other conditions affecting
the performance of the AC system work.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
General: Install systems in accordance with codes and standards.
Install equipment and wiring in accordance with manufacturers
written instructions.
Appropriate measuring equipment shall be used (signal strength

voltage, current, etc.), for the network adjustment and troubleshooting.
Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceway/conduit except
within consoles, desks and counters, and excepts in accessible
ceiling plenums where cable wiring method may be used. Cables
used in environmental air space shall be listed for this use.
Conceal cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors wherever
possible.
Surge Suppressors Installation: Where AC power-operated
devices are not protected against voltage transients by integral
surge suppressors, install surge suppressors at the devices' power
line terminals.
Wiring Method: Conceal cable in accessible ceilings, walls, and
floors wherever possible
Wiring Within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train the conductors
to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use placing bars and
distribution spools.
Pulling Cables: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
pulling tensions Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed,
or abraded cable Do not splice cable between indicated
termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable
where damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface
contours, and support as recommended by manufacturer
Grounding: As recommended by manufacturers.
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
Make final connection to equipment in the presence of the
equipment manufacturer's representative.
Installation of the Equipment:
equipment shall cover the following:
-
The installation of this
Installation of all central & distributed equipments

Internal signal, power, and control wiring
External signal, power, and control wiring related to the
system
Adjustment, testing and putting into operation of the
equipment, and other related equipment to achieve the
specified performance.
Installation of the Cable Network: The cable network shall

include the communication, power, and control cables required
for the whole system and shall be installed taking into
consideration the following:
-
Laying the cables which shall connect the equipment

including the installation of connectors, junction boxes, and
matching/splitting units if exists.
The installation shall include any necessary ground loop

corrector.
Installation of signal cables and control wiring of the

equipment.
Manufacturers' Field Services: Provide services of factoryauthorized service representatives to supervise the field assembly
and connection of components and system presetting, testing,
and adjustment.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled
and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
Presetting: Align and
components, wiring, and
specified requirements.
items with new items.
performance schedule.
adjust the system and pretest all

functions to verify they conform to
Replace malfunctioning or damaged
Retest until achieving satisfactory
Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system

tests to verify it conforms to specifications. Include all modes of
-
SECTION
________________________________________________________________________
system operation. Methodically test for proper system operation
in all functional modes.
CLEANING
Clean all system components.
recommended by manufacturer.
Use methods and materials
ADJUSTMENT
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within year of date
of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting
the system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up till
requested adjustment periods at the site for this purpose without
additional cost.
.
TRAINING
Equipments manufacturer and his authorized, local representative
shall provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site
training to selected Employers personnel for two weeks.
WARRANTY
The system shall have a -year manufacturers warranty against
product defects. This warranty shall be for material only.
Installation and labor shall be warranted for a period of year or
as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Manufactures that do
not provide a standard -year warranty, must provide an
extended warranty with their bid package.
END OF SECTION
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
SECURITY SYSTEM
Page
PART
GENERAL
Related Documents
Description of Work
Reference Codes and Standards
Submittals
Quality Assurance
Delivery, Storage and Handling
As-Built Drawings
Spare Parts
PART
PRODUCTS
General
Cable Network
PART
EXECUTION
Examination
Installation
Field Quality Control
Cleaning
Adjustment
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
PART
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Conditions of Particular Application and
Division Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The security system shall include walk through metal gate
detector, X-ray detector and hand held units. These units shall
be located and installed at the main entrance gate, staff entrance
gates and new cataract building entrance.
The work shall cover all equipment, systems and power cable
networks, workmanship, software, programming, testing,
commissioning and all related activities.
The supplier/contractor is fully responsible for the delivery and
installation of totally integrated system in case of having multi
vendor equipment and interfacing between the different
components of the system and the other related systems.
The system shall be expandable for future extension of the
facility.
All works shall be performed in strict accordance with the
drawings, specifications and stipulations of the Local Building
and safety Codes, the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA), International Electrical Commission (IEC), the
Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Listing or other equivalent
international standards.
Equipment and installations shall comply with the latest revision
of the current provisions of the following codes and standards:
- Saudi Electrical Standard
- Saudi Safety Standard
- Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with
applicable requirements of NFPA "National Electrical Code"
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
- UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL
and UL
A
- IEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirement standards
pertaining to system and wiring
An equal standard could be accepted, which should be listed in detail
as an alternative. Such alternative standards shall be indicated in
detail together with their equivalent IEC, NFPA and UL.
SUBMITTALS
indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturers
ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall
be ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices,
which are shown on Drawings, Schedules and in Bill of
Quantities.
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and
device locations and connecting wiring of entire system,
including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
- Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment and
the size, type and number of all conductors including signal
strengths and cable loss
- Pin to pin connection diagram
- Provide installation instructions and installation manuals
- Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system
- Complete system wiring diagrams for components and
- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local representative
responsible for installation coordination and service
including specifications and installations for each type of the
equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams
and operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in the
maintenance manual.
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
each type of the system equipment installed, including furnished
specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and
shop drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with
requirements of Division and other relevant documentation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the security
system shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing of the system of
projects for not less than five ( ) years.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a
factory-authorized sales and service representative to perform the
work of this section.
installation experience of the security systems similar to that
required for the project.
1.5.3
Training: Equipment's manufacturer and his authorized, local

representative shall provide, in depth, equipment service and
programming on site training to selected Employer's personnel
for one week.
Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry,
closed space in original containers. Protect products from fumes.
Handle very carefully to avoid shocks or damage.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in
writing all his remarks, during the progress of work, concerning
any suggested alterations from the shop drawings in wiring
routes, locations of equipment or devices which arise from
coordination between the system and other activities.
No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving
written approval from the Engineer.
All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractors
and extra copies shall be submitted to the involved parties
(Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.).
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
A complete as-built draft set of drawings and equipment
schedules shall be prepared days after completion of work for
approval of the Engineer. The draft as-built shall include all
previously approved alterations. Final originals and copies of asbuilt drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division ,
Section
"Submittals".
SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall guarantee the availability of all the spare
parts for a period not less than ten ( ) years
PART
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
The security system shall give an alarm in case of there are any
weapons or explosive materials in guest luggage in order to
achieve maximum-security in the building area.
The security system shall consists of but is not limited to:
- Hand held units.
- Metal gate detectors.
- X-ray machine.
System Operation: The security system shall be provided to

manage and detect any unsafe materials through X-ray machines,
walk through metal gate detectors and hand held units.
Equipment and Materials
- X-ray machines
- Walk through metal gate detectors
- Hand held units.
X-RAY Machine:
X-Ray machine shall be used to enable security persons to screen
guest and staff luggage to detect weapons, explosive materials
..etc.
The X-RAY machine shall be located as indicated on drawings.
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
Machine shall have but not limited to the following features:
wide (
- Tunnel Size:
detector for
high (
cm)
cm) L-shaped
package screening.
- Contrast Sensitivity: Over million color tones standard.

- Processing:
memory;
MHz or
-bit color processing with minimum
Mbytes
GHz processor.
- Conveyor Speed:
feet per minute;
cm per second.
- Standard conveyor pictured on reverse.

- Extended conveyor length
- Fully reversible. Toggles for easy belt changeover.
- Minimum Pulling Weight:
kg (
lbs)
- Full auto-sensing without photo-sensors, Reduces downtime and

assures all magazines, envelopes or moving parts, or footpad.
- Items to be scanned, no matter how thin, or of bag already in
tunnel
- Enhances radiation safety.
- X-ray tube head: Self-contained, shielded tank
- High voltage rating:
- Duty cycle:
kV,
kV Operating Voltage
with sealed oil bath cooling
- Beam orientation: Diagonal

- Maximum Dose rate:
m R.
- X-ray Detectors :Surface mounted, multi-layer, fully integrated,

high frequency, solid state detectors using high speed processors,
and Pentium image processing with Single Energy or optional
Multi-Energy (M) Color.
- Video Standard with color
SVGA monitor. High resolution,
flicker-free, . dot pitch, low rad. monitor,

Energy color with available second flat monitor
. Multi-
- Displays organics in orange and in organics in blue, both

overlapping in green and very dense objects in black, and includes
Organic and Inorganic Stripping.
- Real Clear
- Auto-Cal
- High density
-
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
- Auto Dens alert
- Dark & Light enhance A
- Auto Tracking
- Density Scan
- Fast initial warm-up ( max.
second)
- AutoSensing
- Color; Reverse B/W
- Threat Image Projection (TIP)
- Weight:
lbs (
kg) or
lbs (
kg) crated
- Construction: Uni-body heavy gauge, epoxy painted steel

- Construction with stainless steel and aluminum trim and
accessories.
- Center keypad mountable on top, or on side or table.
- Environmental Temperature range :
,
to
- Electrical Power Consumption: < . kVA,
C & Humidity
volts
Hz
Walk Through Metal Detector:

The walk through metal detector shall be used for security
purpose to enable security persons to screen guest and staff
personnel to detect weapons, explosive materials ..etc.
The walk through metal detector shall be located near each X-ray
unit at the main entrance gate, staff entrance gates and the guest
entrance of new cataract building.
It shall have but not limited to the following features:
- Dual antenna construction.
- DSP circuitry eliminates spikes, noise, and two-way radio
interference with detection circuitry is continuously active.
- Bright and large squared LED indicators for power and
alarm status.
- LCD display indicates settings, diagnostic functions and
operational menus.
- Diagnostics are built in and circuits are constantly
monitored for faults.
- 100 Standard programs, ferrous and nonferrous metal
detection.
-
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
- Sensitivity range settings are selectable from 1 to 99 for
target detection.
- Remote alarm relay and data output connector.
- Synchronization for adjacent unit operation with four audio
tone selections
- Microprocessor computer controlled circuitry with digital
keypad entry control, LCD display, large LED barograph
meter, LED indicators and audio/visual alarm.
- Left-to-right, right-to-left, center, top-to-bottom, and
optimize the archway in busy locations. UnitP
- POWER: 220 VAC, 50 Hz
- Overall Loop Housing : - 87 H x 24 D x 35 W
- Passage Clearance - 79.5 H x 28 W.
- Detectors shall be equipped with an automatic diagnostic
program, which indicates the fault code on the control
panel.
- Equipment shall be safe for heart pacemakers and
magnetic recording media according to international
standards.
Hand Held Metal Detector
The hand held metal detector shall be used for security purpose
to enable security persons to screen guest and staff personnel
itself to detect weapons, explosive materials ..etc.
Contractor shall provide the number of hand held metal detectors
as required in the BOQ and in accordance with the specification
of the same supplier of the walk-through metal detectors,
previously mentioned in Item
.
Selective operation for organic/inorganic/common material.
Operating environment: minimum
RH.
C, maximum
C at
CABLE NETWORK
This section covers the work of the signal, power, control and
earth cabling systems required for the security system.
The networks shall comply with the requirements of the
manufactures of the equipment.
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
The connections shall be done in close coordination with
manufacturers requirements of the constituents of the system as
described in this specification and connection with other related
systems.
The network shall use cables in compliance with the requirements
of the equipment manufacturers.
Exposed wiring shall be installed inside steel conduits.
Routs running inside walls, ceilings and under floors shall be in
rigid PVC. Exposed routs shall run in steel conduits
Maximum number of wires to run inside one conduit shall allow
for
extra wires to be added in the future.
Connection between wires shall be in accordance with same
standards as mentioned before.
An earth wires shall be provided with equipment.
The system shall include connection with the ground.
Grounding Considerations: Grounding systems are normally an
integral part of the specific signal or communications cabling
system that they protect. In addition to helping protect personnel
and equipment from hazardous voltages, a proper grounding
system may reduce EMI to inform the communications cabling
system. Improper grounding can produce induced voltages and
those voltages can disrupt other communications circuits.
Distribution Boxes: Shall be in accordance with the requirements
of manufacturer(s) of the equipment.
All boxes shall be flush mounted and shall be fitted with anti
corrosion treated brass metal terminals. The boxes shall be
constructed in a way to facilitate maintenance.
All boxes shall be tamper proof by means of micro switch.
Covers shall be provided with the numbering scheme for all
wiring fitted to it and their destination, to facilitate service.
Cable Conduits: Exposed wiring shall be installed inside steel
conduits (false ceilings, etc). Routs running inside walls, ceilings
and under floors shall be in rigid PVC. Exposed routs shall run in
steel conduits
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
Steel conduits shall be used for installations outside structure and
shall be painted with corrosive resistant paints. Clamps and
collars shall be used for installing conduits. Conduits shall be
inspected before installation to be free from any internal defects,
which may oppose or damage the cables during installation,
provided with metal wire to easily extend the cables.
Standard ELL (L) or TEE (T) conduit fittings shall be used
instead of bending conduits more than -mm diameters. A
distance separation of -mm minimum shall be kept with other
power cables.
PART
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
the performance of the AC system work.
corrected.
INSTALLATION
General:
Install systems in accordance with codes and
standards. Install equipment and wiring in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions.
Appropriate measuring equipment shall be used (signal strength
voltage, current, etc.), for the network adjustment and trouble
shooting.
- Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceway/conduit except within
consoles, desks and counters, and excepts in accessible ceiling
plenums where cable wiring method may be used. Cables used in
environmental air space shall be listed for this use. Conceal
cables in accessible ceilings, walls and floors wherever possible.
- Surge Suppressors Installation: Where AC power-operated
devices are not protected against voltage transients by integral
surge suppressors, install surge suppressors at the devices' power
line terminals.
- Wiring Method: Conceal cable in accessible ceilings, walls, and
floors wherever possible.
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
- Wiring Within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train the conductors
to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use placing bars
and distribution spools.
- Pulling Cables: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored,
deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between
indicated termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and
discard cable where damaged during installation and replace it
with new cable.
- Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface
contours, and support as recommended by manufacturer.
- Grounding: As recommended by manufacturers.
- Make final connection to equipment in the presence of the
equipment manufacturer's representative.
Installation of the Equipment:
equipment shall cover the following:
The installation of this
- Installation of all main equipments

- Internal signal, power, and control wiring
- External signal, power, and control wiring related to the system
- Adjustment, testing and putting into operation of the equipment,
and other related equipment to achieve the specified
performance.
Installation of the Cable Network: The cable network shall
include the communication, power, and control cables required
for the whole system and shall be installed taking into
consideration the following:
- Laying the cables which shall connect the equipment including
the installation of connectors, junction boxes, and
matching/splitting units if exists.
- The installation shall include any necessary ground loop
corrector.
- Installation of signal cables and control wiring of the
equipment.
- Manufacturers' Field Services: Provide services of factoryauthorized service representatives to supervise the field assembly
and connection of components and system presetting, testing, and
adjustment.
SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM
_______________________________________________________________________
- Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
- Presetting: Align and adjust the system and pretest all
components, wiring, and functions to verify they conform to
specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged
items with new items. Retest until achieving satisfactory
- Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system tests
to verify it conforms to specifications. Include all modes of
CLEANING
Clean all system components.
Use methods and materials
ADJUSTMENT
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within year of date of
Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting
the system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up till
requested adjustment periods at the site for this purpose without
additional cost.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
GENERAL
MOI IP DATA NETWORKS

Project shall be Part of Whole Civil Defense Data Networks: Which consider threelayer Architectural Model to Achieve High Performance, Availability and Scalability
of the MOI Complexes backbone.
In this model, there are three networks which will be physically separated from the
layer two edge switches, and virtually separated through the distribution and core
layers modular switches.
Network-1: Secure network.
Network-2: IP Telephony and Internet Network.
Network-3: IPTV, CCTV and Light-Current Systems Network.

Low Current rooms shall aggregate access points of the network (outlets) to redundant
Modular Distribution switch and then consolidate all links to redundant core switches.
The Core Switches shall be connected to one data center that will host all services and
systems head ends.
The centralized Data Center solution will facilitate networks management and will
simplify the operation and maintenance of all included systems. In the same time it
will maintain the needed separation of the Networks for security and administration
purpose.
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1.1
The purpose of this document is to define works to be performed under this

section, installations regulation for data network equipment.
1.1.2
This section covers the local area network active components & define the
general requirements for switching.
The term active components here is mainly concerned with network switching
equipments (core & edge switches).
1.1.3
This section details the description of the works to be carried out

contractor concerning the following items:
by the
- Core switches
- - Edge switches.
- Network management platforms.
16735-1
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
1.1.4
Related works specified elsewhere

This section shall be closely coordinated with other related sections & general
requirements sections:
-
Grounding bonding.
Building management system.
IP CCTV
IPTV
Security systems
1.2
DEFINITIONS
1.2.1
Data Network: It is the switching network that will perform all switching and
routing functions for voice ,video and data services. The network shall serve all
IP based services such as voice over IP ,IP CCTV ..etc.
1.2.2
Core Switches: The Core Switches will be located at the heart of the network
and shall provide very fast switching ,intelligent high performance platform for
deploying numerous concurrent intelligent services without degrading the overall
performance of the network. The core switches shall perform various functions
using various service modules for wan interfaces ,security firewallsetc.
1.2.3
Edge Data Switch: Edge Switches will be located at the wiring closets
(telecommunication closets) ,they will provide users with access to the network.
The edge switches shall support power over Ethernet on all ports. Each Edge
switch/edge switch stack shall be connected to distribution switch via two uplinks
each one is 1GbE (1000 Base LX) .each link shall be on different module in the
distribution switch.
1.2.5
Network Equipment Management Software: The management software main

function is to enable remote and centralized configuration of the different
parameters and functions of switches and routers of the Data Network.
1.3
INTEGRATED SYSTEMS USING DATA NETWORK EQUIPMENTS

All voice, data, and video system supported by IP networks shall be able to be
integrated in Building Data Network, such as IP Data Devices, Voice over IP,
CCTV over IP etc.
The local area network shall provide the unified IP infrastructure required to
provide the necessary bandwidth for the different running applications.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The following standards form the frame work of the related standards to be
considered
16735-2
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
ISO/IEC 11801 latest edition for their physical interfaces
IEEE 802.3x standards related to the following either upon twisted pairs or
optical fibers:
-
Ethernet
Fast Ethernet
Gigabit-Ethernet
10 Gigabit-Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ad Gigabit-Ethernet channeling

IEEE 802.1q VLAN Ethernet.
IEEE 802.1p Classes of Services (CoS).
IEEE 802.1d Spanning-Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning-Tree Protocol (Layer 2 load sharing on redundant links)
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning-Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet
IEEE 802.1x network security standards
- Core Data Switches must also comply with:
ATM Forum standards
Frame Relay standards
1.5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.5.1
The network shall be capable of recovering from failures and topology changes
quickly and in a predetermined manner. The network should be scalable and
easily support future expansions. The network shall be capable of classifying and
marking data packets at the network edge, minimizing congestion and allowing
traffic to be prioritized.
1.5.2
The traffic has to flow efficiently through the network, to prevent bottlenecks.
Also the traffic must be controlled in an efficient way to make it easy to cope
with the changing requirements and priorities as network grows and evolves.
1.5.3
The network must be secured to ensure only authorized users can gain access to
the network, to restrict access to sensitive network areas, and to prevent data and
voice traffic from traveling to the wrong stations.
1.5.4
The network must be high available include high performance IP routing, Layers
load balancing, bandwidth aggregation technology, multicast management.
1.5.5
Support for cryptographic methods.
16735-3
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
1.5.6
The network shall be able to accommodate future expansion in terms of hardware
& the impact on the expected traffic pattern.
1.5.7
The network must provide a convergent unified infrastructure to support voice

video & data .
1.5.8
The network must accommodate any IP Ethernet device, through wired or

wireless links.
1.5.9
The network shall provide the sufficient bandwidth to support IP video streaming
with broadcast & multicast data flows.
1.5.10
The network shall demonstrate high level of redundancy on various levels from
physical redundancy by using dual core design concept, using dual power
supplies at core switches & other redundancy features.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
The contractor shall submit the following prior to installations:
1.6.1
Workshop drawings illustrating full details of rack elevations along with all
related network drawings, in addition to the physical and logical diagrams of the
proposed network illustrating the following:
- Type of physical links and interfaces
- Type and rate of each logical link.
- Number and type of each port of each proposed equipment, power over Ethernet
ports shall be specified.
- Manufacturer references of each equipment.
1.6.2
The contractor has to show the maximum number of ports that can be provided by
the core and edge switches against the number actually used ports for the current
situation.
1.6.3
The installer reference with similar projects.
1.6.4
Certificates from the Manufacturer illustrating that the installer has the qualified
personnel to perform design, installation and configuration for the provided
equipments. Personnel certificates from the manufacturer must be submitted. The
certificates must be appropriate with the requirement with the required
configuration & maintenance expected tasks.
1.6.5
Proposed schedule for installations and configurations
1.6.6
Complete set of manuals and software for each switch illustrating the installation
and configuration processes along with the periodic maintenance procedures.
16735-4
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
1.6.7
The standard warranty shall be provided and shall be completed to achieve three
years warranty.
1.6.8
Hands on Training schedule illustrating the studying hours along with the
materials .The training shall include installation and configuration detailed steps
along with the maintenance strategy.
1.6.9
VLAN and Addressing plan foreseen for the proposed network.
1.6.10
Proposed Quality of Service policy.
1.6.11
Technical Data sheets of all proposed supplied equipments.
1.6.12
At the end of each working phase, the Contractor shall provide a complete set of
as built document including:
- All prior documents requested for execution and completed in accordance
with the real executed works.
- Management software configuration with managed domains and user rights of
each operator using management software.
- Technical data sheets, references and catalogues of installed equipment and
software manufacturers.
- The configuration files will be given to the Client Representative Technical
Consultant for validation.
1.6.13
The contractor will be notified to re-examine without delay, any error, omission
or non-conformity, which would be identified by the consultant at this stage.
1.6.14
Any anomaly or non-conformity raised on these document omission will be

subject to a notification.
1.7
NETWORK CHARACTERISTICS TO SUPPORT VOIP
1.7.1
The proposed solution must be able to function with a variety of different

manufacturers of IP-PBX and integrate seamlessly with various communication
platforms.
- Generally the network must satisfy the following requirements.
- The LAN/WAN must support QOS and 802. 1P/Q.
- The LAN/WAN must be switched Ethernet.
- Switches must be managed to provide the required prioritization for
voice packets.
- The IP phones shall be connected to 10/100/1000 Base T ports

(supporting POE)
16735-5
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
- IP addresses will be derived using DHCP on an integrated DHCP
server or from an external DHCP server.
- Static IP addresses must also be accommodated.
- IETF standard DIFFSERV QOS architecture shall be supported to
ensure end to end QOS.
- The administrator shall be able to police the amount of traffic that
each user is able to transmit. Policing shall be performed according to
the traffic filter profile assigned to the traffic flow. Policing is
required to ensure that traffic flows conform to criteria assigned by
network administrator.
1.8
NETWORK DESCRIPTION
1.8.1
The network design shall be modular in nature. The telecommunication closets

are distributed all over the project various floors and areas.
1.8.2
The telecommunication closets contain the communication racks, the racks contain
the access layer edge switches that provide the user with the network access.
1.8.3
The facility main cross connect shall contain the network core switches. The
LAN will contain IP based data center switches to serve the server farm.
1.8.4
Broadcast storms must be prevented from reaching the core layer. The network
shall be divided into several broadcast domains to guarantee the optimum
performance. Multicast / broadcast protection is a mandatory feature on the
backbone layer.
The core switches & data center switches shall be fully redundant and in load
sharing mode.
1.8.5
The backbone design and architecture must be fully resilient and Load-Sharing
(switching fabric/management modules, power supply, modules, Fans, etc) in
order to eliminate any single point of failure with highest performance. Two core
switches shall be used to provide Load-Sharing.
1.8.6
The backbone switches shall be modular with enough backplane throughput or

bandwidth that can deal efficiently with the connected traffic. Free Slots (at least
25% of chassis slots) should be available per each chassis in order to provide
future expansion.
1.8.7
The proposed design should avoid any kind of traffic bottlenecks in the backbone
or the data center. The switch shall support hot-swap for easy dynamic
expansions.
1.8.8
The servers shall be connected to the data center switches with fully LoadBalanced Gigabit Ethernet Links suing standard IEEE 802.3ad. 10 Gig Ethernet
shall be utilized to interconnect the data center to the core backbone switching.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
16735-6
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
2.1
CORE SWITCHES
2.1.1
The network will have two core switches The core switches shall be optimized to
provide convergent network for voice, video and data.
2.1.2
Each core switches shall have various redundant features including two switching
fabric cards, two power suppliesetc.
2.1.3
The core switches must be modular. each chassis shall include slots supporting
wide range of switching and service modules.
2.1.4
Contractor shall provide bandwidth calculations indicating the appropriate

required backplane switching fabric in Gbps along with required forwarding rates
in Million packet per second for core switches .In general The Core switches shall
have two 720 Gbps Switching fabric cards forming 1.44 Tbps , with L2-L7
capabilities . the core switches shall have extra slots to support 25% expansion of
ports capacities.
The following features are currently desirable & should be available in the provided
equipment. Bidders shall state clearly any deviations/omissions/additions/equivalent
features & indicate which are the standard & proprietary supported protocols.
- High Availability Requirements:
Primary and secondary switches must fail over to one another using virtual
router redundancy protocol(VRRP) to achieve <1second fail over.
Hot Swappable Switch Fabric, Power Supplies and fan trays and Switching
modules.
Dual switch software and configuration file images on processors.
Active Alternate locations for switch software and configuration file
images (Flash, PCMCIA, Network Drive)
The switchs operating system or application-specific software(s) should
not at any time affect of operation by causing a system to: crash, reboot,
enter a state of Denial of Service (DoS), fail to respond to any type of
user/network traffic, fail to respond to any type of management traffic, use
built-in user name/passwords to gain illegal access to the switch.
- Operational Management:
Weight Round Robin/Weighted Fair Queuing on all ports with 8 queues per
port. All ports on the core switches shall support full Quality of Services
without any additional hardware / software for future usage.
Per VLAN rate limiting.
Per port Ingress & Egress port limiting
SNMP v1, 2, 3
16735-7
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
L2/3/4 Traffic classification in hardwired Application Specific Integrated
Circuits (ASICs) at wire speed where applications are defined by their
TCP/UDP/IP information.
Equal Cost Multiple Routing policy filters (ECMP) (RFC 2992) to provide
link redundancy and load sharing across multiple paths to the same
destination, and rapid convergence to the alternate path if a path becomes
unavailable due to a network event.
Layer 3 load balancing on both backbone switches
IP policy-based routing.
Port/MAC-based VLANs IP routing
Remote port mirroring (multiple hops away) - Allow the user to mirror
traffic on a certain port to a remote switch (multiple hops away).
Guarantees that a receiver in a multicast group either receives all data from
transmissions and retransmissions, or is capable of detecting unrecoverable
data packet loss
- Supported Protocols
IPv4
IPv6
BGP(Border Gateway Protocol )
OSPF (Open Shortest path first)
IP RIPv1/2 (Routing Information Protocol)
ICMP (Internet Message Control Protocol)
SSH (Secure Shell)
IGMP(v1, 2, 3) (internet Group message Protocol)
Multicast in Hardware
PIM, including Bi-directional PIM (Protocol Independent Multicast)
ECMP (Equal Cost Multi-Path routing)
- Advanced Security:
Port security with MAC-based security and IEEE 802.1x EAP (Extensible
Authentications Protocol). The Switch shall provide the ability of
integration with End-Point Security Policy Enforcement agents and
interface using Standard 802.1x EAP.
Network Address Translation (NAT)

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) intercept hardware acceleration
IEEE 802.1x EAP
ACL (Access Lists)
SSH v1/2 (Secure Shell)
Denial of Service (DoS) attack prevention
16735-8
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
VRRP response mode
OSPF MD5 encryption authentication
Discard Unknown MAC Security
- Connectivity Options
802.3ad link Aggregation, across modules with all ports active and load
sharing traffic at the same time. The Switch shall allow groups 10/100/1000
Mbps ports either fiber or copper on different I/O modules to act as in a
single trunk.
Ability to Cluster core switches to provide a single virtual Switch facing
the Servers and the distribution switches. Thus all links between the (core
switches distribution switches), (core switches Servers) shall be active
and Load-Sharing using Standard 802.3ad.
Ethernet
IEEE 802.3, 10BASE-T
Fast Ethernet
IEEE 802.3u, 100BASE-TX
IEEE 802.3, 100BASE-FX
Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3x
IEEE 802.3ab
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
1000BASE-XD/ZX
10 Gigabit Ethernet
IEEE 802.3ae
ATM OC-3
ATM OC-12
- Firewall:
The firewall shall be performed in hardware using firewall module to be plugged into
the core switches or a separate firewall box to be connected to the network.
16735-9
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
- Wide Area Networking communication:
The communication with service providers shall be achieved using communication
modules (or separate routers). adequate number of E1 lines shall be supported for
every core switch (except the server farm switches) .
The cards/routers shall provide the required integration of VOIP gateways ,analog ,
digital ,conferencing and transcoding features shall be supported allowing for remote
management. The cards shall be field upgradeable and hot swappable.
2.2
EDGE SWITCHES
The following features are currently desirable & should be available in the provided
equipment. Bidders shall state clearly any deviations/omissions/additions & indicate
which are the standard & proprietary supported protocols. The required protocols shall
be complied with the latest versions of related parameter/protocol. :
2.2.1
General features
- The edge switches shall be 24 port auto negotiating 10/100/1000 Base-TX
supporting POE (power over Ethernet 802.3af.) in addition to at least two
GBIC/SFP modular slots .each edge switch stack shall be connected to the
distribution layer switches via 2x1GbE (1000 Base-LX). The uplinks shall be
upgradeable to 10GbE .
- Edge switches shall have the ability to be connected to external redundant
power supply.
- The switching capacity /switching fabric shall not be less than 64 Gbps per switch.
- Packet classification at Layers 2/3/4 at wire speed to provide security, filtering,
and quality of service at the edge of the network.
- Ability to aggregate ports from different switch stack members and operate in
Active/Active load-sharing mode either Fiber/Copper.
- Wires peed performance .
- IPv6 &IPv4 support.
2.2.2
LAYER 2
-
2.2.3
802.1Q (Virtual LAN support)

802.3ad (Link aggregation)
Voice VLAN
802.1D (Spanning tree protocol-STP)
802.1w (Rapid spanning tree protocol-RSTP)
802.1s (Multiple spanning tree protocol-MSTP)
BPDU (bridge protocol data unit ) protection
IGMP (Internet grouping management protocol) version 1,2,3
Filtering for multicast groups
LAYER 3
16735-10
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
- RIPv1/v2 (Routing information protocol support)
- Support static routing
- Hardware based routing
- Support routing policies
2.2.4
Security
-
2.2.5
DHCP snooping
Support access lists at layers 2,3 & 4
802.1X
TACACS+/RADUIS
Port security based on MAC address
MAC and IP based filters
QoS (Quality of service ) Features

- QoS Architecture to assure End-to-End QoS with the edge for all traffic types and
not only VoIP.
- Per-Switch/VLAN/Port QoS templates for granular control
- 8 hardware queues per port
- 8 hardware queues, essentially providing 8 different levels of emission priorities,
or 8 different levels of QoS to support for the QoS architecture
- Strict & weighted round robin queuing on all I/O ports
- Strict queues are allocated for delay-sensitive traffic types (VoIP) and any
streaming media, afterwards, the weighted queues are allocated to other traffic
patterns, where weights are set according to traffic/application importance.
- Internal QoS level 802.1p bits, MAC, port, VLAN QoS level, Differentiated
services code point (DSCP)
- Packet Classification in Hardware ASICS at Ingress/Egress ports
- Filtering in Hardware ASICS at Ingress/Egress ports
- Policing and Rate Metering in Hardware ASICS at Ingress/Egress ports
- Standards 802.1p and DSCP to QoS mapping at Ingress/Egress ports
- Minimum roundtrip latency for time sensitive applications like (VoIP, Video
conferencing and streaming media applications) shall be indicated.
- Non-IP bridged/routed traffic QoS based on port, source-MAC, and protocol
VLANs
2.3
NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The proposed NMS shall include a suite of applications to provide tools for
multi-layer topology support, fault and performance management, network
visualization, and statistics gathering. The fault and performance management
tools shall enable multi-device alarm and event correlation; proactive base lining
and threshold; and RMON performance management. It Shall include the ability
to aggregate faults and provide detailed descriptions and solutions for faults. The
visualization tools shall provide insight into the Internet, intranet, and the
16735-11
SECTION 16735
DATA NETWORKING
ACTIVE COMPONENT
___________________________________________________________________________
physical network, enabling users to better organize network resources.
The offered NMS shall be able to manage larger and more complex Ethernet
networks. It shall have the flexibility to grow as the network grows. The key
requirements for the NMS are:
-
Ease of managing and troubleshooting Ethernet networks

Automated discovery and display of Ethernet topology and devices
Consolidation and correlation of network faults
Powerful diagnostic functions for multicast, unicast, and WAN protocols
Real-time performance analysis
Scalability and security for managing large networks
END OF SECTION
16735-12
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
PART
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,
Conditions of Particular Application and Division Specification Sections, apply
to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section covers the work of the IP telephone system as required for the project.
The provided IP telephone system shall be used to establish internal and external
telephone communications within the project.
IP telephony is the utilization of data network infrastructure (LAN, MAN, and
WAN) to transport telecommunication transactions including, telephone calls,
faxes and messages.
EXTENT OF WORK
Extent of work of the IP telephone system is indicated on Drawings, in schedules
and on riser diagram of the project. It covers the following:
All works shall be performed in strict accordance with the drawings, specifications
and stipulations of the following codes and standards:
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
IEC
EN
AS/NZS
EN
Class B
AS/NZ
Class B
EN
EN
EN
EN
ITU-standards (H. , H. )
TIA (TSB )
TIA
Saudi Telecom Practices and Regulations
Other related standards could be accepted.
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division
Specification Sections:
General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation indicating type,

size, rating, style, catalog number, Manufacturers names, photographs and/or
catalog data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with Specifications. This
documentation shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment
shall be ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices, which are
shown on documents (drawings, BOQ, etc). Any document submitted by the
contractor during the tender stage shall not be considered as technical submittal, it
shall be used only to approve the manufacture name. During technical submittal
stage, contractor shall submit all required technical document for study and
approval. This study may drive to reject a vendor had been previously approved
during the tender stage.
1.5.2
Technical submittal: Technical submittal shall include the following:

Complete point by point comply sheet with highlighted cross reference on related
data sheets, indicating deviations if any reasons for such deviations, also
indicate any extra features / specifications.
Manufacturer's technical product data sheets, including quantities and
specifications of every module, specification of every device, system component,
quantities, software and installations for each unit of equipment. Pin to pin riser
diagram showing all system components and interconnection between IP telephony
and all other related systems.
Planes indicating exact location of system components. Provide calculations to
support the traffic of the network, required storage capacity, required number of
telephone lines and required bandwidth for data (LAN / WAN connection)
Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system.
Contractor shall submit a list of the Manufacturer's authorized, local representative responsible for installation coordination and service, pre qualification
for the system provider and installer
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and device locations and
connection including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
Complete pin to pin one-line riser diagram(s) showing all approved equipment,
size, type and number of all conductors, interconnection between IP telephony
and all other related systems.
Installation details for raceways, racks and all the other components of the
system. Installation details drawings shall show all accessories used in
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
installation such as back boxes, glands, washers, etc. Drawings shall indicate
exact location of every single component of the system in coordination with all
other systems (Electromechanical, Arch., Civil, etc.). Submitted shop drawings
must include signature of all involved engineers representing different
disciplines (Electromechanical, etc) to confirm their approval of such locations
installations and coordination.
Complete description and data including related standards for all system
components.
Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system.
A listing of the Manufacturer's authorized, local representative responsible for
installation coordination and service.
Commissioning, Testing Procedures and Testing results: Submit testing and
commissioning procedures including required test equipment for the following:
Passive cabling, Active equipment, its traffic and performance
Close out Documents: Required documents shall include but not limited to the
following:
As-built drawings: During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in
writing all his remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested
alterations from the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or devices
which arise from coordination between the system and other activities.
No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving written approval from
the Engineer.
All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractor and extra copies shall
be submitted to the involved parties (Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.)
A complete as-built draft set of Drawings and equipment schedules shall be
prepared fifteen ( ) days after completion of work for approval of the Engineer.
The draft as-built shall include all previously approved alterations. Final originals
and copies of as-built Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division ,
Section
"Submittals".
As-built drawings shall include; Planes indicating the exact location of every single
component of the system in coordination with the other systems, As built (up
dated) pin to pin connection riser diagram indicating type, model , part number of
every used unit , device, etc., As built rack/s configuration and connection
diagram.
Operation and maintenance manuals including; Up dated data sheets for use
equipments, operation instructions, programming procedures Electronic circuits for
every device and equipment, troubleshooting repair guide, required spare parts list
for years of operation data, circuit diagram
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the system shall be
regularly engaged in manufacturing of same systems and whose products have
been in satisfactory service in similar projects for not less than five ( ) years.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is a factory-authorized

sales and service representative to perform the work of this section.
The Installer firm shall have at least five ( ) years of successful installation
experience of similar systems for similar projects.
Training: Equipments manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall
provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to selected
Employers personnel for two weeks.
DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry, closed space in original
containers. Protect products from fumes. Handle very carefully to avoid shocks
or damage
PART
PRODUCTS
IP telephone system shall include active devices required for IP telephony service.
Scope of work shall not include data switches / data servers.
The following features / specifications are just for guidance as a minimum technical
requirement, other alternatives with different / higher specifications could be
approved.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for the arrangement &coordination
(administration and financial) with STC to feed the project with telephone lines or
number of digital E s
SYSTEM FEATURES
The IP Telephony system shall have the following features and facilities:
IP extensions, referred to as Directory Number (DN)
Music on Hold service
Background Music
Call Conferencing service
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
Operator Console
PSTN Digital trunks connectivity
Flexible DID services
Corporate Directory
Call Waiting Notification
Voice Mail Box
Auto Attendant
Scheduled Access Restriction
Automatic Line Selection
Call Party Name Display
Caller list
Toggling
Hot-line features
Text messages
Advisory messages
Call Features: hold, conferencing, transfer, forward, redial, speed dial, Do Not
Disturb (DND), etc.
Enhanced telephone set features: Ring tone and volume control, call log for
received, dialed and missed calls, hands-free, Microphone mute, etc.
Flexible Call Restrictions

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS, GENERAL
Equipment and materials shall be new and unused. Systems and components shall
be designed and installed for uninterrupted duty.
Scope of work of IP telephone system shall cover all building areas such as service
room, equipment room etc.
External lines shall be terminated on the distribution frame of Saudi Telecom (MDF ).
Connection between MDF and IP telephone frame (MDF ) inside main data room
shall take place.
The system shall include but not limited to:
Control and signaling equipment
Basic IP phone set.
Executive and office-type IP phone
Voice Gateway
Voice mail system for all extensions with capacity of 5 messages X 30 second
per extension.
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
Attendant console
Analogue terminal adaptor for faxes connectivity
Software
SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
General
The system shall offer converged voice and data using the same underlying
technology as the Internet (TCP/IP), with voice being transmitted over local area
networks (LANs) and wide area networks (WANs) for IP phone calls. The
solution must be comprised of control elements, media gateway elements,
applications, IP telephone sets and IP soft-phones, as well as voice mail.
The system must use a switched IP Core that is highly scalable and delivers reliable,
robust switching, routing and call control fully leveraging IP while providing access
to the PSTN using TDM, ISDN, DSL, etc. technologies.
For IP-device-to-IP-device communications, e.g., calls between Ethernet IP
phones, switching must be provided via the enterprises IP network. For TDM
circuit communications, e.g., a call between an IP phone and the PSTN, or
between the PSTN and voice mail application.
The ability to use two different switching techniques means that conversion (or
gateway/gatekeeper functionality) is only required between IP and TDM calls.
The architecture must package the traditional circuit-switched bus, call server,
gateway/gatekeeper and real time applications resources within a rack.
Applications must include:
Voice mail.
Network management.
Web-based management application tool.
The system must be able to support both digital and analogue trunks for
connection to the PSTN or for connecting multiple sites or systems together.
Networking systems together must be achieved using traditional circuit switched
technology or the IP infrastructure.
The system must be able to be used as a standalone application, e.g., Voice Mail
System, or a mobility solution.
Complete solution for IP telephone system software and hardware to be from one
manufacturer.
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
IP Phone Server
The server shall be of brand name products
IP phone server shall be used for control and switch signals. IP Phone server shall
have but not limited to the following features:
Support related software.
Two Intel 5140 Xeon 2.33 -GHz processors, and 4 MB of Level 2 cache
4-GB PC2-5300 667 -MHz double-data-rate 2 (DDR2) memory with online spare
capabilities, extendable up to 32 GB
Smart Array P400 Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID) Controller
with 256 -MB cache (Hot-swap hard drives configured using RAID 1 at least).
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet controller
Support for up to 8 small form-factor hot-plug hard drives
Redundant hot-swap power supplies
Redundant hot-swap fans
Capacity shall be as indicated on the drawings
Support 5 universal-serial-bus (USB 2)
Support Digital Audio Tape (DAT) through USB 2.0
Ethernet connectors Two RJ-45 connectors (10/100/1000 ) , support EIA
Category 6 A.
Operating Temperature 10 to 10 to 35
Relative humidity: 10 to 90% , 28 C
Automatic call distribution (ACD) and interactive voice response (IVR) systems
(to Deliver notification to users through e-mail, fax, pager, short message
service
Enable customers to retrieve the information they require through voice
commands without ever speaking with an agent
Software: Required software shall have but not limited to the following features:
Collects information about a user's availability status and communications
capabilities, including whether he is using a communications device such as a
phone at a particular time or have Web collaboration or videoconferencing
enabled on the system. Based on information captured, applications can improve
productivity by helping users connect with colleagues more efficiently by
determining the most effective avenue for collaborative communication.
Presence information can be incorporated in applications developed.
Supports Microsoft Office Communicator click-to-dial and phone monitoring
functions, as well as integration with Microsoft Outlook Calendar and Meeting
Notification to help users maintain their availability and status information
automatically
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
Centralized, replicated configuration database and distributed Web-based
management viewers
Date and time display format configurable per phone
Device groups and pools
Device mapping toolIP address to MAC address
Dialed number translation table (inbound and outbound translation)
H.323 -compliant interface to H.323 clients, gateways, and gatekeepers
QoS statistics recorded per call
Time zone configurable per phone
Gateway: Gateway shall be based on H. technology, H. Associated with the
PSTN-side provides voice, fax, and remote-access services over IP (as TDM
switching). It shall provide high-density packet voice digital-signal-processor
(DSP) modules and universal port. It shall support Frame Relay, Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP), and High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC).
The Gateway shall support but not limited to the following:
Trunk package
Dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) package (supports H.245 Alphanumeric, H.245
Signal, RFC 2833, H.323)
Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
FXR package for fax transmissions
Announcement server package
Script package
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) package (QoS)
Standards-based T.38 Real-Time Fax Relay and T.37 Fax Store and Forward.
Standard call detail records (CDRs) for accurate billing
Voice XML and IVR applications.
Voicemail, fax, and e-mail
V.92 and V.44 Support
Security Management: multilevel password protection; user authentication such as
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) and Challenge Handshake
Authentication Protocol (CHAP); access control lists (ACLs); IP address
spoofing prevention and logging; support of the industry-standard
Regional and Branch-Office Connectivity
10/100/1000 BASE-T auto sensing Gigabit Ethernet ports
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
Serial ports
Accepts and consolidates all types of traffic with required ports, including voice,
fax, dial-in analog, digital ISDN, T1 / E1, etc.
Hot-Swappable Cards and Redundant Fans
Supported protocols:
LAN protocols: IP, IPX, AppleTalk, DECnet,
Q, etc.
WAN protocols: Frame Relay, PPP, HDLC (leased line)

Routing protocols: Routing Information Protocol (RIP) and RIPv , OSPF,
IGRP, BGPv , IS-IS, AppleTalk EIGRP, IPX-EIGRP, Next Hop Resolution
Protocol (NHRP), AppleTalk Update-Based, Routing Protocol (AURP)
QoS protocols: IP Precedence,
P, etc.
Access protocols: PPP, Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), TCP Clear,
IPXCP, ATCP, NetBIOS over TCP/IP etc
Bandwidth optimization: Multilink PPP (MLPPP), TCP/IP header compression,
Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol (BACP)
Voice codecs and fax protocols: G. mu-law, G. a-law, G. a, G.
G.
K, K, K, G. , G-Clear, Adaptive Multirate: AMR-NB K,
. K, K, K, K, K, K, SID
ab,
K,
Voice codecs and fax protocols -High-density packet voice/fax DSPs : G.

mu-law, G. a-law, G. a, G. ab, G.
K, K, K, G. , G-Clear,
Adaptive Multi-rate: AMR-NB K, K, K, K, K, . K, K, K,
SID, G.
K, K, G.
A K, K, iLBC, T. Real-Time Fax Relay,
Super Group fax interoperability, Fax detection, Fax pass-through, T. Store
and Forward Fax, Modem Relay, modem pass-through, RFC
, H and In
band DTMF Relay and SIP NOTIFY etc
Voice compression and fax protocols: Universal DSPs, G. , G.
( and
KB), G. , G. ab, G a, G-Clear, and GSM-FR, T. Real-Time Fax Relay,
T. Fax Store and Forward, Fax pass-through, Modem pass-through, Fax
detection, RFC
, H and In band DTMF Relay and SIP NOTIFY and
SUBSCRIBE,
DSP voice features: G. , G.
( -KB and
GSM-FR Echo cancellation, DTMF etc
-KB), G. , G. ab, G a,
Voice signaling protocols: H. v , SIP, MGCP , TGCP , Voice XML,

RTSP, and ESMTP, Fax out (transmission) Group , standards EIA
Class
and EIA Class , at modulations
V. , V. , V. , V. ter, and V. Open Settlements Protocol (OSP), Media
Recording Control Protocol (MRCP) etc
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
Other protocols such as: Network security, Virtual private networking, ISDN
protocols, Modem protocols, Wireless protocols, TDM clocking Direct inward
dialing (DID) , Voicemail , Voice XML , TDM switching, etc.
Executive and office-type IP phone:
following features:
Required telephone set shall have the
Display: 5.6 -inch (14 cm) graphical TFT color touch screen display, 16 -bit color
depth, 320 x 240 , effective pixel resolution, with backlight. Display also supports
localization requiring double-byte Unicode encoding for fonts.
Audio: Support for wideband including handset / headset, and speakerphone
Codec Support: G.711 a, G.711 , G.729 a, G.729 ab, G.722 , and iLBC
Speakerphone: Full-duplex speakerphone with acoustic echo cancellation.
Directories Key: Ready access to missed, received or placed calls (plus
intercom history and directories). Incoming messages are identified and
categorized on the display, allowing users to quickly and effectively return calls
using direct dial-back capability. Corporate directory integrates with the
Lightweight Directory
Settings Key: Allows user to adjust display brightness, select background
images (if available), and select ringer sounds through the User Preference
menu. Network Configuration preferences also can be set up (usually by the
system administrator). Configuration can be set up either automatically or
manually.
Services Key: Allows users to quickly access diverse information such as
weather, stocks, or any Web-based information using XML.
Help Button: Online Help gives users information about the phone keys,
buttons, and features.
Speakerphone includes Speaker On/Off, Microphone Mute, and Headset
buttons that are lit when active.
Four-way navigation cluster allows users to scroll vertically and horizontally. At
the center of the cluster is a Select button that can be used for selection of an
in-focus item
Display Button Indicates when phone is in power-saving sleep/inactivity mode
(button is lit), and can be used to awaken the display. Inactivity period is
configured by the system administrator.
Internal 2-port Ethernet switch allows for a direct connection to a 10/100/1000
BASET Ethernet network through an RJ-45 interface with single LAN
connectivity for both the phone and a PC. System administrator can designate
separate VLANs for the PC and phone, providing improved security and
reliability of voice and data traffic.
Headset Port Dedicated headset port eliminates the need for a separate headset
amplifier and allows the handset to remain in its cradle, making headset use
simpler. Both wideband (G.722 ) and narrowband headsets are supported.
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
Volume Control provides easy decibel-level adjustments for the speakerphone,
handset, headset, and ringer. The handset is hearing aid-compatible.
Adjustable Foot-Stand Stand is adjustable from flat to 60 degrees to provide
optimum display viewing and comfortable use of all buttons and keys. The footstand is keyed to match standard wall-jack configurations for wall mounting. .
Expansion Module Support An optional add-on module provides 14 additional
buttons for programming directory numbers or speed dials. Up to two
expansion modules may be used
Multiple Ring Tones: Minimum 24 defined user-selectable ring tones to be
provided. Ring tones may also be personalized.
Support Quality of Service standards.
Language Support: Built-in support for more than 5 languages
Power Requirements: The phone is interoperable with PoE (IEEE 802.3 af
PoE). 48 VDC is required; it can be supplied locally at the desktop using an
optional AC-to-DC power supply
.
Basic IP Phone Set: Required IP telephone set shall have the following features:
Display: 5 .6-inch (14 cm) high-resolution graphical 4-bit grayscale display (320
x 222 ) grayscale pixel-based LCD The display provides features such as date
and time, calling party name, calling party number, and digits dialed. The crisp
graphic capability of the display allows for the inclusion of higher value, more
visibly rich Extensible Markup Language (XML) applications and double-byte
languages.
Messages: Access to voicemail.
Directories: Identification of incoming messages and categorizes them on the
screen, allowing users to quickly and effectively return calls using direct dialback capability integrated with the corporate directory
Setting Key: The Settings feature key allows the user to adjust display contrast,
select background images (if available), and select from a large number of
unique ringer sounds through the User Preference menu.
Services: IP telephone set allows users to quickly access diverse information such as
weather, stocks, or any Web-based information using XML
Help: The online Help feature gives users information about the phone keys,
buttons, and features. The pixel display allows for greater flexibility of features
and significantly expands the information viewed when using features such as
Services, Information, Messages, and Directory.
Display Button Indicates when phone is in power-saving sleep/inactivity mode
(button is lit), and can be used to awaken the display. Inactivity period is
configured by the system administrator.
Ethernet Switch Internal 2-port Ethernet switch allows for a direct connection
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
to a 10/100/1000 BASET Ethernet network through an RJ-45 interface with
single LAN connectivity for both the phone and a PC. System administrator can
designate separate VLANs for the PC and phone, providing improved security
and reliability of voice and data traffic.
Headset Port Dedicated headset port eliminates the need for a separate headset
amplifier and allows the handset to remain in its cradle, making headset use
simpler. Both wideband (G.722 ) and narrowband headsets are supported.
Volume Control provides easy decibel-level adjustments for the speakerphone,
handset, headset, and ringer. The handset is hearing aid-compatible.
Adjustable Foot-Stand Stand is adjustable from flat to 60 degrees to provide
optimum display viewing and comfortable use of all buttons and keys. The footstand is keyed to match standard wall-jack configurations for wall mounting. .
Expansion Module Support An optional add-on module provides 14 additional
buttons for programming directory numbers or speed dials. Up to two
expansion modules may be used
Multiple Ring Tones: Minimum 24 defined user-selectable ring tones to be
provided. Ring tones may also be personalized.
Support Quality of Service standards.
Language Support: Built-in support for more than 5 languages
Power Requirements: The phone is interoperable with PoE (IEEE 802.3 af PoE).
48 VDC is required; it can be supplied locally at the desktop using an optional
AC-to-DC power supply
Analog Interface: Analog interface shall be used to allow regular analog
telephones / faxes to operate on IP-based telephony networks. It shall have RJ
port for LAN connection and RJ
for analog devices connection. Analog
interface shall support the following protocols:
G.711
G.711 A-law
G.723.1
G.729
H.323
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
802.1 Q VLAN tagging
Domain Name System (DNS)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
Internet Protocol (IP)
Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
Analog interface shall provide but not limited to the following features:
Anonymous Call Rejection
-
SECTION
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
Call forwardon busy

Call forwardon no answer
Call forwardunconditional
Call hold
Caller ID
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Call return
Call transferBlind
Call transferConsultation
Call waiting
Call waiting Caller ID

Distinctive ringing
Message-waiting-indication (stuttering dial tone)
Speed dial
Voice mail
Main Distribution Frame (MDF): MDF shall be used to terminate incoming

PSTN lines if needed. It shall provide the following facilities:
Possibility of connection, dismantling and isolation of the lines
MDF shall have 110 block wiring
Protection modules shall be installed on the trunk lines connectors.
Possibility of tracing faults, testing of all connections and maintaining telephone
network.
Protection of lines from any overload or failure in the lines
The MDF shall be of modular design allowing for extension in blocks having all
the mentioned features.
The capacity of the MDF shall be as indicated on drawings.
Possibility of grouping and cross connecting the lines for trouble shooting and
maintaining of the wiring of the network.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16750
STRUCTURE CABLING SYSTEM
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions,
Conditions of Particular Application and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section covers the specifications of the Structure cabling system (SCS)
required for the project to achieve a complete integration for several services over
the same structure cabling system such as Voice, Video & Data in addition to all
other low current systems.
This specification defines the data transmission network requirement provided for
the project. Generally the structured cabling system shall serve the whole project.
Telecommunication closets/cabinets will be distributed all over the project as
indicated on the drawings. Every telecommunication closet will be connected via
fiber optic cables to the intermediate telecommunication closet as indicated on
system riser diagram. The intermediate telecommunication closets will be
connected to the main cross connect cabinet which will be located at the Main IT
room. The main cross connect will include fiber optic patching cabinets and will
provide the required patching to the project core switches.
Generally the cables that will be used will be Cat 6A (500MHz) and single mode
(9/125 ) meter, all cables shall be low smoke zero halogen . plenum rated cables
shall be used in plenum areas .
1.3
EXTENT OF WORK
The extent of work covers the SCS as described by the Specifications and
indicated on the Drawings, riser diagrams and Bill of Quantities of the project.
Work shall include but is not limited to all labor, equipment, cable networks,
connection, testing, training, etc to furnish and install a complete system.
The Contractor shall establish a complete structure cable system including
conduiting, cable tray system, wiring, outlets ,management panels ,cable
organizers ,patch panels, etc. and as shown on the drawings.
The contractor is responsible for pulling cables (horizontal and backbone),
making the appropriate terminations at both ends of the cables at outlets
,consolidation points and in the patch panels telecommunication closets and
provide a complete labeling system along with testing documents for each node
and backbone connection.
The conduit and trunking installation shall be in accordance with the requirements
detailed elsewhere within the specification.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
The provided SCS shall be suitable for type of occupancy as defined by the local
building code and as required by the local authority and by the international
codes.
The contractor is requested to provide all the required equipment, material, component, etc.
which makes the system work as required without any extra cost. The contractor is
responsible for providing even those equipment, and material which are not mentioned in
specifications, and drawings, but necessary for system perfect operation and perfect
interfacing with other systems.
1.4

Equipment ,components and installations shall comply with the latest issues of
the current provisions of relevant Egyptian Local and State Building Codes in
addition to the following international standards and all subsequent addendums
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606:
Administration Standard for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.
ANSI/TIA/EIA-607:
Commercial Building Grounding and

Requirements for Telecommunications.
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-10
Bonding
& ISO/IEC 11801 :Ed. 2.1
ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces.
EIA/TIA-TSB72:
Centralized Optical fiber cabling guidelines.
UL Listing: The system and all its components shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. or approved equal.
All System components should be passed the tests as mentioned in the standards.
Certificate of these tests should be submitted.
The relevant Local Building Codes. Standards of local authorities having
jurisdiction shall be considered
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division-1 Specification Sections:
General: Submit complete sets of documentation as stated by the contract
conditions indicating the type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturers
names, photos and catalog data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with
these specifications. This documentation shall be subject to approval and no
equipment shall be ordered without this approval, for all equipment and devices,
which are shown on Drawings and those not shown and necessary for system
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
operation and integration
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing equipment/device locations and
connecting wiring of entire structure cabling system including riser diagrams. Shop
drawings shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
- Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all telecommunication closets
indicating U heights, racks dimensions.
- Racks elevations for all telecommunication closets and details for
consolidation points.
- Provide calculations to provide filling ratio of cable trays and conduits .the
filling ratio shall not exceed 40% of cable trays conduits cross sectional area.
- Installation manuals
- Complete description data including UL listing or any equivalent standards for
all system components
- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local representative responsible for
installation, coordination and service
- Compliance sheet item by item providing a comparison between each item
specifies herein and each item submitted and deviations justifications if there
is any.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including
specifications and installations for each type of the structure cabling system.
Include standard or typical riser diagram, operation and maintenance instructions
for inclusion in maintenance manuals.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of
system component installed including furnished specialties and accessories.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Division and other relevant documentation.
Instruction Manuals: The Contractor shall provide with the assistance of the system
manufacturer and its authorized, local representative. In addition, one approved copy of
the structure cabling system submittal, complete installation & maintenance
instructions; pertinent system orientation documents and system service, testing, for the
permanent use of the Employer.
Prior Installations Submittals: The Contractor shall submit the following prior to
installation.
- Workshop drawings illustrating the full details of the outlets/ consolidation
points locations, conduiting, and trunking routes
- Documents illustrating the intended termination methodology along with the
used termination tool and cut sheets for both copper and fiber optic cables.
- Certificates from the structure cabling Manufacturer illustrating that the
Installer is certified to perform design, installation and testing for the structure
cabling system.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
- The installer reference with similar projects.
- Proposed schedule for installations along with the used manpower.
- Sample testing documents along with the cut sheet of the cable analyzer,
OTDR and any other testing tool.
- All related technical submittals of cables, patch panels, outlets, modular jacks,
patch cords and connectors for both copper and fiber optic systems along with
the technical cut sheets illustrating the part number of each component and
related testing parameters performance sheets
- Racks details indicating rack size, and all housed equipment sizes.
- Proposed labeling strategy.
After installations Submittals: Upon completion of the installations the contractor
shall provide complete set of documentation including the following
- As-Built drawings indicating the whole structured cabling system pathways
conduits illustrating all details regarding sizes and cable types, Backbone
(riser) & horizontal diagrams, technical description, labeling, color coding, and
the locations for all the Telecommunication closets, indicating any changes
from the workshop drawings (any changes during execution phase shall be
submitted for approval prior installations).
- Testing documents for every node in both hard and soft copies.
- Racks elevation illustrating the housed components illustrating the filling ratio
of each cabinet.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The system and all its components shall be according to the listed codes and
standards.
The Cat 6A cabling will be considered as the minimum performance
specifications for the horizontal cabling system ensuring a band width of at least
500 MHz.
Special consideration shall be given to higher performance cables in terms of
alien Near End Cross Talk.
Fiber optic cables jackets shall be low smoke zero halogen and suitable for
similar applications and for cable trays installations.
The structure cabling system must satisfy the following objectives:
- Backward compatible to previous categories.
- Open standard that allows products from different vendors to work together.
- Patch cord plug and jack interoperability for modular (RJ
connections.
type)
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
- End-to-end total solution from single manufacturer.
General Requirements
The structure cabling system products specified in this document shall be
supplied and produced by a single manufacturer.
Materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of structure cabling products and not
custom designed especially for this project.
The proper installation practices must be considered regarding the bending radius,
pulling strength, appropriate cable ties and length of untwisted conductorsetc.
Manufacture Qualifications: Manufacturing firms should be regularly engaged
in manufacture of Structure cabling systems of type, size and whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar services for not less than years. The
manufacturer shall provide performance and component warranties for the
installed structure cabling system for year.
Installer Qualifications: The Installer must have at least years of experience in
installation
of similar projects. Installer should be certified from the
manufacturer to design, install and troubleshoot the provided structured cabling
system.
Training: The system manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall
provide, in depth, training to selected Employer's personnel for one week.
Handle the structure cabling system components carefully to prevent damage,
breaking and scoring. Do not install damaged components, replace with new.
Store system components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,
water, construction debris, and physical damage.
RELATED SECTIONS
-
General Electrical Requirements

Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Grounding and Bonding
Raceways, boxes and Cabinets
Light Current Raceways, Boxes and Cabinets
Wires and Cables
Cable Trays
Electrical Identification
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
During the construction of the system, the Contractor shall put in writing all his
remarks, during the progress of work, concerning any suggested alterations from the
shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or devices which arise from
coordination between the system and other disciplines.
No execution of alterations shall be allowed before receiving written approval
from the Engineer.
All alterations shall be registered and filled by the Contractor and extra copies
shall be submitted to the involved parties (Engineer, Project Manager, Site, etc.).
A complete as-built draft set of drawings shall be prepared 15 days after completion of
work for approval of the Engineer. The draft as built shall include all previously
approved alterations. Final originals and copies of drawing shall be submitted
according to Division-1, Section "Submittals".
SPARE PARTS
The system shall have the following spare parts:
- 5% of patch panels and consolidation points and fiber optic enclosures.
- 5% of outlets (face plate &modular jacks)
- 5% of patch cords (fiber and copper)
1.11
COORDINATION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

The structure cabling system supplier shall be responsible for coordination and
exchange information with Suppliers of other systems and equipment which shall
communicate with, in order to achieve the required specified functions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Structured cabling system design will be based on the requirements, facilities
drawings and documents which will be properly studied complete with this
specification.
The system shall comply with all of the performance requirements for the current and
proposed applications such as Gigabit Ethernet, and achieve complete convergence
between different applications for data, voice, video etc.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
The structured cabling system will be composed of both horizontal copper cables in
addition to fiber optic cables for the backbone of the network.
The Structured cabling system shall mainly be consisting of the following

components:
-
Patch panels (for copper and fiber optic cables)

Telecommunication closets (Racks).
Management panels
Horizontal cables (copper cables)
Backbone cables (fiber optic cables)
Outlets RJ /Consolidation points
Patch cords (copper and fiber optic)
The above components shall be provided with the appropriate numbers and
capacities to serve the whole building. The locations of the telecommunication
closets locations are shown on the drawings.
The following general requirements shall be fulfilled in the provided structure
cabling system. Bidders shall state clearly any deviations/omissions or additions from
the desired specifications.
2.2
HORIZONTAL CABLING STRUCTURE

The horizontal cabling system represents the copper cables running between the
various work area outlets & consolidation points and the corresponding
telecommunication closet.
The work area will contain the outlets including face plates, RJ-45 jacks, the back
box and patch cords.
The horizontal cables shall run horizontally along the floors and ceilings. The
horizontal cabling system shall include conduits, trays, wires, cables and all
necessary accessories for constructing complete network. Patch panels will be
provided to provide the appropriate termination of the horizontal cabling.
Cat /Class E Cables: The cables shall be shielded UTP Category cables and
shall meet the ISO/IEC
requirements for Class E supporting Gigabit
Ethernet .the following points shall be considered
- The cables jacket must be low smoke zero halogen.
- Horizontal cabling shall be -pair independently verified for compliance.
- Insulation colors shall be blue, orange, green, brown & white with Color code.
- Each cable must be clearly labeled at both ends.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
- The maximum allowable distance for each horizontal cable must not exceed
m.
- The cable must be suitable for different high speed applications using
simultaneous transmission over four pair such as Gigabit Ethernet
(
BASE-TX) Horizontal cables shall be terminated according to the
TIA/EIA wiring pattern requirements.
- Sequential meter marking is required with illustration of the aggregating
length, cable category and the AWG.
Patch Panels: Shielded Category
patch panels shall meet ISO/IEC
requirements for CAT component performance to allow the structure cabling
system to comply with all of the performance requirements for current and
proposed applications such as Gigabit Ethernet,
BASE-Tx, GbE ,digital
video, analog and digital voice & VOIP applications. The panel must have
universal wiring label to permit field installation to either T A or T B
wiring.
- Cat
Patch panels shall be provided at each telecommunication closet to
provide the termination for the horizontal cabling and also patching process to
all outlets and provide the required flexibility.
- The patch panels must be of the same category as the cables those will be
terminated over these patch panels.
- The patch panels shall be
inch width rack mounted located in the
Telecommunication Closets and the Main cross connect.
- The patch panels shall be rack mounted standard
RJ
with suitable number of
ports.
- The connector shall provide colour code identification for the pins at the rear
of the connector. Patch panel outlets must have each connector, connected
separately. The termination is to be in accordance with the colour code.
Reassignment of pairs is forbidden.
- The installer must avoid any risk of cable pinching or compression during the
installation or termination of the cables
- The installer shall locate the cables in the cabinet with enough slack to enable
the termination of the connectors.
Patch cords:
- Patch cords shall be RJ
performance at both ends.
to RJ
cables achieving UTP Cat
channel
- These patch cords will provide the connection between the patch panel RJ
ports and their corresponding active device port.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
- Patch cords shall be
twisted pair UTP Cat .
- Patch cords shall be required to provide the connection from the patch panel
ports to its specified electronic device port and also the connection between
the work area outlets and workstation.
- Patch cords must be of the same category as the horizontal cables to enhance
the overall performance.
- Patch cords must be manufacturer tested and certified Category . Patch cable
assemblies shall be wired to the T
wiring pattern.
- Patch cords must be stranded to provide the required flexibility at the cabinet
for high density environments.
- Other copper patch cables shall be provided to interface the incoming outer
services with the active components. Types of interfaces and cables types shall
be coordinated according to equipments manufactures requirements.
Data Outlet:
- The outlets will be located at the work area side and shall be wall mounted low
profile angled face plate icon able in addition to the back box along with the
RJ jacks.
- RJ
jacks will be housed into the outlet, those jacks must be STP Cat A
and accept termination wiring according to both T
-A&T
-B.
- Modular jacks shall be color coded.
- Modular jacks shall be
requirements.
-pair and shall meet the Category
performance
- Consolidation points shall be and

port and shall be mounted in corridors .
each consolidation point port shall serve two inline retails in general. For big
boxes
port consolidation point will be used.
Cable Management: Cable management panels shall be provided at the cabinets
with the appropriate numbers to provide a neat management for the cables and
patch cords.
Both horizontal and vertical cable managements must be provided for proper
cable management inside the cabinets along with cable ties.
Cabinets (telecommunication closets): Cabinets will be located at each
telecommunication closet and will enclose the patch panels/consolidation points
for both the horizontal and backbone cables.
The cabinets shall be 19 width and of an appropriate U height to accommodate
the number of the patch panels ,management panels and the switches.
The Telecommunication cabinets shall be wall/floor mounted in such a way to
provide access and easy management.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
Cabinets shall be supplied with power strips, fan kits and earthing kits.
The cabinets must be supplied with the appropriate vertical cable organizers to
provide neat routing for the cables inside the cabinet.
2.3
BACKBONE STRUCTURE
The backbone is represented by the fiber optic cables connecting the various
Telecommunication closets with the main cross connect at the main IT room. The
backbone structured cabling system components shall consist of fiber optic
cables, fiber optic patch panels along with the fiber optic connectors and fiber
optic patch cords.
Fiber Optic Cables: The backbone fiber optic cables shall be Multimode mode
(
) cables that meet or exceed all of the performance requirements for
current and proposed applications such as Ethernet (including
Gigabit
Ethernet), ATM, Fiber Channel, FDDI and others, and shall conform to the fiber
performance requirements of the TIA
, ISO
.
The Multimode cables shall be 50/125 m core/cladding ratio and having
maximum attenuation of 0.5dB/km @ 850 & 1310nm wavelengths.
All fiber optic cables shall be LSZH. Outdoor cables shall be suitable for indoor /
outdoor applications ,all dielectric construction including water blocked buffer
tube for water penetration .
For distribution cables ,they shall be tight buffered suitable for in building
installations through shafts, cable traysetc. number of cores are as indicated on
drawings.
Fiber Optic Patch Panels: Fiber optic patch panels shall be provided at the
telecommunication closets and the main cross connect to provide the appropriate
termination for the fiber optic cables.
The fiber optic patch panels shall be LC type, rack mounted.LC/LC couplers
should be installed in the patch panel according to the number of cores terminated
at the patch panel.
The patch panels must be drawer-style, with all steel construction, cable strain
reliefs, cable entries and management rings.
Fiber Optic Patch Cords: Fiber optic patch cords will provide the connection
between the fiber optic patch panels and the corresponding fiber optic port in the
switch.
Patch cords shall be LC duplex from the patch panel side and the other side will
be depending on the switch interface connector type.
Patch cords shall be of the same type of the fiber optic cable.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
2.4
TESTING
Cat Testing: The cables shall be tested & verified to fulfill the ISO/IEC
edition
,TIA/EIA
-B.
Class E/ CAT requirements. The contractor
has to provide the proposed testing procedure including along with testing
equipment.
The contractor must provide documents illustrating the last date of calibrating the
tester at the manufacturer factory.
The required parameters to be tested according to the TIA/EIA are as following:
-
Wire map
Cable length
Delay skew
Propagation delay
NEXT
Attenuation
Return loss
ACR
ELFEXT
Power sum NEXT
Power sum ACR
Power sum ELFEXT
Testing results will be provided in both soft and hard copies for 100% of the
nodes. Randomly selected 20% of nodes shall be tested in the engineer presence
and results will be verified with the previously provided results.
Testing shall be performed under normal operation conditions for the building i.e.
in the presence of ambient Electromagnetic interference sources.
Each testing sheet shall indicate the following:
-
Cable ID
Date/time
Selected testing limits
Cable type
Operator name
Software version
Limits version
Used NVP (Nominal Velocity of Propagation)
Model and S/Ns of the main and remote units along with the used adapter type.
Test summary whether it is pass or fail along with headroom result.
Site name along with other details regarding the patch panel ,cabinet and floor
labels.
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
Curves for different parameters for the different pairs.
Fiber Optic Testing: The testing will be required to provide measurements of

the installed condition and overall performance of the entire cabling system.
Testing will be performed taking into consideration Tier
of the TIA/EIA
TSB
by performing the following measurements for all backbone links
Performing OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) testing regarding
irregularities such as severe bend and assuring uniformity of cable attenuation
and connector insertion loss.
The tester shall have integrated OLTS along with OTDR functions to perform
loss/length certification measurements, OTDR auto analysis and end face
inspection.
Documentation for all end faces is a must, the connector end face has to be shown
on the testing sheet.
Power budget calculations shall be provided with testing documents
Testing shall be performed at 1310 & 850 for Multimode mode
Testing results should include the following:
-
PART 3
Date of Calibration
Cabling link
Test wavelengths
Fiber identification.
Fiber length
Fiber attenuation
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which the network shall be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an
acceptable manner.
INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION
Install electrical identification in accordance with requirements of Section
"Electrical Materials and Methods".
16750 -
SECTION 16750
___________________________________________________________________________
INSTALLATION OF THE STRUCTURE CABLING SYSTEM
Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work of the Contract
shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate trade.
System manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to this authorized
local representative to:
- Coordinate the selection of components
- Supervise the installation of the complete network.
- Perform a complete functional test of the system.
Install the system as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturers
written instructions and complying with referenced standards of installation.
Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturers requirements. Color code
wiring and install per manufacturers point-to-point wiring diagram.
Submit a signed copy of test results in duplicate to the Engineer.
Connection and Supervision: Make connections to equipment panel under
manufacturer's supervision.
System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation
only, pre-approved by the Engineer.
Prior to final acceptance of the system, manufacturer of system shall, in presence
of the Contractor, Employer's representative and Engineer's representative, test
each extension device.
END OF SECTION
16750 -
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
.
1.2
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General

Conditions, Conditions of Particular Application and Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
Bill of quantities
Related section
1. Grounding
section 16452
2. conduit and fitting
section 16110
3. Basic materials and methods section 16050
4. Cable trays
section 16114
5. wires and cables
section 16120
scope of work

Start up system
Programming system according to required function and
specification
documents
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
This section covers audio visual systems working at Conference Room

The system shall be consisting of: Audiovisual sources
Main distribution equipment including cross-point
matrix
main display screen LCD type
Touch screen main control system
The system shall be used intelligent control system to distribute Audio/ Visual sources
to main LCD displays and manage them by touch screens
16755-1
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
1.4
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Equipments at conference room shall consist of: Audio/ visual sources

1. DVD player
2. Double auto revere cassette
3. AM/FM tuner with antenna
4. multi CD player
1.5
Intelligent control and distribution system

1. Matrix controller 16 inputs X 16 outputs cross
point with built in scalar
2. Touch screen with main controller
Display units
1. LCD 64" Monitor
Audio system
1. Mixer Preamplifier
2. Power Amplifier
3. Feedback Suppresser
4. Digital Equalizer
5. IR audio conference system
Equipment and installations shall comply with the current stipulations of the local
authorities in the KSA and the standards of:
- Consultative Committee International for Radio CCIR.
- Electronic Industries Association EIA
- International Organization of Standardization ISO
1.6
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division-1
The Vendor should indicate specifically the country of origin of every piece, connector,
cable, software and any part of the solution
General: Submit the necessary complete sets of documentation indicating the type,
size, rating, style, manufacturers' names, photos, catalog and data sheets for all items
including specifications and installation instructions to ensure compliance with
Specifications.
Submit detailed riser diagram for the system indicating all quantities, models etc..
16755-2
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
Submit Rack details indicating rack size, and all housed equipment sizes.
Submit Instruction Manual: This documentation shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered without this approval, for all equipment
and devices, which are indicated by the documents (Drawings, BOQs, etc..).
Shop Drawings: After receiving letter of acceptance with two weeks, the contractor
shall provide detailed shop drawings indicating equipment/ device locations and
connecting wiring of network, detailed drawings of the network and complete wiring
diagrams of all the system constituents, cable size, type and numbers
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of network
equipment installed, including ancillary equipment and furnished specialties and
accessories. Includes standard product maintenance manual
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The products specified in this document shall be supplied and produced by a single
manufacturer/supplier, with the exception of Data racks, Floor boxes, conduits, labels,
and trays.
Manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience and shall be ISO 9001
and ISO 14001 (Environmental Management) Certified. The entire system component
should be European or American manufactured.
1.7.1
1.8
Installer Qualifications: Installer firm shall have at least 5

years of successful installation experience in similar projects.
Installer should be certified from the manufacture for design,
install and maintain the provided system.
COORDINATION
All interface protocols and required hardware and software needed to submit and satisfy
system operation shall be part of this contact
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
Provide complete and fully functional Main Audiovisual Distribution System using
materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings and performance as indicated.
Main Audio visual system at conference room shall permit direct connection to RF
audio conference system and touch screen
16755-3
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
Audio visual system shall combine matrix controller to distribute audio/ visual sources
to main LCD's (63" or 17")
Touch screen system shall be used to permit full access and control for all system
components with Graphic user pages
Touch screen controller system shall be interfaced with Lighting Control and HVAC
system
The contractor is responsible of all other related work to have the system work as
specified and to have the required signal level at each IR microphone The scope
includes also all the required equipment and material even though which is not
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall provide all these material to have complete
work without any extra cost.
Design, installation and maintenance shall be carried out by the contractor according to
international standards and instructions in order to complete the work with high
standard and to avoid missing information or maintenance problems.
2.2
2.2.1 Multi CD Player:

CD player Type: rack mounted, high quality, capable of operating
continuously and having the following functions:
1. Direct access to the disks
2. Track programming capability.
CD player Programming: it should be possible to program the CD player
to select from any CD at any order for continuous play
Frequency response
20:20000 HZ
Total harmonic distortion
0.003%
Signal to noise ratio
106dB
Dynamic range
96dB
Power requirement
110:220 VAC @ 50/60 HZ
2.2.2 Double Auto Reverse Cassette:

Track system
Heads /deck
Tap speed
Pitch control
Frequency response
4 track two channel stereo

(1) erase / (1) record
Dual speed 4.76 cm/sec 9.52 cm/sec
approximately +/- 10%
63 HZ: 16 KHZ +/- 3dB
>79dB Dolby C. CCIR arm
>69dB Dolby B. CCIR arm
16755-4
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
WOW and Flutter
Distortion
Line RCA Input
Line RCA output
Power requirement
>15% WRMS
<2.5%
-10dBV, 0.3V
-5dBV, 0.3V
110:220 VAC @ 50/60 HZ
2.2.3 AM/FM tuner with antenna:

Radio Tuner AM/FM: rack mounted high quality, shall be of the latest
design and have digital frequency display, 10 memories minimum and auto
scanning. The tuner shall be of the stereophonic type.
Frequency response
FM 87: 110MHZ
AM 540:1600KHZ
Sensitivity
FM 2 uV AM 4.5 uV
Noise level
FM 60dB AM 45dB
Power requirement
110:220 VAC @ 50/60 HZ
2.2.4 DVD Player / Recorder:
General
Power requirement
TV format
Audio frequency response
S/N ratio
Dynamic range
WOW and flutter
Recording
Recording format
Recordable discs
Sampling frequency
Compression format
110-220 VAC @50/60 Hz

PAL
4HZ :44 KHz
118 dB
105 dB
0.0025%
+/-0.001%
DVD-video
DVD-recordable
3.5MHz
MPEG
16755-5
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
2.2.5 Matrix Controller:
Matrix switchers used for video and audio routing applications,
including command and control centers at conference room support
multi format output HDTV ,S video and composite video .
Technical Specification:
Video Input / output
Gain
Bandwidth
Crosstalk
Switching speed
Nominal voltage
Impedance
Return loss
Power requirement
16/16
unity
150 MHz
-50dB @ 5HZ
200ns
1Vpp
75ohm
<-30dB
110:220 VAC @ 50/60 HZ
2.2.6 Touch Screen main controller:
Control System shall utilize a Motorola processor at no less

that 257 MIPS.
Control System shall include [3] RS-232/422/485 Ports.
Control System shall include [8] IR/Serial Ports for IR probes.
Control System shall include [8] Isolated Relay Ports
Control System shall include [8] I/O Ports.
Control System shall include [1] Cresnet Port.
Control System shall include a 10/100 Base T Ethernet Port
that supports TCP/IP connection
Control System Processor shall utilize a real time, event
driven, multitasking,
High speed processor shall communicate directly with
Ethernet, control
ports and proprietary control network utilizing high-speed,
parallel bus
Infrastructure .Control processors that communicate via a
serial bus shall not be accepted.
Control processor shall contain 36 MB of memory.
Support internal communications speed via two, independent
Communications busses First control bus speed shall be at
least b/s, second control bus speed shall be at least 300 mb/s.
Full API (Applications Interface) directly to control system via
TCP/IP for
Patent pending Network Analyzer to continuously monitor the
integrity of the Cresnet network for wiring faults, marginal
communication Performance, network errors
Support RS-485 token passing network with data
communication for a minimum distance of 5000 feet.
16755-6
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
Allow proprietary network expansion via Ethernet or RS-232

ports, which can allow for high-speed network acceleration.
Control system shall support object-oriented logic based
programming
Programming types are supported to run simultaneously and
integral to each other.
Control system manufacture shall supply Windows-based
graphical
Programming software for drag and drop object oriented
programming for the control system operation.
Programming software, which is self-documenting in that it
generates a symbolic flow diagram printout from the system
program.
Power requirement 110:220 VAC @ 50/60 HZ
2.2.7 Touch Screen:
Touch panel must have a minimum resolution of 640x480

pixels; lower resolutions shall not be accepted.
Touch panel shall have a 10.4 active matrix LCD display
with 65,536-color palette and 16 bit non-palette graphics.
Passive matrix displays or touch panels with less than a
64,000 color palette, and not supporting 16 bit non-palette
graphics, shall not be accepted.
Touch panel and associated programming tools, by same
manufacturer, shall provide a native/onboard graphic library
supported by a Synapse image rendering algorithm feature,
which shall provide for improved/high-resolution graphics
(such as native anti-aliased 3D buttons, graphics, and text,
with embossed, beveled and fringed features) without the aid
of 3rd Party graphic development software.
Touch panel must support memory of 8MB for flash and 8MB
for DRAM.
Touch panel must support graphic animation on a variety of
object styles.
Touch panel shall have stereo audio input supporting balanced
or unbalanced signal formats. Touch panel shall allow linelevel audio mixing, amplification, and volume control, with
playback through built-in speakers, or through a built-in
headphone jack.
Touch panel shall have built-in microphone with line level
balanced audio output.
Touch panel shall display NTSC/PAL/S-VIDEO video inputs.
Video Input connections shall support balanced or unbalanced
signal formats. Video inputs shall display full screen or in user
defined windows (scaled video).
Touch panel shall be an integrated unit.
16755-7
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
Touch panel shall automatically detect/synch NTSC/PAL

video formats
Touch panel shall display S-VIDEO inputs separated into
luminance and chrominance components.
Touch panel shall have built in Time-Based Correction for
increased stability of video/graphics display.
Touch panel shall have RS-232 Port for touch-coordinate
transmission
2.2.8 LCD Main Display Unit:

LCD 63" technical specification
Screen size
Type
Pixel count
Contrast ratio
Display colors
TV standard support
Video input
RGB mode
Brightness
Computer inputs
Antenna input
External speaker output
Audio inputs
Audio outputs
Power sources
64" diagonal
TFT type
1366 X 768
10,000:1
1.07billion color
PAL
Video X 1,S-terminal X 1,
Components X 2
VGA,WVGA,SVGA,XGA
1000 cd/m2
RGB 15 pin connector
F-type connector
MAX output 10W+10W
RCA terminal
Stereo RCA type analog
110-220Vac@50/60 Hz
2.2.9 Mixer Preamplifier:
Flexible 2 mono & 4 stereo inputs and 1 stereo & 2 mono output.
Each input signal can be assigned to each of 3 outputs.
Stereo output can be divided among two mono output channels.
Depending on level reading, mono input may be selected as either

mic or line.
Built-in limiter circuit prevents damage from overloads.
Selectable internal hi-pass filter (HPF) switch.
Peak indicator prevents signal clipping.
Frequency response
20Hz: 20KHz (+1, -2 dB)
less than 0.01 %

16755-8
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
Noise level MIN stereo output
>-105dB
Noise Level MIN Mono output
> 98dB
Noise Level Max stereo output
< -94dB
Noise level Max Mono output
< 95dB
2.2.10 Power Amplifier:

The power amplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the
following facilities: Rated output power : 2 X 60W
Controls: On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter,
Mains on indicator lamp,
Input sensitivity : <0.77 V
Frequency response : 50: 20000 HZ
Total harmonic distortion : <0.5% at range between 50:20000 HZ
Input protection against overload,
Volume, bass and treble controls,
Balanced floating output of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker
connections,
Flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply
connection,
AC and DC fuse protection,
Standard sockets complete with plugs and locking rings for each
input and terminals for loudspeaker output.
Rack mountable
2.2.11 Equalizer:
14 filters on ISO 2 / 3 octave centre frequencies from

40Hz to 16 kHz.
Continuously variable independent 6dB or 12dB boost
or cut at each channel's centre frequency.
Active band-pass / band-reject summed in parallel filters
with minimum phase shift.
Noiseless centre detent slide controls with precision
calibrated linear scales.
Continuously variable high-pass filters with wide
control range.
EQ In / out switch for manually bypassing equalizer.
Automatic EQ bypass circuitry activates at power loss.
LED peak indicator monitoring of input and output
levels, for proper gain structuring.
16755-9
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
1- Performance
Frequency Response 20Hz to 20kHz (+1.0, -2.0dB)
Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 0.01% at 1kHz, all
sliders at 0 position, rated output
Hum and Noise
-98dB (EQ in, IHF-A, all sliders at
0 position).
2-Input & Output
Input
Output
Input Impedance: 30k (Input level control

set at 0 position)/ Rated Input Level;
+4dB* (Input level control set at 0
position)/ Maximum Input Level; +32dB
(Input level control set at -12dB)
Output Impedance: 1k / Rated Output
Level; +4dB"/ Maximum Output Level;
+20dB*.
3-Power
Power Requirements
Power Consumption
AC mains 220 VAC , 50Hz

13 watts (220-240V version)
2.2.12 IR Audio Conference System:

1- Main control unit
The configuration of the unit shall be facilitated by an easily readable
LED display and status lamps. The display shall be backlit. An easyto-use button and rotary switch panel provides access to the unit.
The unit configuration shall be able to protect using a PIN
Code With proper installation configuration, the unit shall be able to
provide intended functionality without end-user
Assistance The unit shall provide the connection of up to eight High
Frequency Infra-Red transmission units.
The wire-less transmission of audio shall be in full duplex using
analog FM modulation with carrier frequencies in the
2 to6 MHz range Line-level audio in- and outputs shall be provided for
the transmission of audio to external equipment and the reception of
audio from external equipment. Balanced audio in- and outputs are to
be facilitated using industry standard XLR connectors. Unbalanced
audio in- and outputs are to be facilitated using industry standard 1/4
Tele connectors.
16755-10
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
An Insert connector shall be provided for external audio processing of
the delegate microphone signal.
The unit is to be powered by a safe, low level, direct current voltage
using an external power converter with input range (220-240VAC).
System power shall be operated using a single switch on the unit front
panel.
Unit functionality should be easily fielded upgradeable via firmware
updates. The unit shall provide an activation time of microphones to be
less than 1 second (Delegate Unit dependent), support up to three
simultaneously active microphones, and provide an automatic first-infirst-out speaker list in the situation of no available speaking channels,
and provide chairman override functionality.
By means of a built-in RS-232 serial port, the system shall be able to
be remote controlled in all major aspects of the system functionality.
Audio feedback reduction functionality shall be built-in.
The unit case shall be of steel, black color and suitable for
Standard 19 rack mounting
2- IR Transceiver unit
Transceiver Unit is an Infra- Red light transmitter and receiver unit.
Designed for ceiling flush mounting it acts like an Infra-Red antenna,
receiving the signals sent from the Delegate Units and transmitting the
signals to the Delegate Units.
The unit is intended for vertical transmission and reception of InfraRed light with an 875nm wavelength. Emission power shall be of
harmless nature.
The unit shall transmit two channels and have a broadband Receiver
for analog, FM modulated signals in the 2 - 6MHz
Carrier frequency range
The unit shall be connected to the system using industry
Standard CAT 6, S-STP grade network cables.
3- IR Delegate/Chairman Units
The Delegate/ Chairman Unit are to comply with all relevant CE
regulations.
Chairman unit shall be have priority function to release all delegate
units when it activated
16755-11
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
The unit is to be designed for independent use by a single person and
shall be able to transmit and receive audio in full duplex.
It shall have a built-in speaker and a 3.5mm stereo min tele- connector
for optional headphones use. The volume levels should be
independently pre-settable for speaker- and headphones and the
speaker audio should be automatically shut off when a headphone is
used.
The unit should be fully Wireless using harmless, eavesdrop safe,
infra-red light as transmission media. Infra-red light is to be
transmitted vertically relative to operator's position. Audio and data is
to be transmitted using analog
Frequency Modulation and use carrier frequencies in the range 2 to
6MHz and use infra-red light with 875nm wavelength
The unit power source shall be a rechargeable, maintenance free
battery of industry standard type and be able to be replaced by the end
user. The operating time of a fully charged battery shall be minimum
20 hours of listen only and 8 hours of effective speaking time. The recharging time of a fully discharged battery shall be no longer than 14
hours. A low battery indication shall be included using an LED lamp
indicator. The unit should power down automatically 2 minutes after
the loss of the main audio carrier.
Unit functionality should be easily upgradeable via wireless firmware
updates. Operation of the unit shall consist of a clearly organized
buttons operator panel with many LED lamps showing power status,
microphone activity. A volume knob should be easily accessible for
speaker and headphones level setting. The microphone shall contain an
LED lamp for activity indication.
The activation time of the microphone should be less than 1 second
using a single button press. In the situation of no available speaking
channels, the unit should clearly indicate that it has been placed in a
speaker queue using an LED lamp status indicator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which the network shall be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable
manner.
16755-12
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
3.2
Install electrical identification in accordance with requirements of Section 16050

"Electrical Materials and Methods"
3.3
INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEM
Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work of the Contract shall be
closely coordinated with the appropriate trade.
Equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance to this
authorized local representative to:
-
Coordinate the selection of system equipment.

Supervise the installation of the audio visual equipment.
Perform a complete functional test of the networks.
Submit a written report attesting the proper operation of the
completed networks.
Install the network as indicated on Drawings, in accordance with equipment

manufacturers written instructions and complying with referenced standards of
installation.
Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturers requirements. Color code wiring
and install per manufacturers point-to-point wiring diagram. Determine exact number
of wires for each device installed. Connect each device with sufficient wiring to
complete its intended operation.
Where there are number of power requiring devices, provide extra or larger size wiring
to alleviate voltage drops which makes device operate beyond voltage limits for which
it was designed. Determine above with manufacturers representative while equipment
is being installed.
Submit a signed copy of test results in duplicate to the Engineer.
Wall mounted equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer
recommendations.
3.4
Connection and Supervision: Make connections to equipment panel under

manufacturer's supervision.
System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for function and operation only,
pre-approved by the Engineer.
16755-13
SECTION 16755
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________________
Prior to final acceptance of the system, manufacturer of system shall, in presence of the
Contractor, Employer's representative and Engineer's representative, test each extension
device.
3.5
TRAINING
Equipments manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall provide, in depth,
equipment service and programming on site training to selected Employers personnel for
one week.
3.6
WARRANTY
The system shall have a 2-year manufacturers warranty against product defects. This
warranty shall be for material only. Installation and labor shall be warranted for a period
of 1 year or as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Manufactures that do not
provide a standard 2-year warranty, must provide an extended warranty with their bid
package.
END OF SECTION
16755-14
SECTION
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
_____________________________________________________________________
PART
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including

General Conditions, Conditions of Particular Application and
Division Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
Bill of quantities
Related section
. All section related to Public address system with fire alarm
system
. Grounding
. Basic materials and methods
. Cable trays
. Wires and cables
SCOPE OF WORK
Start up system
specification
documents
Integrate with fire alarm system
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
All areas are used for sound shall have loudspeakers.
Locations of speakers shall be at positions, which make them cover the
intended fields of hearing.
System will be used as evacuation system in case of emergency to
activate digital recording massage to the specified fire alarm zones and
has priority function to override any music sources
-1
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
There are call stations at receptions and information
number of zones to be used for paging
with appropriate
Equivalent digital system with main and sub controllers can be used to
achieve higher level of sound intelligibility and quality.
EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIALS

Matrix Controller
Power Amplifier
Double auto reverse cassette unit
Multi CD player ( cartridge)
AM/FM tuner
Digital pre-recording massage
Ceiling Loudspeaker
Emergency Power Supply
Equipments cabinet and rack
Cables and accessories
National Life Safety Codes
Electronic Industries/Telecommunications Industries
Associations (EIA/TIA) RS
(Sound System)
SE
A
(amplifier for sound equipment) SE
(Speaker for sound equipment)
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
National Fire Protection Association
NFPA
National Electric Codes
NFPA
National Fire Alarm Codes
NFPA
Life Safety Code
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract.
General: Submit complete sets of documentation as stated by the
contract conditions indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number,
manufacturers' names, photographs and catalogue data sheets for all items
to ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered
without this approval for all equipment and devices
1.6.2
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment and device

locations and connecting wiring of entire public system, including riser
-2
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
diagrams. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment and the size, type
and number of all conductors including signal strengths and cable loss
-
Provide calculations to support the loss in cables and signal strengths

of the different equipment, the size of wiring and signal loss
Provide installation instructions and installation manuals
Complete description and data including UL listing, or equivalent, for

all system components
Complete sequence of operations and functions of the system

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including
specifications and installations for each type of equipment. Include
standard or typical riser and wiring diagrams, operation and maintenance
instructions as inclusion of the maintenance manual.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type
of equipment installed, including furnished specialties and accessories.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual in
accordance with requirements of Division
and other relevant
documentation
Calculations:
. Backup battery calculation.
. SPL at typical locations. Include worst case locations. Coordinate
with the Engineer
. Amplifiers: power rates calculations
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.7.1
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the sound shall be

regularly engaged in manufacturing of system of type, size and
characteristics similar to those required for the project and whose products
have been in satisfactory service in similar projects for not less than five (5)
years.
1.7.2
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a factoryauthorized sales and service representative to perform the work of this
section.
installation experience of systems similar to that required for the project.
-3
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
COORDINATION
1. Contractor shall be responsible for any coordination with various
system under this contract such as fire alarm system
2. Coordinate layout and installation of system components and
suspension system with other construction that penetrate ceiling or
is supported by them , including light fixture , HVAC equipments,
partition assemblies, fire alarm equipments
PART
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
System Functions: System shall be used for broadcasting background
music and fire alarm notification signals as well as voice
evacuation messages
System shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Selectively connecting separate zones to different signal source. .

Sound sources shall be routed and amplified through amplifiers,
etc., as shown on the drawings.
Producing a program-signal tone that is amplified and sounded
over all speakers, overriding signals currently being distributed.
Pre-recorded messages via the permanent digital record system
are to be automatically switched in, and are to have automatic
priority over the external source introduced previously.
Reproducing high-quality sound from source that is free of noise
and distortion at all loudspeakers at all times during equipment
operation including standby mode with inputs off; and output
free of non uniform coverage of amplified sound.
By using the microphone, operator is to have priority over audio
or message cassette inputs within the system.
Standby amplifiers takeover.
Expansion Capability: Increase number of loudspeakers in the
future by 25 percent above those indicated without adding any
internal or external components or main cable conductors.
DESIGN PARAMETERS
System is to be designed for background music and voice evacuation,
with uniform and acceptable level of speech intelligibility. Design
shown on the Drawings is based on system design criteria below, which
are to be checked for performance before implementation. Alternative
system design is to be submitted to the Engineer for approval, with
specification, characteristics, aiming and mounting positions of
-4
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
loudspeakers and full particulars of calculations and equipment
selections. System design is to be based on the following criteria:
1. Average sound pressure level: 80 to 85 dB with respective
amplifiers set at 50% of maximum volume.
2. Intelligibility STI: better than 0.5.
3. Sound diffusion level: 10 to 15 dB (A) above ambient noise level.
4. Total harmonic distortion.
a. electronic: less than 1% at specified output level
b. acoustic: less than 3% at specified output level
5. Sound pressure level: 80 to 90 dB A.
6. Frequency response: +/-3 dB over 300 Hz to 10 kHz.
7. Uniformity of coverage: +/- 3 dB (0.5, 1, 2 and 4 kHz).
2.2.1
Matrix controller
Main matrix controller shall be modular type with facility to expansion
and modified by modular cards for zones and input sources, matrix
capacity shall be adequate to project requirements. The matrix built in
DSP (digital signal processing) with parametric equalizer with
following specification:
Input Voltage : 110-220V@50/60HZ
Audio Input : shall be adequate to project
Requirements
Module Slot : analog input /digital input / mix output /digital
output
Frequency Response : 20:20000 HZ
Total Harmonic Distortion : 0.008%
S/N ratio
:90dB
Crosstalk
:over 64dB
Control input/output : RS-232C-control input - control output
Control input not less than 4 dry inputs
Control relay output not less than 4
Remote volume control
2.2.2
Power Amplifier
The power amplifier shall be fully solid-state and provided with the
following facilities : Controls: On/off, input levels, and low-cut filter,
Output power: more than speakers power rating sum by at least
25%
Input sensitivity : <0.77 V
-5
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Total harmonic distortion : <0.5% at range between 50:20000
HZ
Input protection against overload,
Volume, bass and treble controls,
Balanced floating output of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker
connections,
Flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains supply
connection,
input and terminals for loudspeaker output.
Rack mountable
2.2.3
CD Player
CD player Type: rack mounted, high quality, capable of operating
continuously and having the following functions:
1. direct access to the disks
2. Track programming capability.
CD player Programming: it should be possible to program the CD
player to select from any CD at any order for continuous play
Frequency response
20:20000 HZ
0.003%
106dB
Dynamic range
96dB
5 cartridge at least
2.2.4
Radio Tuner AM/FM

Radio Tuner AM/FM: rack mounted high quality, shall be of the latest
design and have digital frequency display, 10 memories minimum and
auto scanning. The tuner shall be of the stereophonic type.
Frequency response
FM 87: 110MHZ
AM 540:1600 KHZ
Sensitivity
FM 2 uV AM 4.5 uV
Noise level
FM 60dB AM 45dB
2.2.5
Double Auto Reverse Cassette :

Rack mounted high quality, auto-reverse/auto-stop, 4-track,
mono/stereo type with speed tolerance of 10%, complying with IEC
94 or other approved standard and accepting standard cassettes
through front panel selector switch.
-6
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Recorder Heads And Motors: recorder is to have separate heads for
play, record and erase functions, three motors (two for fast winding in
two directions and third for record/playback at two speeds), and noise
reduction system.
CONTROLS: recorder is to have fast wind and re-wind, playback,
record and stop controls, two illuminated peak level indicators, pause
control, resettable digital counter, level controls for recording and
play-back, on-off switch, microphone/headphone sockets and radio
sockets and radio and line inputs.
Minimum requirements Characteristics are to be as follows:
Signal/tape noise ratio at highest speed
65 dB
Crosstalk attenuation at 100 Hz
better than 50 dB in stereo
Better than 65 dB in mono
distortion (max.)from recording amplifier: 0.2%
frequency response :
20 : 20000 HZ
2.2.6
Digital pre-recording Massage Module

Digital massage recorder can store massage not less than 4 messages
stored in the internal EEPROM, without the need for data retention
battery backup. Each message can have any length within the total
available capacity. A PC uploads messages and configurations via RS232 to the unit, which can then operate without a PC. The standard
WAV-format is used for messages
The unit has 12 contact closure trigger inputs for announcements.
Each can be configured for a sequence of up to four messages from
those available. In this way messages can be used in combination with
other messages, optimizing flexibility and storage space usage.
In case of fire the FACP send fire signal from output relay module to
activate the digital recording massage to evacuate the stored massages
to all zones and return feedback signal indicate status of system
2.2.7
Ceiling Loudspeaker
Ceiling loudspeaker comprise a 100 V line matching transformer, high
quality loudspeaker, metal front grille and mounting plate with locking
clamps.
power rating
frequency response
sound pressure level at 6w
rated voltage
6/3/1.5 watts
80 Hz to 20 kHz
90dB
100V
-7
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
maximum insertion loss
<0.5dB
-8
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
2.2.8
EQUIPMENT RACK
A. Equipment Rack: House amplifiers and auxiliary equipment in
standard 19-inch racks.
1. Group items of same function together, either vertically or side by
side, and arrange controls symmetrically.
2. Power-Supply Connections: Approved plugs and receptacles.
3. Arrange all inputs, outputs, interconnections, and test points so they
are accessible at rear of rack for maintenance and testing, with
each item removable from rack without disturbing other items or
connections.
4. Blank Panels: Cover empty space in equipment racks so entire front
of rack is occupied by panels.
5. Enclosure Panels: Ventilated rear and sides and solid top. Use
louvers in panels to ensure adequate ventilation.
6. Finish: Uniform, baked-enamel factory finish over rust-inhibiting
primer.
7. Power-Control Panel: On front of equipment housing, with master
power on/off switch and pilot light; and with socket for 5-A
cartridge fuse for rack equipment power.
8. Service Light: At top rear of rack with an adjacent control switch.
9. Vertical Plug Strip: Grounded receptacles, 300 mm o.c. the full
height of rack, to supply rack-mounted equipment.
10. Maintenance Receptacles: Duplex convenience outlets supplied
independent of vertical plug strip and located in front and bottom
rear of rack.
2.2.9
Mixer Power Amplifier (at sub sound system rack at restaurant,

cafeterias, training center ,club and housing departments )
The mixer power amplifier shall be fully solid-state, and provided with
balanced floating outputs of 70 V and 100 V for loudspeaker
connections.
As a minimum requirement, the mixer-power amplifier shall be
provided with the following facilities: Power on/off switch,
Rated output 180 W
Microphone input sensitivity :<0.5mV/output impedance
200:600 ohm
High level input sensitivity : <400mV
Total harmonic distortion : < 2 % at range between 50:20000 HZ
Independent mixing volume control for each input,
Master volume, bass and treble tone controls,
-9
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Three-core flexible cord and correctly fused plug for mains
supply and earth connection,
input and terminals for loudspeaker output
2.2.10
Cables and accessories

Sound cables shall be shielded type and fire resistance to
consider public address system as life safety systems with all
needed accessories, connectors and junction boxes
PART
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which public address System shall be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except within consoles,
desks, and counters. Conceal cables and raceways except in
unfinished spaces.
B. Equipment installations and cabling shall be complying with fire
codes.
C. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or
exposed structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure
and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings so
designed and installed to avoid damage to cables. Secure cable at
intervals not exceeding
mm and not more than
mm from
cabinets, boxes, or fittings.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
E. Control-Circuit Wiring: Install number and size of conductors as
recommended by system manufacturer for control functions
indicated.
F. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level,
speaker-level, and power wiring runs. Install in separate
raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate
conductors at least
mm for speaker microphones and adjacent
-10
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
parallel power and telephone wiring. Separate other
intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by
equipment manufacturer.
G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal
strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and
equipment enclosures.
H. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal
interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.
I. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and
apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables
so they identify media in coordination with system wiring
diagrams.
J. Wall-Mounting Outlets: Flush mounted.
K. Floor-Mounting Outlets: Conceal in floor and install cable nozzles
through outlet covers. Secure outlet covers in place. Trim with
carpet in carpeted areas.
L. Conductor Sizing: Unless otherwise indicated, size speaker circuit
conductors from racks to loudspeaker outlets not smaller than
No.
AWG and conductors from microphone receptacles to
amplifiers not smaller than No. AWG.
M. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in
damp locations, or where exposed to weather, install consistent
with requirements of weatherproof rating.
N. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial
connections using tap settings indicated on Drawings.
GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and
to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup,
cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate
from power system and equipment grounding.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-trained and authorized
service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled
components and equipment installation, including connections,
and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
-11
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test
reports:
. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test
performance.
. After installing public address and music equipment and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements.
. Operational Test: Perform tests that include originating program
and page messages at microphone outlets, preamplifier program
inputs, and other inputs. Verify proper routing and volume levels
and that system is free of noise and distortion.
. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Test: Measure signal-to-noise ratio of
complete system at normal gain settings as follows:
a. Disconnect microphone at connector or jack closest to it and
replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a
-Hz
signal. Replace all other microphones at corresponding
connectors with dummy loads, each equal in impedance to
microphone it replaces. Measure signal-to-noise ratio.
b. Repeat test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.
c. Minimum acceptance ratio is dB.
. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and
rated power. Feed signals at frequencies of
,
,
,
and
Hz into each preamplifier channel. For each frequency,
measure distortion in the paging and all-call amplifier outputs.
Maximum acceptable distortion at any frequency is percent
total harmonics.
. Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into system using octaves
centered at
and
Hz. Use sound-level meter with octaveband filters to measure level at five locations in each zone. For
spaces with seated audiences, maximum permissible variation in
level is plus or minus
dB. In addition, the levels between
locations in the same zone and between locations in adjacent
zones must not vary more than plus or minus dB.
. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each
power amplifier at normal gain settings of ,
, and
Hz.
Maximum variation in power output at these frequencies must
not exceed plus or minus d
. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at pubic
address equipment signal ground. Comply with testing
-12
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
requirements specified in Division
Bonding."
Section "Grounding and
-13
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
TRAINING
Equipments manufacturer and his authorized, local representative shall
provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site training to
selected Employers personnel for two weeks.
WARRANTY
The system shall have a -year manufacturers warranty against product
defects. This warranty shall be for material only. Installation and labor
shall be warranted for a period of year or as indicated elsewhere in this
specification. Manufactures that do not provide a standard -year
warranty, must provide an extended warranty with their bid package.
END OF SECTION
-14
SECTION
IP CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
PART
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract,

including General Conditions, Conditions of Particular
Application and Division Specification Sections, apply
Bill of quantities
Related section
. All section related to CCTV with other
system(Voice and data system , fire alarm system ,
Access control)
. Earthing System
section
section
. Cable trays
section
. Wires and cables
section
SCOPE OF WORK
Supply system equipments according to approved list of
materials
Handle and store equipment in appropriate environment
condition
Start up system
specification
Test and commission all system according to related
specification documents
Integrate all other system with CCTV system
Provide necessary documents and final shop drawing for
obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction
.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The CCTV System shall be part of Security System to monitor
entrances, exists, lobbies and parking areas.
-1
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
The system controls and Monitors shall be located at security
room and to be interfaced with fire alarm system, access control.
The configuration and operation computer shall be used with
video management software.
CCTV will cover main building and shall have number of NVR's
(Network Video Recorder) each can record at least
G and
shall communicate Via LAN.
The contractor is required to perform band-width calculation
with framing requirements to assure enough storage capacity for
all the camera.
All areas are used for security surveillance shall have IP color
video cameras, as indicated on the drawings:
Locations of video cameras shall be at positions, which make
them cover the intended fields of vision.
System will be IP Based network so all devices shall contain
RJ
interface and working with TCP/IP protocol
Contractor is required to perform bandwidth calculations and
allocation to assure covering all system requirements without
congestion.
INTERFACES
The IP Surveillance System shall be integrated and interfaced to
the following systems:
. Security and Access Control System: The interface with
the Access Control System shall allow the control and the
local surveillance of entrances, gates. etc. Any breaking
or violation of access provided with an IP camera will
automatically pop up a window on the operators screen
. Fire Alarm System: The interface with the Fire Alarm
System shall allow the local surveillance of each fire alarm
zone. The system shall be able to display images as pop up
window from the zone in alarm on the screen of the
System operator. The interface shall be compliant with
NFPA requirements. The PTZ cameras shall automatically
switch to the location of a fire alarm initiation.
. Building Management System: The interface with the
Building Management System shall provide the following
information:
-2
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
a. Main System ON,
b. Main System OFF,
c. Main System in Default.
. Structured Cabling Network: The system shall be
interfaced with the Structured Cabling Network to allow
the communication between the Security and Access
Control System, work stations, recording and storage
servers, Network Management System, and all other
interfaced systems through the network backbone
Equipments and Materials
Indoor IP fixed color cameras
Outdoor IP fixed color cameras
. IP P/T/Z ceiling mounted dome color cameras
. CCTV server with Digital Video management system with GUI
(Graphic User Interface) with workstation
. Network Video Recorder
. LCD &
. Network including conduit cabling, pull boxes and all necessary
accessories.

Standards to be used is the IEC or other equal and approved codes,
taking into account that network cables with fitted accessories and
connector and wiring have to be of fire rated type in accordance with all
NFPA requirements codes (NFPA and extensions).
. Comply with the latest issue of several material and test standards,
which have been developed and published by Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE) for data communications industry, but not
limited to:
a.
Network Management Group,
b.
Optic Fiber Technical Advisory Group,
c.
Integrated Voice and Data LAN Working
Group,
d.
LAN Security Working Group,
-3
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
1.4.3 Electrical Component Standard: Provide work
complying with applicable requirements of NFPA 70
"National Electrical Code"
1.4.4 CCIR Compliance: Comply with the relevant CCIR
standards or approved equal
1.4.5 UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL
50 and UL 486A or other equivalent standards
1.4.6 IEC Compliance: Comply with applicable
requirement standards pertaining to system and wiring
SUBMITTALS
1.5.1

indicating type, size, rating, style, catalog number, manufacturers'
ensure compliance with Specifications. This documentation shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer and no equipment shall be
ordered without his approval for all equipment and devices, which
are shown on Drawings, Schedules and in Bill of Quantities.
1.5.2
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment

and device locations and connecting wiring of entire CCTV
system, including riser diagrams. Shop drawings shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
-
Complete one-line riser diagram(s) showing all equipment

and the size, type and number of all conductors including
signal strengths and cable loss
Pin to pin connection diagram
Provide calculations to support the loss in cables and

signal strengths of the different equipment, the size of
wiring and signal loss
Provide installation instructions and installation manuals
Complete description and data including UL listing, or

equivalent, for all system components
Complete sequence of operations and functions of the

system
Complete system-wiring diagrams for components and

-4
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
A listing of the manufacturer's authorized, local
representative responsible for installation coordination and
service
1.5.3

including specifications and installations for each type of CCTV
equipment.
Include standard or typical riser and wiring
diagrams, operation and maintenance instructions for inclusion in
the maintenance manual.
1.5.4

each type of CCTV equipment installed, including furnished
specialties and accessories. Include this data, product data, and shop
drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of
Division-1 and other relevant documentation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.6.1
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of the CCTV

shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing of CCTV system of
projects for not less than five (5) years.
1.6.2
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a

factory-authorized sales and service representative to perform the
work of this section.
installation experience of CCTV systems similar to that required
for the project.
1.7
COORDINATION
1. Contractor shall be responsible for any coordination with
various system under this contract
2. all interface protocols and required hardware and
software needed to submit and satisfy system operation
shall be part of this contact
SPARE PARTS
The system shall have the following spare parts for each building:
-5
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
- No.2%of fixed IP color cameras c/w lens and power
supply
- No.2% of IP P/T/Z ceiling mounted dome color cameras
PART
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
The closed circuit television system CCTV shall be used for
security and operational surveillance using IP color video
cameras.
The CCTV system shall display live color video pictures for
security and operation surveillance in areas indicated in drawings
The CCTV systems shall allow for future extension in number of
cameras and monitors.
Each
cameras shall be displayed on monitor according to
conditional events such as motion detection or alarms .etc
monitoring so as to have all cameras monitored by events .
The operator also may record scenes from any camera by related
IP NVR for periods up to
hours per day for days, and shall
retrieve recordings of any past time using time search technique.
It is also possible to select specific camera at specific time to be
displayed on the close monitoring screen.
All cameras shall be equipped with back light compensation
(BLC), automatic bright light limiter and light intensity control
(CCD auto-iris lens), adjustable motion detection.
All fixed cameras shall be supplied through special power supply
adapter or via POE (power over Ethernet).
-6
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
Sensitivity of cameras shall fit for clear reproduction of pictures
in maximum and minimum light intensity conditions of each
location.
Lens shall be selected to provide the required field of vision
according to location as indicated on the Drawings.
The Contractor is responsible for selecting the fixing location for
best results.
Monitoring stations of the system shall be supplied from the
project secured source to ensure uninterrupted operation in case
of supply failure.

Indoor IP fixed color Cameras:
Color CCTV cameras for indoor use, low voltage AC operated
and supplied through special power supply, equipped for CS lens
mount
The cameras shall have the following minimum characteristics
. image sensor
" progressive scan RGB CCD
.
.
.
.
.
angle of view
lenses
minimum illumination
video compression
resolution
. frame rate
. shutter time
. Image Buffer
. IP Address
. alarm and events
. network connector
. alarm connector
. power input
horizontal
vari-focal lens auto iris
LUX at F
MPEG
variable from
x
to
mm
frame /s
sec to
sec
MB
static IP Address as provided by DHCP
event triggered by built in motion
Detection
RJ
for Ethernet
BaseT/ BaseTX
terminal block for alarm input
VDC
2.3 .2 Outdoor IP fixed color Cameras:
-7
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
Outdoor fixed camera shall be as indoor fixed camera but shall be
housed in outdoor weatherproof housing
The cameras housing shall provide full protection for
environmental conditions (dust, sun, rain, temperature, etc.) and
shall include sun hood, automatic fan and shall house all attached
accessories of the cameras including the lens.
Housing shall not cause any loss in quality or sensitivity of
pictures
Color CCTV cameras for outdoor use, low voltage AC operated
and supplied through special power supply, equipped for CS lens
The cameras shall have the following minimum characteristics
. image sensor
. angle of view
. lenses

o
horizontal
vari-focal lens auto iris
mm
.
.
.
.
.
.
LUX at F
MPEG
variable from
x
to
x
frame /s
sec to
sec
Detection
RJ
for Ethernet
BaseT/ BaseTX
MB
VDC
minimum illumination
video compression
resolution
frame rate
shutter time
alarm and events
. network connector
.
.
.
.
alarm connector
Image Buffer
IP Address
power input
. Indoor Movable IP color Camera (PTZ):

Movable camera shall be integrated Dome camera have the
following features:
. image sensor
. lenses
. minimum illumination
. video compression

x zoom auto focus mm :
mm
LUX at F
MPEG
-8
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
. resolution
CIF/ CIF / CIF/QCIF
. frame rate
frame /s
. Pan
. Tilt
. Zoom
. shutter time
. Image Buffer
. IP Address
. alarm and events
. network connector
. alarm connector
. power
+/-
o.
max speed
o
: o max speed
Optical X : Digital
sec
/sec
/sec
X total (
X)
MB
Detection
RJ
for Ethernet
BaseT/ BaseTX
VDC
W
. . NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND GUI (Graphic user Interface)

The network management system shall be full-featured video management
system allowing users to view and control each camera in the system from
different NVR within the network.
The system shall include built-in video loss detection and system
diagnostic features. Video loss detection alerts operators of a camera
failure. Diagnostic monitoring assists in set-up, programming, and
troubleshooting.
Software shall allow for the activation of specific applications such as
incremental switching mode (cyclic) and connection of alarms, eventactuated sub-routines, and for preventing or permitting various outputs.
The system shall be equipped with suitable and efficient backup
mechanisms including backup management for archiving and restoring
information.
The system shall provide a Graphical User Interface (GUI) that shall
satisfy the following requirements:
1. A user-friendly operator interface for monitoring and controlling the
system through a Windows environment through the use of a computer
mouse.
2. Multiple, linked graphical maps including site and building floor plans.
Icons placed on graphical backgrounds shall be used to select, control,
and monitor each camera in the IP Surveillance System.
-9
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
3. Simple and logical navigation between graphical maps.
4. A master graphic to direct operators to more detailed graphics. The
GUI shall allow the operator to select the master graphic from any other
graphic. Each map shall include camera and monitor icons located within
the graphic area, and shall include icons to allow the operator to navigate
between other areas near the current map.
5. Import of graphics generated by other drawing programs. Include a
conversion program with the system to convert DXF files from CAD
programs into the format used by the system.
6. Graphical map with high quality showing floor details including all
partitions, doors and other major built-in structures.
7. Overview of all incoming alarms, including filtering possibilities and
control of multiple users handling the same alarm.
The system shall provide multi-level password protection and logging
facilities that:
1. Grant and/or deny rights to individual users or groups of users.
2. Restrict the ability to modify the system configuration.
3. Restrict access to video from specified cameras.
4. Restrict access to alarm events.
5. Restrict access to troubleshooting tools such as remote control

functions.
The system shall allow playback and recording of cameras simultaneously.
The system shall allow simultaneous audio recording and playback.
The system shall allow playback with high speed date/time searching, skip
searching, index searching, alarm list searching, and multi-screen option.
The system shall allow playback digital zooming it shall allow the
operator to zoom into a selected area of the image during playback and
video authentication.
The software shall have the flexibility to be programmable for any
recording or playback sequence.
The system shall provide remote P/T/Z camera control through web
server.
-10
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
The system shall be capable to notify users about its status and alarms by
sending e-mails to a predefined address using SMTP.
The system shall allow for recording of up to 25 frames per seconds when
connected to PAL cameras.
The software shall provide the ability to limit storage of recorded video
by automatically deleting recorded contents when the information reaches
a pre-defined duration or date. The setting of these parameters shall be
available on a per camera base, allowing for different settings for each
camera.
To secure recorded video from being lost, the system shall allow an
authorized user to manually lock recorded material from being erased or
overwritten.
Recording shall be done using standard motion JPEG format without any
modification of the pictures.
The system shall allow a recording quality: JPEG up to 1280 x 1024
pixels, other PAL resolutions include 320 x 240, 352 x 288, 640 x 480
or 704 x 506 depending on the Network Video Recorder.
The system shall allow the export of video recordings in JPEG or AVI
format and any other standard base format to the approval of the
Employer Representatives.
The system shall provide an ability to export single video pictures to JPG
files as well as video sequences to AVI files.
The system shall allow search on time, date or activity/alarm with instant
playback in real time with audio.
The system shall provide the ability to send operational and technical
information using a standard SMTP mail server. To ensure availability, a
minimum of two different mail servers must be definable.
To avoid improper use and configuring, the system shall provide the
ability to define users and passwords for a minimum of three different
types of users.
To ensure availability of video related to an alarm, the system shall
provide a freely selectable pre and post-alarm recording. The duration of
the pre-alarm time shall not be limited.
The system shall provide the ability to link events to selected time only,
i.e. during out-of-office hours.
The system shall be able to select cameras to be recorded including date
& time, title, update rate (real time and/or time lapse).
-11
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
Protocols supported, as a minimum: TCP/IP, HTTP and BOOTP.
2.3.4 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER
2.3.4.1- The network video recorder with Internet Protocol (IP) design
shall be a microprocessor-based video processor
2.3.4.2- the network video recorder records video and audio data streams
received over Ethernet networks using the TCP/IP protocol
2.3.4.3- all data of camera received can be storage in internal hard disk or
external hard disk
2.3.4.4- full integration with video management system
2.3.4.5-The unit shall provide operator-definable live filters to record and
trigger alarm events when the light level changes, motion are detected,
The unit shall provide operator-definable filters to search the image
database for light changes, motion, as well as camera, date/time and filter
settings, then display a list of matching video segments.
-The unit shall provide for simultaneous recording, playback, transmitting,
database searching and archiving. Channel of audio and text inputs shall
be supported with required hardware properly installed and set up
according to the manufacturers instructions.
The network video recorder system must meet the following operating
requirements
. Video recording
MPEG /MPEG
. recording frame rate
at least frames /sec per
Camera
. Internal Storage
at least
GB
. extended storage
extension hard disk
. Image Quality
Super, Normal, Extended Record
. Resolution
CIF/ CIF/ CIF
. Video stream
at least
Mbs
. Video format
PAL /NTSC
LCD
" & technical specification

Screen size
" & diagonal
Type
TFT type
Pixel count
X
Contrast ratio
Display colors
TV standard support
billion color
PAL
-12
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
Video input
Video X ,S-terminal X ,
Components X
RGB mode
VGA,WVGA,SVGA,XGA
Brightness
cd/m
Computer inputs
RGB pin connector
Antenna input
F-type connector
External speaker output
MAX output W W
Audio inputs
RCA terminal
Audio outputs
Stereo RCA type analog
Power sources
Vac@
Hz
PART
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
the performance of the CCTV system work.
corrected.
INSTALLATION
General:
. Acceptance of works will be restricted to the
equipment and installations complying with the
approved submittals, approved shop drawings, and the
Employer site Engineer agreement.
. The Contractor has to carry out any site works under
direct supervision of qualified technicians who are to be
well trained with qualified Manufacturer experience.
. Site workmanship of any network component has to
be limited to the layout and fixation, and inter-wiring of
various items of the ready made equipment.
Examination
-13
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check
raceways, cable trays, and other elements for
compliance with space allocations, installation
tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other
conditions affecting installation. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
Wiring Methods:
Install wiring in raceway/conduit except within
consoles, desks and counters, and except in accessible
ceiling plenums where cable-wiring method may be used
Cables used in environmental air space shall be listed for
this use. Conceal cables in accessible ceilings, walls and
floors wherever possible.
GROUNDING:
Grounding Considerations
General
Grounding systems are normally an integral part of the
specific signal or communications cabling system that
they protect. In addition to helping protect personnel
and equipment from hazardous voltages, a proper
grounding system may reduce EMI to inform the
communications cabling system. Improper grounding
can produce induced voltages and those voltages can
disrupt other communications circuits.
Requirements of the EIA/TIA
shall be followed.
3.3.1.2 Considerations
a. Ensure that the installation conforms to proper practices and
requirements.
b. Ensure that each cabinet and rack has an appropriate grounding
bus bar that is connected to the dedicated building ground by a
mm ground wire.
c. Ensure that grounding is available for all system equipment and
components and equipment required for maintenance and testing.
d. Ensure that all metal cable trays shall be bonded to ground. Cable
tray shall not be used for a ground path.
-14
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
.
Manufacturers' Field Services: Provide services of factoryauthorized service representatives to supervise the field assembly
and connection of components and system presetting, testing,
and adjustment.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled
and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
Presetting: Align and
components, wiring, and
specified requirements.
items with new items.
adjust the system and pretest all

functions to verify they conform to
Replace malfunctioning or damaged
Retest until achieving satisfactory
Operational Acceptance Tests: Perform operational system

tests to verify it conforms to specifications. Include all modes of
CCTV Camera Location Test:
Support each camera
temporarily at the location indicated and connect to monitor.
Adjust camera location and mounting and substitute fixed lens as
approved to provide required performance at monitor. Adjust
within feet ( m) of those indicated with no change in contract
cost.
Record results of tests.
Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations
and retest until specified requirements are met.
CLEANING
Clean all system components including camera housing windows,
lens, and monitor screens. Use methods and materials
ADJUSTMENT
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within year of
date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in
adjusting the system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide
up till requested adjustment periods at the site for this purpose
without additional cost.
-15
SECTION

SYSTEM (IP CCTV)
_______________________________________________________________________
.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Shall include the necessary test equipment, on his expense
require for voltage, signal strength video transmission and
reception monitor, bar pattern generator etc.
.
TRAINING
Equipments manufacturer and his authorized, local representative
shall provide, in depth, equipment service and programming on site
training to selected Employers personnel for two weeks.
WARRANTY
The FACP shall have a -year manufacturers warranty against
product defects. This warranty shall be for material only.
Installation and labor shall be warranted for a period of year or
as indicated elsewhere in this specification. Manufactures that do
not provide a standard -year warranty, must provide an
extended warranty with their bid package.
END OF SECTION
-16
SECTION
INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
IP TV (Internet Protocol Television) is a system where a digital television
service is delivered via Internet Protocol over a network infrastructure,
which includes delivery by a broadband connection.
IP TV system includes unicasting/multicasting system of pay
satellite channels, video on demand, music on demand, video
clips, advertising center and supporting services.
1.3
All works including Equipment, workmanship and

installations shall be performed in strict accordance with the
drawings, specifications and latest stipulations of:
- Egyptian Electrical Standard
- EIA/TIA 568 B Performance specification for 4- pair
100 ohm category 6 cabling.
- EIA/TIA
569
Commercial
telecommunications pathways and spaces.
building
- EIA/TIA 606 Administration standard for the

telecommunication infra-structure of commercial
buildings.
- EIA/TIA 607 Commercial building grounding and
bonding requirements for telecommunication.
- EIA/TIA-TSB72 Centralized Optical fiber cabling
guidelines.
- EIA/TIA TSB75 Additional
practices for open offices
horizontal
cabling
- EIA/TIA-526 Fiber optic system

- The relevant Egyptian Building Codes
- Egyptian safety Standard
- All System components should pass the tests as
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
mentioned in the standards.
- Certificate of these testes should be submitted.
The engineer may accept other equivalent international
standards according to a written instruction.
1.4
Submittals
Contract and Division-1 Specification Sections:
General: Submit complete sets of documentation as stated by
the contract conditions indicating type, size, rating, style,
catalog number, manufacturer's names, photographs and/or
catalog data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with
Specifications.
This documentation shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer and no equipment shall be ordered without this
approval for all equipment and devices, which are shown on
Drawings and in Bill of Quantities.
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings showing equipment
and device locations and connecting wiring of entire television
distribution system, including riser diagrams.
Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
- Complete one-line riser diagram(s)
- Pin to pin connection diagram.
- Provide calculations to support type of cables, system
gain and overall signal loss, in all cable routes from
start to end including network accessories, in order to
prove the adequacy of the proposed equipment to
provide signal strength at outlets.
- Include instructions and installation manuals.
- Complete sequence of operations and functions of the
system.
- Complete system blocks diagrams.
- A listing of the manufacturer's authorized local
representative responsible for installation coordination
and service.
including specifications and installations for each type of
equipment. Include standard or typical riser and wiring
-
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
diagrams, operation and maintenance
inclusion in maintenance manual.
instructions
for
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and

maintenance data and parts lists for each type of equipment
installed, including furnished specialties and accessories, and
circuit diagrams. Include this data, product data, and shop
drawings in operation and maintenance manual; in accordance
with requirements of Division-1 and other relevant
documentation.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturing firms of IPTV
system shall be regularly engaged in manufacturing IP
Television Distribution Systems of type, size and
characteristics similar to those required by the Contract for
this project and whose products have been in satisfactory
service in similar projects for not less than two (2) years.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer
who is a factory-authorized sales and service representative to
perform the work of this section. The installer firm shall have
at least five (5) years of successful installation experience of
TV distribution projects, with at least one project similar the
IPTV required for this project.
Training: Equipments manufacturer and his authorized, local
representative shall provide, in depth, equipment service and
programming on site training to selected Employers
personnel for one week.
1.6

Deliver products in factory original, unopened containers.
Store in clean, dry and shaded space in original containers.
Handle carefully to avoid damage.
1.7
RELATED SECTIONS
The following sections include requirements, which relate to
this section:
Electrical Identification.
Cable Trays
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
1.8
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall put in writing all his remarks, during the
progress of work, concerning any suggested alterations from
the shop drawings in wiring routes, locations of equipment or
devices which arise from coordination between the system and
other activities.
- No execution of alterations is allowed before receiving
written approval from the Engineer.
- All alterations shall be registered and filled by the
Contractors and extra copies shall be submitted to the
involved parties (Engineer, Project manager, Site, etc.).
A complete as-built draft set of drawings and equipment
schedules shall be prepared 15 days after completion of work
for approval of the Engineer.
The draft As-built shall include all previously approved
alterations.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
IPTV is received by the viewer through the technologies used for
computer networks.IPTV is often provided in conjunction with Video on
Demand and may be bundled with Internet services such as Web access
and VoIP. IPTV shall be supplied using the closed network infrastructure
(corporate LAN).
Using set-top boxes at end users, TV channels shall be streamed to users
more efficiently than current coaxial cable.
Prefare separate switch for IPTV system .
Network shall allow higher speeds and multiple high definition TV
channels.
IPTV also allows significant opportunities to make the TV viewing
experience more interactive and personalized. The system may include an
interactive program guide that allows viewers to search for content by title
or actors name, or a picture-in-picture functionality that allows them to
channel surf without leaving the program theyre watching.
System may also include Video on Demand (Void) service allowing a
customer to browse an online movie catalogue, to watch trailers and to
select the movie he wants to watch.
-
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
2.2

As with a digital satellite television system, an IPTV service
requires a video head end. This is the point in the network at
which broadcast TV and video on demand content is captured
and formatted for distribution over the IP
A head end takes each individual channel and encodes it into a
digital video format, like MPEG 4 which is the most prevalent
encoding standard for digital video.
After encoding, each channel is encapsulated into IP and sent
out over the project Local Area Network (LAN).User shall
install set top box before routing TV channels into his TV
receiver, or can use PC screen directly.
These channels are typically IP Unicast in which only the
selected channel(s) are distributed to the individual connected
users. Also multicast streams could be sent such as
advertisement broadcast service for lobbies, food courts and
open areas.
The IP TV services cabinet will be located in the satellite
headend in the project data center.
IPTV system is made up of following major elements:-
Satellite and terrestrial reception Head End:Streamer

Encoder to encode channels to (Pay TV).
Layer 3 switch and Gigabit Ethernet switch
Access Network(By others)
User network(By others)
System management
N.B: contractor has to co-ordinate with project Local Area

Network for integration.
2.3
System Features
- Easy to use PC based interface
- Auto scheduling
- Auto formatting
- Auto multiple bit rate encoding
- Viewer GUI (graphic user interface)
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
- Fully customizable - to fit corporate broadcasting look
- Full controls for the viewer
- Manual and automatic viewer adjustments
- Set top box integration
- Full reporting - audience and media reports - over 180
full - real time reports
- Program Management to create programs from multiple
packages such as an Identification, Content,
Advertising.
- Advertising insert manager
- Video on Demand creation and serving
- Delivery to multiple targets and multiple delivery
speeds from Mobile to Set Top Box at high bit rates on
private multicast networks.
- Payment Gateway for Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Annual
for channels and programs
- Subscription management.
Receiving Dishes
Group of receiving dishes three (3) shall be used.
Dish Antennas shall be constructed of light aluminum alloy
with positive locking of all elements in position. All mounting
and fixing materials shall be protected against corrosion by
heavy anodic coating or corrosion resisting compound.
The antennas shall be fixed to a mast mounted on the roof of
the building. Masts shall be heavy-duty hot dipped galvanized
steel securely fixed to the roof so as to ensure resistance to the
strongest winds encountered in the locality.
Dish antennas shall comprise of the following minimum
specification:
Mount with Azimuth/Elevation adjustment
1.2m Fixed C/Ku solid Antenna
Dish Diameter
120 cm
Focal Length
33 (68.2 cm)
F/D Ratio
0.37
Frequency Range
1.0 ~ 12.75 GHz
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Gain at 4.2 GHz
36 dBi
Gain at 12.2 GHz
44.9 dBi
Efficiency
70%
Reflector Material
Galvanized Steel
Finish
Electrostatic
Coating
Feed
Prime Focus
Mount
Polar
Max Wind Speed
90 Km (Operational)
Power
LNB Converters
LNB shall comprise of the following minimum specification:
Band:
Ku
No. of Inputs:
Polarity:
V-Hi, V-Lo, H-Hi, HLo
Freq.Range
Low
GHz
band:10.7 ~11.7
Highband: 11.7~12.75 GHz

Noise Figure at 20 Deg.
C: 0.3
Input VSWR:
2.5:1
Input RF level:
-100 to -55 dBm
Image Rejection Ratio:
45 dB
Output Frequency:
Low
MHz
band:950-1450
High band: 1100-2150 MHz

Power Gain:
56 ~65 dB
Output Impedance:
75 ohms
Operating Temperature:
-40 Deg.C to + 50 Deg.C
Relative Humidity:
100%
VHF/UHF Multi-band Antenna

Elements
VHF/UH
F, UHF
(48)
VHF
UHF
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Reception
Range/Channels
21-69
E5-12
L05-10
174-230
MHZ
470862
MHZ
Maximum Gain
dB
10
15
Back/Front Ratio dB
22
220
Half Power Beam

Horizontal
49
38
Wind Loading
260
260
Cable Connection
75/300
Ohm
HEADEND Equipment
Programmable modular IP-Streamer units for Digital Satellite
Free-to-Air channels shall be used in the head end equipment
in addition to one Satellite Multiplexer unit for each four
Satellite Signal inputs.
IP GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Products
REE Channels
ncrypt
Encode
Total Streams
10 TV
20 TV
1 analogue
Clear Streams
10
20
NA
Encrypted Str.
20
NA
Transponders
Technical Parameters
System
Linux
Network 100 Base-T Ethernet interface

Output format
MPEG2 Transport Stream (TS) over UDP
Output bandwidth 50 Mbit/s Average (10 TV Channels)

Multiplexing/
ISO/IEC 13818-1 and ETSI 300 468 compliant
Networking protocols
Format
Unicast & multicast with IPv4 or IPv6 protocols
DVB
Modulation
QPSK
-
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Technical Specifications
FREE/MXC/MXP
ENC
QPSK demodulator
MPEG2 encoder
LNB F type input
Composite RCA and SVIDEO input
C & Ku band support
Formats :PAL/SECAM
RF input level: -65 to -25 dBm
MPEG2 format:720 x576

25 pictures/sec; 24 bits
input frequency:
950 to 2150 MHz
Symbol rate:
1 to 45 MS/s, SCPC and MCPC support
Supports
LNB 14/18 V / OFF max 400 mA; 22 KHz,
band switch control
(DiSEqC 1.0 )
Size:
2U Rack
Power
100-220 V/50 Hz
Decryption
Only for IP Stream MXC and MXP
Decryption methods for VIAACCESS, MEDIAGUARD, CRYPTOWORKS,
IRDETO
Support for PCMCIA Consumer modules allowing for the decryption of 4 ES
i.e. 2 TV streams (IP stream CS-MXC)
Support for PCMCIA Professional modules allowing for the decryption of 20
ES, i.e. 10 TV Streams (IP Stream CS-MXP)
Software
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements
for all software related to all parts of the project:
- Contractor shall supply original software media. No
copies shall be accepted or installed at any time.
- Contractor shall supply original software licenses from
software supplier. No licenses issued by the contractor
shall be accepted.
- All software license agreements shall be in the name of
The Commercial Real Estate Company.
- Configuration: It is recommended that if changes are
-
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
required, to be done
- Through software configuration and not customization
or new development.
- In case the contractor chooses to offer specific feature
through new software
Development. The contractor must provide the software media
for all customized software if any.
IP-Stream: Broadcasts digital streams without signal recompression decryption of
encrypted steams
IP-Supervisor: Web Interface for stream monitoring
IP-Admin: Web Interface for the management of TV and radio
channel specifications.
Distribution System
The system shall comprise of the following items
A.
CABLES
COAXIAL
Inner Conductor
1.13 mm
Characteristic Impedance
75+3 Ohms
Max. Attenuation (20 C):

(at 600 MHz)
14.6
dB/100m
Screen:
Copper/Aluminum Foil and
tinned copper
braid
Screening Efficiency
>90 dB
Dielectric:
Polyethylene
Foam
Loop Resistance Ohm/Km.
30.5
Propagation Factor
0.85
Cable Connectors
75 ohms connectors, joining connectors, Coaxial cables,
Outdoor Splitters
IP Distribution
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
IP Streams will utilizes the Data Network to transport the
streams from IP headend system to Interactive cards (STB) at
end users.
Grounding: To prevent accumulation of static charge on
antenna supporting structure, it shall be grounded by
connecting a heavy ground wire to the system earth (metal
stake driven into the earth). Grounding of the mast is also
essential.
Accessories: The cable networks shall include all necessary
accessories.
All accessories shall operate at the system frequency range
which covers the required band of frequencies.
Accessories shall have the minimum gain loss and shall
provide sufficient isolation on return loss characteristics.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
Examine areas and conditions under which Television
Distribution System shall be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer.
3.2

Install electrical identification in accordance with
requirements of Section 16195 " Electrical Identification".
3.3
INSTALLATION OF BASIC WIRING SYSTEM

MATERIALS
Install wiring, raceways or conduits electrical boxes, cables
and fittings in accordance with Section 16100 "Raceways,
Boxes and Cabinets.
Install wiring of signal circuits and power limited circuit in
raceways or conduit or exposed on wall or ceilings when
properly protected. Use conduits for runs through floors or in
shaft ways to a height of 2.3 m above floor.
Install cables using special stripping tools which do not harm shields
and insulators. Use special gripping tools and do not use solder type
fittings and connectors.
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
3.4
INSTALLATION OF TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION

SYSTEM
Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other
work of the Contract shall be closely coordinated with the
appropriate trade.
Equipment manufacturer shall provide all necessary assistance
to his authorized, local representative to:
- Coordinate the selection of system equipment.
- Execute field strength tests for all frequency bands to be
received by the system (VHF, UHF, Ku, C, etc..) .
- Perform complete functional tests of the system at all
outlets including signal strength, reflection coefficient, etc.
- Submit a written report attesting the proper operation of the
completed system.
Install Television Distribution System as indicated on
Drawings in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and comply with the standards of
installation.
Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer's
requirements.
Color code wiring and install per
manufacturer's point-to-point wiring diagram. Determine
exact number of wires for each device installed.
Connect each device with sufficient wiring to complete its intended
operation.
Where there are number of power requiring devices, provide
extra or larger size wiring to alleviate voltage drops which
makes device operate beyond voltage limits for which it was
designed.
Determine above with manufacturers representative while
equipment is being installed.
Submit a signed copy of test results in duplicate to the
Engineer.
Equipment cabinets shall be installed in a special room for the
Television Distribution System and shall be arranged to
permit easy servicing of the different parts.
Cable bearers shall be installed on walls wherever needed.
Wall mounted equipment shall be installed according to the
manufacturer recommendations.
-
SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Power supply distribution board shall be installed in an
arrangement, which does not affect the safety of equipment
and cause no interference with the telecommunication system.
Air-conditioning shall be provided to the room if the
Television Distribution System stable operating conditions
and design considerations, stated by the manufacturer, require.
Fresh air supply to the room shall be highly filtered to prevent
the dust from entering equipment.
Powerful and even distributed illumination for the room of the
switching equipment shall be provided to permit easy view of
all components.
Equipment room shall be fitted with dustproof doors and
windows.
Ambient conditions shall be considered in the design of this
room.
3.5

Connection and Supervision: Make connections to equipment
panel under manufacturer's supervision.
Complete
connections between cabinets and panels utilizing
Manufacturer's technicians.
System Test and Approval: Submit shop drawings for
function and operation only, pre-approved by the Engineer.
- Prior to final acceptance of the system, the manufacturer of
system shall, in presence of the Contractor, Employer's
representative and Engineer's representative, test each
extension device.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

MONITORING SYSTEM (CCMS)
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A.
The Central control and monitoring system (CCMS) specified under this section shall
be totally electronic solid-state, employing 100 digital pulse transmission of all signals
and using computer oriented digital technology to ensure long life and low
maintenance costs to be consistent with the projects life cycle costing concepts. The
system must be a standard with the manufacturer to ensure ongoing parts availability
and trained technical support.
B.
The installation must include all push buttons, indicators, switches, pilot indicators,
digital and analogue value displays, transmission line interface equipment and software,
etc., to make up a completely operable system. The installation shall have the capacity
to handle the points specified in the input/output summary plus 25% additional. CCMS
must be designed in a modular fashion to ensure future expansion capability whether it
be additional data gathering panels (DGPs) or central console function capability. The
CCMS is specified herein to help ensure proper and efficient utilization of the
mechanical and electrical systems.
C.
The CCMS shall be tolerant of power failures up to one hour duration. On power
restoration, the systems shall automatically come-on-line without operator intervention
or execution of manual re-start procedures. After outages exceeding one hour
duration, the system shall be resettable by the operator who shall be instructed on
procedures to be followed.
D.
The CCMS shall be located within the control room at the Generator Building
Allowance shall be made to provide an interface module later on in the future next to
the CCMS CPU in order to transmit selected fire alarm points and security CCTV
points to the Central Monitoring System.
E.
The systems shall be equipped to handle all of the requirements for the various
buildings.
F.
For each of the various building areas in the project as designated on the drawings and
herein specified, there shall be a mini or micro-computer sub-system consisting of a
central processor unit with man-machine interprogrammable software having assigned
local intelligence to provide the specified control and monitoring functions for the
respective area of the project.
G.
The individual area sub-systems shall operate independently on stand-alone on-line

basis to accomplish their respective area control and monitoring functions as specified.
A common data-bus shall interconnect all sub-systems to the central operations
console, to provide central management report logs specified herein, and to permit
central management penetration through the central operations console keyboard of all
sub-system address points for specific data acquisition upon request, for corrective
commands, reassignments, of alarm parameters, re-direction of sub-systems tasks, and
other command, interrogation, monitoring, and alarm functions as specified.
16900-1
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
H.
The manufacturer of the CCMS shall furnish and install the entire system which shall
include all hardware, firmware, software, and all components and including the entire
wiring system required for a complete operating system as herein specified.
J.
The system shall consist of standard components of CCMS manufacturer, regularly

manufactured and not custom designed especially for this project. All systems and
components shall have been thoroughly proven in actual use.
K.
The CCMS manufacturer shall have officially authorized representation in the

Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The manufacturer shall have a factory trained staff to
provide local job-site technical assistance and spare parts availability.
L.
The CCMS manufacturer shall maintain a staff of technicians skilled in all phases of the
CCMS system including installation of components, wiring requirements, interface
with sub-systems, system check out and start-up, and implementation of all system
functions as herein specified, for a completely automatic and inter-active system.
M.
The manufacturers trained staff shall be readily available and shall be fully capable of
system engineering, supervision start-up, commissioning, owner training and
emergency service. Bidder shall manufacture at least 80% of all equipment required to
meet the specification requirements.
N.
At the time of bid, the manufacturer shall include in his proposal form a list of at least
four other similar distributed computerized control systems with stand-alone selfreliant sub-systems, which the bidder shall have manufactured, supplied and installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
OPERATING AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS:

A.
The operating and monitoring functions for each of the area sub-systems, and for the
central operations console, shall be as required and as described in this specification
and as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Generally the following shall be included.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10 .
Building environment control including seasonal changeover control.

Mechanical equipment operation and malfunction alarms.
Electrical switchgear on-off indications and alarms.
Fire alarm system status and alarms.
Intercommunications between individual equipment areas.
Automatic control of selected items of equipment by pre-set program.
Electrical energy consumption control of selected equipment.
Timed start-stop operation of selected items of equipment.
Real-time adjustment of set-point levels.
On-off status and alarms from standby generators.
16900-2
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
C.
For the description of control functions and required signal refer to the design
drawings for Control Sequence Equipment layouts and Schedules.
D.
Two separate CCMS systems shall be provided for the following:

1.
2.
2.02
AREA SUB SYSTEM HARDWARE:

A.
2.03
Switchgear, generator and medium voltage system.

HVAC System, pumps and Storage Tanks.
All area sub-systems consoles shall have identical processor units, operators
terminals, power supply units, translator units, floppy disc loaders, standby batteries,
battery charger and cabinetry. Software shall differ only as to individual area
applications and their input/output programs.
SENSORS:
A.
All temperatures shall be measured by high precision resistance elements. The sensors
shall be accurate to + 2C in a laboratory-type constant temperature bath. They shall
require no field recalibration.
B.
Pressure signals shall be transmitted to the CPU in digital form. Signal conversion from
pressure to digital form shall take place at the pressure sensor or the DGP.
C.
Electronic relative humidity sensing shall be provided to ensure fast and accurate system
response for control and indication.
D.
The system shall be designed to take standard industrially available transducers of all
types that have 0 to 50 millivolt and 4 to 20 milliamperes outputs. The system shall have
the capability to scale, offset and display the proper analogue value.
E.
Digital Sensors: The DGPs shall be designed to accept sensing inputs from devices
with isolated, dry type contacts (no grounds and no voltage) of either the normally
open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) configuration.
F.
Differential pressure of air flow switches shall be provided to prove fan operation.
Positive operating status and alarm conditions hall be provided for all 0.75 Kw fans and
larger. Fractional Kw fans may use auxiliary contacts for proof of system operation.
G.
Waterflow or differential pressure switches shall be provided to prove operations of all

pumps per the Input/Output summary herein.
H.
The system shall have capability of not only alarming abnormal OFF conditions of fans
and pumps but shall also indicate abnormal ON conditions of the same equipment. If a
start command has not been issued from the central console and a piece of equipment is
turned on, the central processor shall alarm an abnormal ON. This abnormal ON shall
also sound the audible alarm and display the alarm ON condition.
16900-3
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
2.04
POWER SUPPLIES:
A.
2.05
A power supply of 127 volt single phase 60 hertz at 20 amps shall be provided by the
Electrical Contractor at operators terminal in the respective area control room. A
similar power supply shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor at each of the data
gathering panel locations in each specified building.
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE:
A.
The CCMS shall be a completely installed fully operating totally integrated system
consisting in general of a number of intelligent micro or mini computer independently
operating sub-systems serving the respective groups of buildings. A central operations
console at the location shown in the service building, all necessary wiring within the
buildings to the respective area console and a system of digital-pulse serial data signal
transmission data-bus trunk cables, installed within underground conduit to interconnect
all area consoles to each other and to the central operations console.
B.
The CCMS shall be of distributed computerized control design with 100% digital pulse
type transmission of all signals, distributed software residing in the respective area
consoles to provide completely independent on-line control and monitoring functions in
the respective areas, and permitting overall access to the area consoles through the
central operations.
C.
Systems having monolithic type central software design in lieu of the distributed
software design herein, will not be accepted.
D.
The sub-system for each area shall include but not be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Central Operations Console: The central operations console (C.O.C.) in the Services
Building shall include but not to be limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.06
Micro or mini-computer central processing unit.

Operators terminal, man-machine interface.
Intercom.
Floppy disc memory loading and dumping.
Standby batteries and automatic charge.
Translator to data-bus.
Micro or mini-computer peripheral processor unit.

Cathode ray tube terminal with keyboard, man-machine interface.
High-speed printers of 120 characters per second.
Management report log high speed printer.
Graphic display projector.
Operations software.
Floppy disc memory loading and dumping.
AREA CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT (CPU)
16900-4
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
A.
The area central processor unit shall contain the computer, programs and associated
hardware, to perform all the specified functions for the respective area in a fully
integrated and non-interfacing manner.
B.
The CPU input/output bus software shall be integrally designed to communicate with
the specified peripherals and data groups. The initial installation shall include all push
buttons, indicators, digital and analogue value displays, transmission lines interface
equipment software of all accessories to make a completely operable system. The initial
installation for the respective area shall have the capacity to handle the address points
specified in the input/output summary or described herein, and 30 percent additional
future points. Future points shall require no executive software program modification
and no hardware modification. Re-assignment of operator terminal data shall be easily
accomplished in the field via single entry at the keyboard.
C.
Each DGP and peripheral device connected to the CPU shall be continuously scanned
for proper operation. Data transmission between CPU and peripheral devices shall be
dual transmissions, and failure of any DGP or peripheral device to respond to an
interrogation shall be annunciated. The CPU shall be designed to perform all the data
gathering and processing functions, communicate with all peripherals and exercise the
application packages specified. All data output and program input (keyboard) shall be
direct decimal values with no requirement for operator to have any knowledge of
binary, octal, binary coded decimal arithmetic, or look up table methods.
D.
Provide an on-line data base generator to accomplish all data file entry, application
program assignments, group and point assignments, data point deletions, data point
changes, alarm perimeter assignments and peripheral assignments. All assignments shall
be made directly on the keyboard specified hereinafter. Systems requiring remote or
factory programming for these functions will not be acceptable. All programming
specified herein to be keyboard performed shall include direct read and write operation.
Changing program or application package parameters, adding data points, or deleting
data points shall not interfere with data processing. Alarms shall be annunciated and
control programs executed during all keyboard program modes.
E.
A digital grade floppy disc unit shall be furnished as an integral part of system, and used
to load the executive program and specified user programs. The cassette interface
system shall be capable of recording the point data file and other keyboard input
parameters. This cassette system shall then be capable of reprogramming the complete
system, using the contractor furnished executive program and the field recorded discs
with no manual keyboard entries required. In addition to the floppy disc unit and
executive program discs, ten blank digital discs for record/playback are to be supplied.
F.
The CPU shall cause an hourly test printout log at the C.O.C., proving that all remote
systems and peripherals are functioning properly. At this hourly printout, any system
not functioning properly shall be summarized and noted on the log as non-responsive.
The system shall continuously, and sequentially, scan each connected data group in
search for status changes or contact alarm points programmed reactions, actuated from
the CPU. Status without alarm (monitoring points shall cause no automatic activity at
the C.O.C. printers or operators terminal when changes of state occur. Status
16900-5
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
monitoring points programmed to initiate event programs upon change of state shall do
so. Status monitoring points shall all be displayed at the C.O.C. terminal and printed
on assigned printer upon demand.
2.07
G.
Alarm monitoring points going into alarm shall automatically annunciate themselves
audibly and visually on assigned C.O.C. terminals, assigned printers, and assigned alarm
annunciator modules. Alarm points returning to normal shall annunciate modules.
Acknowledgment and supervision of critical alarms shall be as hereinafter specified
under data gathering panels.
H.
All analogue sensor scaling, necessary linearising, and square root extraction shall be
done within the central processor. Systems using exterior remotely located hardware to
perform these functions will not be acceptable, unless fully re-programmable through
the central keyboard.
AREA OPERATORS TERMINAL:

A.
Each operators terminal shall be provided with CRT terminal with keyboard, keyboard
printer, access control and intercom system. The operators terminal shall be a floormounted unit fully enclosed and of all solid-state construction.
B.
Operators Access Control:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The CCMS shall be capable of restricting specified operator commands to

specified points by specified operators at a specified device. Inhibitors shall be
removed through the use of a software password a keylock system.
An advisory shall be printed in the event that three unsuccessful attempts are
made to gain access into the system with an invalid system access request.
A properly entered system access request shall cause the CCMS to output a
message each time an operator gains system access . This message shall
include the operators initials in alphabetic characters as well as the time and
the date of system access.
An operator input shall be echoed back on the output device associated with
the input device. The operator shall then be able to either execute or abort the
input.
The CCMS shall supervise all operator inputs to insure that all inputs are
correctly and properly executed.
Operator input assistance shall be provided whenever a command cannot be
executed because of operator input errors.
The CCMS shall explain to the operator in words and phrases why the
command cannot be executed. The following explanations shall be provided:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
The identifier does not exist.

The operator is restricted from executing the input and must obtain a
clearance through a password or a keylock system.
The command is not appropriate for the type of point being identified.
The requested command involves a point which is locked out.
The value entered is outside the range for the analogue printed point
specified.
16900-6
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
f.
The operator request did not contain sufficient information.
g.
The point hardware specified is not in communication with the system.
8.
9.
10 .
11 .
2.08
C.
A CRT with direct video capability shall be provided for soft copy change-of-state
printouts, system logs, information summaries, control system malfunction, advisors,
and operators input advisories. It shall have 300 mm display screen providing 24 lines
with 80 character/line capacity. The CRT display format shall be organized to permit
the output of displays and/or summaries, which concurrently displaying the most recent
change-of-state occurrence.
D.
A keypad for command and summary operations shall be provided as an integral part of
the keyboard specified with the CRT(s). The keypad shall distinguish command
involving HVAC points, security points and points common to HVAC and security by
coloring and grouping the keys into these areas. Any time a touchpad key is depressed,
the system shall respond with the associated command word on the CRT(s) display.
E.
A wide carriage, keyboard/printer shall be provided for hard copy change-of-state

printouts, system logs, information summaries, and control system malfunction
advisories. This keyboard/printer shall output 10 characters per line of paper. It shall
have a minimum operating speed of 30 characters per second. This keyboard/printer
shall be capable of using fan fold paper.
AREA INTERCOM:
A.
2.09
Operator inputs executed under valid system access requests shall be recorded
on a hard copy device. This record shall contain the operator input and the
time and date of input execution.
An operator command shall be provided to reinhibit all operator input
capability that was previously available by valid system access requests.
The CCMS shall automatically reinhibit all operator input capability that was
previously availability by valid system access 4 minutes after the execution of
the last executed operator input requiring a valid system access request.
Valid system access requests and associated operator initials shall be added,
changed, or deleted on-line via a keyboard entry. All changes shall be made at
the strictest level of access.
An approved intercom unit shall be provided for intercommunication between the

C.O.C., the operators stations and other remote areas specified, as part of the
input/output summary. Volume in, volume out, and push-to-talk control switches shall
be designed for selective call out and for remotely initiated call in. Intercommunication
shall in no way interfere with data handling.
AREA DATA GATHERING PANELS

A.
The area CPU shall be connected to the various remote data gathering panels (DGPs)
located in mechanical rooms or other spaces as shown. The data gathering panels in the
various buildings comprising the areas shall be connected to each other through trunk
wiring as necessary. The remote points of the various buildings shall be wired to their
16900-7
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
respective data gathering panels. Each data gathering panel shall be wired to a local
source of 220 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 20 amp. power.
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
AREA TRANSLATOR MODULE:

A.
The area translator module shall convert send-receive digital messages between the area
C.P.U. and the data-bus of the central operations console, for full S.I. units display and
commands at the central operations console specified under Central System.
B.
The area sub-system shall be linked to the central system data-bus through transmission
protocol software and hardware.
C.
The area sub-system, as specified hereinbefore, shall always be in a 100% survival made
for independent operation of its input/output functions.
CENTRAL OPERATORS CONSOLE (C.O.C.) - MAN-MACHINE INTERFACE - CRT

WITH KEYBOARD
A.
The primary man-machine interface for the system shall be a CRT terminal operating
under full software control. All accessing of data, issuing of commands, annunciation
of alarms and system data file programming shall be accomplished via the CRT.
B.
The CRT shall be complete with keyboard to provide total I/O capability.
C.
The functions and facilities offered by the C.O.C. shall generally be the same as those
available at the Area CPUs.
KEYBOARD:
A.
A keypad for command and summary operations shall be provided as integral part of
the keyboard specified with CRT(s).
B.
The keypad shall distinguish command involving HVAC points, security points, and
points common to HVAC and security by coloring and grouping the keys into these
areas.
C.
Any time a touchpad key is depressed, the system shall respond with the associated
command word on the CRT(s) display.
CRT DISPLAY:
A.
A CRT with direct video capability shall be provided for soft copy change-of-state
printouts, system logs, information summaries, control system malfunction advisories,
and operators input advisories. It shall have a 300 mm display screen providing 24 lines
with 80 characters/line capacity.
16900-8
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
B.
2.14
The CRT display format shall be organized to permit the output of display and/or
summaries, while concurrently displaying the most recent change-of-state occurrence.
INFORMATION ACCESS:
A.
A system log shall be provided which contains the point status of all points specified by
the operator input. The system shall be capable of automatically initiating a log based
on a pre-selected time schedule.
B.
An alarm summary shall be provided which contains the point status of all points
specified by the operator input and in the alarm condition. The system shall be capable
of automatically initiating and alarm system based on pre-selected time schedule.
C.
An off-normal summary shall be provided which contains the point status of all points
specified by the operator input and in the off-normal condition. The system shall be
capable of automatically initiating an off-normal summary based on a pre-selected time.
D.
Three special summaries shall be provided which contain the point status of all points
specified by the operator regardless how these points are grouped under specified
levels. The system operator shall be capable of adding or deleting special summary
point on-line. The system shall be capable of automatically initiating a special summary
based on a pre-selected time schedule.
E.
The system shall be capable of displaying the status of a single point or all points
grouped and refreshing this display on the CRT with the current point status at least
every 40 seconds. The systems shall, upon operator request, display two systems in
alternating fashion. When displaying the status of a single point, its high and low limits
(if applicable) shall be displayed. The display shall also contain the system associated
with the point.
F.
Operators Access Control:

1.
2.
3.
4.
The CCMS shall also be capable of restricting specified operator commands to

specified points by specified operators at a specified device. Inhibitors shall be
removed through the use of a software password or a keylock system.
An advisory shall be printed in the event that three unsuccessful attempts are
made to gain access into the system with an invalid system access request.
A properly entered access request shall cause the CCMS to output a message
each time an operator gains system access. This message shall include the
operators initials in alphabetic characters as well as the time and the date of
system access.
An operator input shall be echoed back on the output device associated with
the input device. The operator shall then be able to either execute or abort the
input.
16900-9
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
5.
The CCMS shall supervise all operator inputs to insure that all inputs are
correctly and properly executed.
6.
Operator input assistance shall be provided whenever a command cannot be
executed because of operator input errors.
7.
The CCMS shall explain to the operator in words and phrases why the
command cannot be executed. The following explanations shall be provided:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
8.
9.
10 .
11 .
G.
2.15
The identifier does not exist.

The operator is restricted from executing the input and must obtain a
clearance through a password or a keylock system.
The command is not appropriate for the type of point being identified.
The requested command involves a point which is locked out.
The value entered is outside the range for the analogue point specified.
The operator request did not contain sufficient information.
The point hardware specified is not in communication with the system.
Operator inputs executed under valid system access requests shall be recorded
on a hard copy device. This record shall contain the operator input and the
time and date of input execution.
An operator command shall be provided to reinhibit all operator input
capability that was previously available by valid system access requests.
The CCMS shall automatically reinhibit all operator input capability that was
previously available by valid system access 4 minutes after the execution of the
last executed operator input requiring valid system access request.
Valid system access requests and associated operator initials shall be added,
changed, or deleted on-line via a keyboard entry. All changes shall be made at
the strictest level of access.
The operator will have the ability to custom program his system software on-line.
Modifications, additions, and deletions can be made to the system software. Access to
this function will be password restricted.
ALARMS AND CHANGE-OF-STATE DISPLAY:

A.
A dedicated field area shall be provided for display of alarms and associated English
language messages. Only one alarm or change-of-state message shall be displayed at a
time. When simultaneous alarms occur, acknowledging of the first alarm display shall
cause the next alarm in the current alarm register to be displayed and the audible alarm
shall resound.
B.
All change-of-state conditions shall be annunciated in full English language with

description indicating:
1.
What is it - Alarm, Restoration, Trouble, etc.
2.
When it happened - Time in 24 -hour notation.
3.
Why it happened - Fire, Smoke, Off, Degrees.

16900-10
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Where is it - Second Floor, Zone 3, or Fan System S-3, Discharge air, etc.
5.
2.16
C.
An alarm condition shall cause the alarm asterisk to flash on and off at a 2 cycle per
second rate. A pulsating audible alarm shall also sound and shall continue until
acknowledged.
Acknowledgment shall cause the flashing to halt and an
ACKNOWLEDGED message to appear adjacent to the alarm display.
D.
Return to normal conditions, or restorations, shall appears as single line messages,

indicating type of alarm restored, such as fire restoration, the time, and the numeric
point address. For fire and security type restorations a steady audible alarm shall sound
until acknowledged. The fact that the restoration has been acknowledged shall also be
displayed.
E.
Where inputs require different actions for different point conditions as in the case of fire
alarm, as against fire trouble, two independent actions taking messages shall be
provided. For example, the actions message for fire alarm might be Call Fire
Department, whereas the action taking message for fire trouble might be dispatch
Electrician or Call Maintenance Department Extension 123 .
ALARM MESSAGES:
A.
2.17
Suitable memory shall be provided to store up to 999 sixty character English language
messages. Each message shall be field programmable, directly through the CRT
keyboard, as on-line function. Assignment of messages to specific data points shall also
be accomplished through the CRT keyboard.
PROGRAMMERS PANEL:
A.
2.18
How to react - Call Fire Department, Lower setpoint, Call up slide 24 , etc.
The CRT terminal shall serve as a system programming panel as well as for day to day
operation. Initially, all data file programming shall be accomplished directly through the
CRT. Subsequent changes, point additions, and modifications to the system shall also
be implemented via software key controlled access and the CRT terminal.
CENTRAL PRINTERS:
A.
Each printer installed in conjunction with C.O.C. shall be a high reliability digital output
device to approval. The printer shall operate at a minimum speed of 120 characters per
second. Each printer shall be continually supervised by the C.O.C. software and failures
in the send/receive electronics or the printer power shall be annunciated. The printers
shall be provided either with fan-fold paper catch trays or automatic roll-take-up
spools/reels, as directed. The number of printers operating in conjunction with CCMS
system, shall be selected such that at no time congestion or delays in receiving vital
information from the Area C.P.U.s occur. A power on-off switch shall be provided.
B.
The printers shall receive and print out the hourly reports from the Area C.P.U.
identification, and shall be dated (time, day, date, month and year), giving automatically
16900-11
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
a comprehensive report that the C.P.U. and the D.G.P.s served by it, are functioning
normally. These hourly reports shall identify all non-responsive transmitter/receiver
units, or power loss conditions in a summary format.
2.19
C.
Upon occurrence of an alarm condition at any data point, the C.P.U. shall automatically
sound an alarm and cause the C.O.C. system to print the off-normal data point in a
distinctive manner. All alarm printouts shall include the time of day (24 hour forma),
off -normal point address, analogue point value with type of alarm (high or low value
alarm), and point status (on, secure, etc.) or point type (fire). The C.O.C. printers shall
have integral silence switches for the audible alarms.
D.
The C.O.C. printers shall automatically record other non-alarm system activities. When
any system alarm point return to a normal condition, a distinctive return to normal
printout shall occur with time, address, and value or status. For all fire alarm, security
and noted critical alarm points, a printout shall occur at the time of alarm
acknowledgment identifying the type of printout, time, address and point status.
E.
The C.O.C. printers shall have function key pads for software controlled logging
capabilities, with each function log having a descriptive, labelled single demand key.
Each log shall be preceded by a printout line indicating the time of day and the log type.
F.
A status summary log shall be provided to automatically summarize the addresses and
status of remote monitored and controlled equipment.
G.
An alarm summary log shall be provided to summarize all system off-normal points
complete with point data and analogue values.
H.
An all-point log shall be provided to list all connected and calculated points complete
with current point data and analogue values. Points in an alarm condition, at the time of
printout, shall be designated by an asterisk in all logs. All log data shall be restricted to
data assigned to the appropriate printer, as noted previously.
GRAPHIC PROJECT UNIT - C.O.C.:

A.
Modular, 81 frame, approved, random access graphic projection units shall be provided
adjacent to the C.O.C. station to provide an automatically indexed projection of a color
graphic representation of each data system specified. The number of modules required
shall be selected to suit the number of graphics necessary for the system. Each
projection shall be from a single frame positive slide. Graphics shall be human
engineered to depict duct, pipe, and equipment configurations, floor and information
necessary for complete system interpretation.
B.
The graphic projection units shall be specially designed with mirrors and compact
housings to produce a non-glare image of minimum 225 mm by 350 mm size. The logic
and drive system shall be designed to provide a nominal access time of no more than
three seconds. The projection units shall be controlled from command switches suitably
located on the C.O.C. station, and shall automatically turn off after any period of use.
16900-12
SECTION 16900
CENTRAL CONTROL &

_________________________________________________________________________________
C.
The unit shall be designed for automatic indexing of proper slide on any analogue or
digital alarm occurrence. In addition, any system slide may be manually indexed upon
request. An index slide (or slides) shall be provided to outline the contents of each
graphic slide in each module.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION:
A.
General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and shop drawings and details on drawings. Install electrical components and use
electrical products complying with requirements of applicable SECTIONS OF
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. Mount controllers at locations and height as indicated
or instructed by the Clients Representative.
B.
Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust electrical control systems in presence of

manufacturer's Representative. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
- END OF SECTION -
16900-13
SECTION 16950
TESTS AND CERTIFICATES
__________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
After completion of the Electrical Work, the complete systems shall be tested
thoroughly before commissioning. Any modifications or repairs necessary on
completion of the tests shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
The tests outlined herein shall be in addition to, and not substitution for, the
tests of the individual items at the manufacturer's plant. Insulation and grounding
resistance test shall be made before operating tests. Proper rotation shall be
determined before permanent connections are made.
All testing equipment on Site shall be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall make the necessary openings in the circuits, for the testing
instruments and shall place and connect all instruments, equipment, and devices
necessary for the tests. Upon completion of the tests, these shall be removed and
all circuits connected to their permanent condition.
The tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer and local power
authorities representative. The Engineer shall be notified seven calendar days or
more in advance when any test is to take place, and it shall not be started without his
permission.
Certificates when so required shall be submitted for any equipment installed under
this contract originating by an authorized inspecting body in the country of
manufacturer.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall supply the electric current necessary
for the tests.
The Contractor shall state and guarantee the particulars as specified in his tender
documents. Such guarantees shall not be departed from, without written permission
by the Engineer. If such guarantees are not respected, the Engineer has the right
to reject the faulty equipment.
The Contractor shall submit four copies of all tests results.
Test shall include the following:
-
Insulation megger tests on wires.

Continuity and resistance tests.
Socket outlets proper wiring tests.
Operational tests on all electrical equipment.
Insulation resistance tests of motors.
Testing of lighting installations.
16950 -1
SECTION 16950
__________________________________________________________________________
1.2
REFERENCES
A
Insulation Megger Tests

Tests for insulation level shall be a 500 -volt Megger. A minimum of one
megohm (1,000,000 ohms) applying to the complete installation shall be
obtained. This means that when all the phase wires at the panelboard are
connected together and to the testing instrument, all switches closed, all
appliances inserted in the circuit, all neutral wires left in the air, and the
other end of the Megger is connected to the grounding, then there shall be a
minimum of 1 megohm between the whole of the installation taken together
and the grounding.
Continuity & Resistance Tests

A continuity test to ensure that all connections have been made properly shall
be made. This can be done by the use of a bell set. Test shall also include
ensuring all switches and other interrupting devices breaking the phase wire
and not the neutral wire.
Test shall include, in addition to checking continuity of current carrying
wires and cables, continuity of grounding conductors. This shall be done
through a Megger which shall produce an alternating current of a
magnitude equal to one and a half times the rating of the circuit under test
with a maximum of 25 amps.
Socket Outlets Proper Wiring Test

All socket outlets shall be connected properly such that looking at the face of
the socket outlet the live connection shall be on the right, the neutral on the
left and the earthing at the top.
Operational Tests
The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of circuit breakers,
switches and any other equipment as requested by the Engineer, or as
specified elsewhere in these Specifications.
Each motor and associated equipment shall be run as nearly as possible
under normal operating conditions for as long a time as is necessary to
domonstrate correct alignment, wiring capacity, speed, and satisfactory
operation. The motor shall be loaded to full capacity, or as near there to
as possible.
16950 -2
SECTION 16950
__________________________________________________________________________
E
Insulation Resistance Tests Of Motors

All motors shall be tested for insulation in with the requirement of IEC
Standard Two copies of the test data shall be submitted.
Testing Of Lighting Installation

The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all lighting fixtures.
END OF SECTION
16950 -3
MINISTRY OF INTERIOR FOURTH GROUP OF

ADMINISTRATION BUILDINGS
DC-001 NATIONAL INFORMATION CENTER
VOLUME II
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS
PART 1 of 1
(DIVISION 16 )
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION:
A.
1.2
The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all electrical

materials as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
REFERENCES:
A.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

C2
C 78.1
C 80.1
C 80.4
C 81
B.
SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization

SASO 182
SASO 203
C.
F 512
Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

Testing Thermoplastic Insulated and Jacketed Wire and
Cable
Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering

37.13a
F.
Conductors of Insulated Cables
ASTM - American Standards for Testing and Materials

B3
D 2653
E.
Standard Voltage and Frequency fos AC Transmission and

Distribution System
Safety Measure for Electrical Installations in Residential
Premises
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC 228
D.
National Electric Safety Code

Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics of fluorescent
Lamps, Rapid Start Types
Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
Specification for fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit.
Electric Lamp Bases and Holders.
Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breaker Used in

Enclosures
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

70
16050-1
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
G.
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

1
20
50
67
83
93
198
493
Safety Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit

Safety Standard for General Use Snap Switches
Safety Standard for Cabinets and Boxes
Safety Standard for Panel Boards
Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Wires
Safety Standard for Enclosed Switches
Safety Standard for Fuses
Safety Standard for Thermoplastic Insulated Underground
Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables
Safety Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
Safety Standard for Industrial Control Equipment
Safety Standard for Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings
498
508
514
1.3
H.
NEC - National Electric Code
I.
IES - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Complete list of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in

the work:
1.
List shall include manufacturer's name and material or equipment

identification such as styles, types or catalogue numbers to permit
ready and complete identification.
2.
Include complete set of catalogues covering these submittals.
3.
If catalogue doe not indicate compliance with appropriate

standard as specified, provide additional certification as to
compliance.
B.
Shop drawings shall be submitted for equipment not readily identifiable

by information named above and will be submitted for, but not limited to,
cabinets and panel boards, busways and supports and under floor ducts.
C.
Testing Laboratory Label Required:

1.
Label will satisfy requirement.
2.
Listed only: Submit copy of listing.
3.
Unlisted or Labeled: Submit statements from certified testing

laboratory or agency indicating that the item has been tested in
accordance with required procedures and the product complies
with all requirements.
16050-2
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
D.
1.4
1.5
TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

A.
All materials and equipment specified under this section shall be provided
in manufacturer's original new and unopened packing bearing
manufacturer's name and label.
B.
Store materials not in actual use in covered and well-ventilated area and
protect them from dirt, dust, moisture, direct sunlight and extreme
temperatures.
C.
For further requirements follow manufacturer's written instruction

regarding storage and handling.
WARRANTY:
A.
1.6
Test Results: See specification for requirement of reporting tests of

ground readings.
Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for

the period of 5 years from the date of substantial completion. The
guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement of defective materials
and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture

of fire alarm systems and components, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar services for not less than 5 years period, and be
subject to approval of the Engineer.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced specialist sub-contractor who is

authorized by the system manufacturer, and subject to approval of the
Engineer.
C.
All the components and installations shall comply with the requirements
of specified codes and standards.
16050-3
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUITS:
A.
Interior Raceways: Raceways for wires inside the building, recessed in

concrete and CMU, shall be rigid PVC, self extinguishing, with proper
type of fittings such as bell ends or terminal adapters. Rigid PVC conduits
for use in wet walls and other locations as required by NEC 347 to be
embedded in concrete. All surface-mounted raceways for wires including
above suspended ceiling and inside drywalls shall be EMT or rigid
galvanized steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1. Fittings for steel
conduits shall conform to ANSI C80.4.
B.
Exterior Raceways: Raceways for exterior use shall be direct burial type
rigid PVC, Schedule 40 with one bell end per length, rated for 80C
cables. Raceways under traffic areas shall be encased in concrete.
C.
Flexible conduits shall be of galvanized steel conforming to ANSI/UL 1.

Flexible conduits in wet areas shall be "Seal tight" type.
D.
Skirting Trunking: Shall be three-compartment, two piece construction,

manufactured of rigid PVC with matte texture and manufacturer's
standard color and shall be supplied with covers and accessories, including
bends and tees, socket outlet plates, connectors, offsets, etc. Trunking
and system component shall meet UL 94 requirements for non-flammable,
self-extinguishing characteristics. Size shall be as shown on the drawings
or as approved.
E.
Under-Floor Duct: Shall be three-compartment, two piece construction,

manufactured of pre-galvanized sheet steel and finished generally to
comply with BS 4672 Part 2 or equivalent standards and shall be supplied
with covers and accessories, including bends and tees, socket outlet
plates, connectors, offset, etc. Size shall be as shown on the drawings or
as approved.
F.
Duct Banks: Duct banks for underground utilities shall be of rigid PVC
conforming to NEMA TC 6, Type II for direct burial and Type I for
encased burial in concrete for traffic areas. Size shall be as shown on the
drawings or as approved.
G.
Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings, minimum size of conduits for

interior installations shall be 20 mm diameter and for exterior installations
shall be 50 mm diameter.
16050-4
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
2.2
WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES

A.
Cable Jointing:
Cable joints on PVC insulated and sheathed and MICC cables will under
no circumstances be permitted.
If joints are required on XLPE/SWA/PVC mains and submain cables,
these must only be undertaken with the Engineers written permission.
Conductors shall be jointed colour to colour (or number to number).
They shall be tested for condition and insulation resistance before jointing
is commenced. The seals of cables shall not be removed until preparations
for jointing are completed. Joints shall be completed on the same day as
commenced. Straight through joints will not normally be permitted.
Joints in the copper conductors shall be by means of tinned copper
connectors with the conductor firmly butted together and sweated solid
with tinmans solder. Joints in rubber insulated or polyvinylchloride
cables shall be insulated with pure rubber tape served to a thickness equal
to the cable insulation.
Joints in paper insulated cables shall be insulated with high class
impregnated cotton insulating tape served to a thickness equal to the cable
insulation. Approved type cable spreaders shall be used where necessary
to maintain insulation resistance value.
All joint boxes shall be completely filled with insulating compound of a
suitable grade. Each box shall be topped up as necessary to ensure that it
is properly filled.
Joint box compound shall have high dielectric strength and insulation
resistance suitable for the working voltage of the cable. It shall be nonhygroscopic and be suitable in all respects for the type of joint being
made.
Where there is any possibility of the ingress of oil into the sealing box, the
compound used shall be of oil resistant type.
The jointing compounds shall be poured at the correct temperature
specified by the makers. No plug or air vent shall be fitted until all air has
been released from the joint box. Plugs and air vents shall be sealed with
compound after filling.
All cable joints shall be carried out by experienced and authorized cable
jointers only. Contractor to submit biodata of the cable jointers he would
employ along with their experience certificates for approval of the
Engineer.
16050-5
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
B.
Mains Cable Terminations:

Unless otherwise specified, all cable terminations shall be in suitable
sealing boxes and comply with the preceding clause where applicable.
Tails shall be of such cross section as to carry the full rated current of the
cables to which they are connected and shall be VRI, TRS, PVC, or
Varnished Cambric, as specified.
C.
Connections to all other Electrical Equipment:

Connections to electrical accessories and equipment shall only be made
with approved type termination equipment and materials compatible to the
cables used.
Where shrouded clamp type terminations are to be used the cable
insulation shall be removed sufficiently to allow for metal to metal contact
without the bare conductor protruding outside the terminations.
Terminals screws shall be tightened to manufacturers recommended
torque.
Where terminations are to be made onto studs, approved type
compression/solder lugs shall be used. Terminations shall be effectively
shrouded and shall provide protection against direct contact.
2.3
2.4
BOXES AND FITTINGS:

A.
All boxes provided in the wiring or raceway system shall conform to

ANSI-UL 514.
B.
Boxes for ordinary locations or flush installations shall be sheet steel, zinc
or cadmium plated, to meet code requirements. Boxes for flush exterior
installations shall be gasketed and hot-dipped galvanized.
C.
Boxes for exposed locations subject to humid conditions shall be of cast

metal with threaded hubs. Finish shall be either cadmium/zinc electroplate
covered or hot-dip galvanized. Boxes for exposed exterior locations shall
be similar except with gaskets.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
The limit of the work of the Electrical Contractor shall be up to the supply
terminals of the Equipment or device to be supplied by other trades. The
Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for providing the power supply and
wiring/cabling to the equipment or devices of other trades.
2.5
MOTOR CONTROL:
16050-6
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
Motor control shall comply with ANSI/UL 508.
2.6
CONTACT IN MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL DEVICES:

Items such as float switches, pressure switches and auxiliary relays shall be
current and voltage ratings in accordance with NEMA 1C 1-18.20 for Class B
relays. All items shall be for 60 Hz and shall be UL listed.
2.7
ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.
General:
All electric motors, except where otherwise specified shall be of the totally
enclosed fan cooled, induction, weatherproof type for outdoor use and the
drip proof type for indoor use.
Motors shall be of first class workmanship by an approved maker and shall
be wound for the power supply available. Motor windings shall be
insulated with class E materials.
Each motor shall be fitted with 220 volts anticondensation heater of
sufficient rating to maintain the motor windings at a temperature of not
less than 10oC when the motor is at rest. The heater shall be automatically
controlled from the starter to operate only when the motor is not running.
All motors up to 75 KW shall be capable of making 15 starts per hour
with the full load requirements by the method of starting herein specified
and there shall be no limit to this rate of starting. Small motors up to and
including 8 KW rating shall be of assisted start arrangement for star-delta,
stator-rotor etc. as the case may be. Where resistance starters are
installed each such starter resistance equipment shall be provided with
thermal cut-out protection, which shall operate in conjunction with an
overload detecting device in the respective starter where slip ring motors
are installed, the brushes shall be equal and approved standard. The rotor
assembly shall be readily removable from the stator for each of
maintenance.
Slip ring assemblies shall be located at the non-drive end of the motor, i.e.
for vertical motors at the end of the motor remote from the pump unit.
Motors shall be so constructed as to be fully capable of sustaining the
weights of vertical shafting and flywheels where necessary. The power
ratings of all motors shall be sufficient to enable them to drive their
respective machine without overloading under all conditions of starting
and continuous working and their rated output power shall be at lease
10% in excess of the calculated figures required for the maximum duty
conditions.
16050-7
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
All motors shall be completely silent in operation.
The motors shall operate at all loads without undue vibration.
Terminal boxes shall be suitable for the reception of the type of cable
required and shall, as appropriate, include glands, sealing boxes, etc. The
terminal boxes shall be hose proof and of robust construction and shall be
located so as to afford easy access for cable termination and inspection.
All terminals shall be clearly marked and shall be provided with adequately
rated compression or solder type cable lugs. Effective seals shall be
provided for ball and/or roller bearings to prevent ingress of dust and dirt
and escape of lubricating grease. All motors shall be by the same
manufacturer.
Test certificates in triplicate of both routine and
performance tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval within
three weeks of testing. Where requested by the Engineer, the contractor
shall also submit type test certificates in respect of temperature rise and
performance for motors rated less than 11 KW. Motors shall not be
dispatched for works assembly with associated mechanical plant until test
certificates have been approved by the Client.
B.
Test at Manufacturers Works:

All motors shall be subject to routine check tests at the manufacturers
works to demonstrate good working order and electrical and mechanical
soundness of materials and construction.
Motors having rating in excess of 11 KW shall, in addition, be subject to
temperature rise and efficiency tests and provision shall be made by the
contractor for tests on these motors to be witnessed by the Engineer if
required. All rotational temperature rise tests shall be performed with the
motor set up in item normal working position, i.e. either horizontal or
vertical, in accordance with the particular drive application.
C.
Routine Tests:
Winding connections. Check of phase sequence and terminal markings.
Winding resistance. Check d.c. resistance of stator and rotor windings.
No-load Rotational test. To establish soundness of bearings, dynamic
balance of rotor and noise level.
Insulation Resistance Tests. Measurement of insulation resistance of
stator and rotor windings and wiring of anti-condensation heaters and
thermoster protective devices, where fitted.
High Voltage Tests. Test voltages to be applied to stator and rotor
windings, as prescribed by relevant IEC Codes. In the case of motors
16050-8
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
rated above 11 KW, these voltage shall be applied at full load working
temperature.
2.8
MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS

A.
General:
Motor starters and contactors shall conform to relevant IEC codes and
have the following features:
Fused control circuit.
Inherent under voltage release.
Magnetic or thermal overloads on starters only.
Manual stop/start and/or remote control facility.
Integral isolators which shall be fully interlocked with the door of
the enclosure and shall be capable of breaking stalled motor
current.
Contractor to insure type 2 coordination for all starters.
In cases where MICC cables are used starters and contractors shall
have surge diverters connected across the coil.
The contractor shall be responsible for setting all overloads and protective
devices to the recommended or specified values and the filling of dashpots, starter tanks and similar equipment with the recommended grade of
insulating oil. He shall also ensure that the direction of rotation of all
motors is correct for the purpose concerned.
B.
ELECTRODE TYPE LEVEL CONTROLLERS:

Electrode type level controls for the starting and stopping of pumps, etc.
shall comprise fixed electrodes located in the pump sump operating in
conjunction with electronic units detecting changes in conductivity and
relays located in the motor starter panels. Electrode holders shall be of
the waterproof type with cable entry arranged for screwed conduit or
PVC SWA cable as required. Holders shall be rigidly fixed at centres of
not more than 300mm and the covers shall allow for up to 105mm
adjustment of the operating level without requiring alteration of the
electrode length.
Electrodes shall be of galvanized mild steel tube or stainless steel as
required and arranged for easy withdrawal and replacement from the
holders without disconnection of the cables to facilitate cleaning.
Electrode supports with insulated bushes shall be provided where
16050-9
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
necessary to prevent any movement which may cause short circuits
between electrodes and earth. Electronic units and relays shall be of the
plug in type to facilitate replacement and shall be suitable for operation
from a 220 volt 60 Hertz single phase a.c. supply via an HRC type
cartridge fuse.
Sensitivity of the electronic detection units shall be adjustable over a range
of 100 to 20,000 ohms with a switching differential not greater than 5% of
the set point. The open circuit voltage between any electrode and earth
shall not exceed 25 volts a.c.
Relays shall have two independent sets of changeover contacts adequately
rated for the circuits which they control. Failure and restoration of the
mains supply shall not result in a change of state of the relay contacts.
This type of level control shall not be used in locations where the
accumulation of grease or sludge on the electrodes can be sufficient to
affect the sensitivity of detection.
Level control equipment shall for foul sewage pumping stations be of the
float level regulating type incorporating a shock-proof mercury switch
encapsulated in a poly-propylene or similar material, float, hermetically
sealed with a suitable PVC nitrile sheathed cable.
The control circuits shall be operated from a low voltage supply. Suitable
overriding master controls shall be provided to protect all pumps against
dry running for both manual and automatic operating.
2.9
GROUNDING RODS: Refer to Section 16452 - GROUNDING.
2.10
LIGHTING:
A.
Lamps of the proper type, wattage and voltage rating shall be furnished
and installed in each fixture.
B.
Incandescent lamps shall be for 220-volt AC, inside frosted, screw base,;
16A maximum protection, unless otherwise specified.
C.
Fluorescent lamps shall be for 220-volt AC, bi-pin type, with cool white
color characteristics, shall not require starter switches, and shall comply
with ANSI C78.1.
D.
Florescent ballasts shall be electronic ballast , high-power factor
E.
High pressure mercury vapor discharge lamps shall be for 220-volt AC,
screw base,.
F.
Types of lighting fixtures shall be as shown on the drawings.
16050-10
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
G.
2.11
LIGHTING CONTACTORS:
A.
2.12
High Pressure discharge lamps to be provided with capacitor to improve

power factor.
Electrically-held type with silver alloy double break power contacts

capable of continuously carrying, making and breaking any load within the
rating of the contactor without the assistance of auxiliary arching contacts.
Auxiliary arcing contact are not acceptable. All contacts shall be
removable without disturbing line or load wiring. Operating coil shall
function on 60 Hz power; voltage as required. Contractors shall be in
general purpose sheet metal enclosures. Lighting contractors may be
included in the same enclosures as the corresponding panelboard.
PHOTOELECTRIC CELL:
A.
There shall be a detector which reads and translates the intensity of light in
terms of switching on and off. It shall be made of cadmium sulphic cell
which is a semi-conductor devise whose electrical resistance varies with
the intensity of light falling on it.
B.
A snap-action single pole switch shall be controlled by the current passing

through the cell. A heater mounted on a bimetal strip shall be connected
in series with the cell and the two components shall be connected to a
power source. Variation in the resistance of the cell due to changes in
daylight intensity varies the heating effect of the bimetal strip and by
careful calibration the switch-on-point will be selected.
C.
The cell shall be encased in an impact resistant translucent cover to

protect it from damage and ultraviolet rays. The photoelectric cell shall be
completely weatherproof and not affected by moisture vibration or
changes in temperature.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL CONSIDERATION:
A.
The installation shall conform to the applicable provisions of National

Electric Code and National Safety Code.
B.
The drawings indicate the extent and general location and arrangement of
equipment, conduits and wiring.
1.
The Contractor shall study the drawings and details and in

supplement to the above mentioned drawings, all works to be done
shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings. All outlets
and equipment shall be properly located and readily accessible.
16050-11
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
3.2
2.
Lighting fixtures, equipment and outlets shall be located to avoid

interference with mechanical or structural features and
symmetrically located in coordination with ceiling systems.
3.
Major equipment such as switchgear, transformer, etc. shall be

assembled and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
C.
The Contractor shall provide power supply to all electrically powered

equipment or devices as required under other Sections of the
Specifications and/or as shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall be
responsible for power supply cables and wiring up to the power supply
terminals or built-in isolators or disconnect devices (if any) of the
particular equipment or device.
D.
Should the Contractor make equipment substitution or use equipment that

may result in increased loads and changes in feeder and raceway sizes, and
result in larger protective equipment, such changes shall not be considered
an additive change order.
WIRING METHODS:
A.
Conduits:
1.
Conduit system shall be installed in accordance with Articles 346

and 348 of ANSI/NFPA 70.
2.
Minimum size of raceways for branch circuit wiring shall be 20

mm diameter.
3.
Raceways shall be concealed within walls, ceiling and floors where

possible and shall be kept 150 mm away from parallel runs of
flues, steam or hot water pipes.
4.
Raceways shall be supported and secured at intervals of not more

than 2440 mm.
5.
Exposed raceways shall have runs installed parallel or

perpendicular to walls, structural members or intersections of
vertical planes and ceilings.
6.
Field made bends and offsets for steel conduits shall be made with
approved hickey or conduits bending machine.
7.
Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends

or cast fittings.
8.
Deformed raceways shall not be installed.
16050-12
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
B.
9.
Trapped raceways in damp and wet locations shall not be

permitted.
10.
Care shall be taken to prevent the lodgment of plaster, dirt or trash

in raceways, boxes, fittings and equipment during the course of
construction.
11.
Clogged raceways shall be entirely freed of obstructions or shall be

replaced.
12.
Steel conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and

cabinets with locknuts.
13.
Bushing shall be installed on the ends of all steel conduits and shall
be of the insulating type where required by ANSI/NFPA 70. Bell
ends or terminal adapter and bushings shall be installed on the ends
of all PVC conduits.
14.
Raceways crossing expansion joints in concrete slabs shall be

provided with suitable expansion fittings or other suitable means
shall be provided to compensate for the building expansion or
construction.
15.
Wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry shall not be

acceptable as a base for raceways fastenings, nor shall raceways or
pipe straps be welded to steel structures.
16.
Raceways shall be secured by pipe straps or shall be supported by

wall brackets, strap hangers or ceilings trapezes, fastened by wood
screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, expansion
bolts on concrete or brick and machine screws or welded threaded
studs on steel work.
17.
Nail-type nylon anchors or threaded studs, driven in by a powder

charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in
lieu of expansion bolts or machine or wood screws.
18.
Conduits larger than 25 mm shall not be installed inside structural

masonry or slab.
Stubbed Conduits:
1.
Conduits for connection to free standing equipment shall be

provided with a short elbow and an adjustable brass top of
16050-13
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
coupling of brass or bronze threaded inside for plugs, set flush
with the finished floor.
C.
D.
2.
Wiring shall be extended in rigid threaded conduit to equipment

except where required, flexible conduit not exceeding 300 mm
length may be used 150 mm above floor.
3.
Screwdriver operated threaded flush plugs shall be installed in

conduits from which no equipment connections are made.
Flexible Connections of Short Length:

1.
Flexible connections shall be provided for all motors and

equipment subject to vibration or movement.
2.
Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used in all wet locations, or

where motors are installed exposed in mechanical equipment
rooms.
Wires and Cables:

1.
Conductors in raceways shall be thermoplastic insulated copper

unless otherwise specified or indicated.
2.
Wire connectors of insulating materials or solderless pressure

connectors properly taped shall be utilized for all splices where
possible.
3.
Soldered mechanical joints, insulated with tape shall be kept to a

minimum.
4.
Conductor sizes shall not be less than the sized indicated.
5.
All wire joints shall be covered with two thicknesses of insulating

tape, covered with two layers of friction tape. All traps shall be
applied half-wrapped.
6.
Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than 4 mm2 for

power and 2.5 mm2 for lighting except for circuits of more than
30.48 m from panel to load center, 6 mm2 shall be used.
7.
Class 1 remote-control conductors shall be not less than 2.5 mm2

for control wires:
8.
Coding and Identification:

a.
Conductor identification of branch circuits shall be by

color coding. Color coding shall be as follows: Phase A
16050-14
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
= red, Phase B = yellow, Phase C = blue, Neutral = Black,
Ground = green.
Conductors smaller than 16 mm2 must have colored
insulation. Conductors 16 mm2 and larger may be
wrapped with colored tape at all boxes, panels and
switchboards.
E.
b.
Control circuit conductor identification shall be made by

color-coded insulated conductors, plastic coated selfsticking printed markers, permanently attached stamped
metal foil markers or approved equivalent means.
c.
Conductor identification shall be provided within each

enclosure where a tap splice or termination is made.
d.
Control circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly

identified.
e.
Terminal and conductor identification shall match that

shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or
marking shall not be acceptable.
Boxes and Supports:

1.
Boxes shall be provided in the wiring or raceways systems

wherever required for pulling of wires, making
connections and mounting of devices and fixtures.
2.
Boxes for metallic raceways shall be of cast metal hub

type when located in normally wet locations, when surface
mounted on exterior surfaces, in hazardous areas and
when installed exposed up to 2130 mm above exterior
floors and walkways.
3.
Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel or plastic.
4.
Each box shall have the volume required by ANSI/NFPA

70 for the number of conductors enclosed in the box.
5.
Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall not be less than

100 mm except the smaller boxes may be used if required
by the fixture configuration.
6.
Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided

with suitable extension rings or plaster covers, as
required.
16050-15
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
F.
7.
Boxes for use in masonry walls shall be square cornered

tile type or standard boxes having square cornered tile
type covers.
8.
Cast metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes

installed flush with the outside of exterior masonry
surfaces shall be gasketed.
9.
Separate boxes shall be provided of flush or recessed

fixtures when required by the fixture terminal operating
temperature, and fixtures shall be readily removable for
access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided.
In suspended ceilings, all fixture housing shall be
supported properly from structural members.
10.
Anchorage and Support:

a.
Types of fasteners and methods of fastening in

general shall be as specified here-in-before for
conduits.
b.
In overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to

raceways shall not necessarily be separately
supported except where used for fixture support.
Cast metal boxes having threadless connectors and
sheet boxes shall be supported directly from the
building structure or by bar hangers.
c.
Where bar hangers are used, the bar shall be

attached to raceways on opposite sides of the box
and shall be supported with an approved type
fastener not more than 356 mm from the box.
d.
The Contractor shall refer to other drawings for

information concerning depths of reinforcing steel
to avoid conflict when anchoring.
Boxes for Use with Raceways System:

1.
Boxes shall not be less than 38 mm deep except where

shallower boxes required by structural conditions are
approved.
2.
Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall not less
than 100 mm square except that 100 mm x 50 mm boxes
may be used where only one raceway enters the outlet.
16050-16
SECTION 16050
_________________________________________________________________________
G.
Pull Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
3.4
Pull boxes shall not less than the minimum size required
by ANSI/NFPA 70 and shall be constructed of galvanized
steel or cast metal boxes.
Boxes shall be furnished with screw fastened covers.
Where several feeders pass through a common pull box,
the feeders shall be tagged to indicated clearly the
electrical characteristics, circuit number and panel
designation.
Feeders of different voltages must be in separate boxes;
also, signal circuits must be in a separate box from power
circuits.
DEVICE PLATES:
A.
Device plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact
with finished wall surface without use of mats or similar devices.
B.
Plaster fillings shall not be permitted.
C.
Plates shall be installed vertically and with an alignment tolerance of 4 mm.
TESTS:
A.
After the interior wiring system installation is completed, the Contractor

shall conduct an operating test for approval.
B.
The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the

requirements of the specification.
C.
Testing of the grounding system shall be made as specified in Section

16452 EARTHING SYSTEM.
D.
Ground resistance (Megger) tests shall be performed on lighting and

power circuits.
E.
Cable and circuit breaker testing, and testing in general shall be as per the
National Electric Code.
F.
All phase balancing and loading tests shall be accomplished and data of
such tests shall be submitted to the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
16050-17
SECTION 16110
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
_________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
The Contractor shall supply and install a complete conduit system as shown on the
Drawings and as herein specified. The system shall include conduits, fittings
(couplings, bends, boxes, cover plates, reducers, adaptors, etc.) and all necessary
parts to install a complete conduit system.
Conduits and fittings shall be distinctively marked as manufactured for electrical
purposes.
Conduit runs are shown diagrammatically to outline the general routing of the
system. The installation shall be made to avoid interfering with pipes, ducts,
structural members, or other equipment. Should structural or other interferences
prevent the installation of the conduits, or setting of boxes, cabinets, or other
electrical equipment, as indicated on the Drawings, deviations must be approved by
the Engineer, and after approval, shall be made without additional charges. The
number of conduits shall not be less than that indicated on the Drawings.
Conduits and conduit fittings shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure
reliable mechanical protection to the cables/wires contained therein, and shall
withstand the stresses likely to occur during transport, storage and installation. They
shall be marked with the marker's name or trade mark. Marking shall be indelible
and easily legible.
Conduits shall have a minimum 20 mm dia. (outer diameter) size and shall be
adequate for proper and easy wire pulls, and in no case shall the wires occupy
across-sectional area of more than 40 % of the inner conduit cross-section.
The inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be smooth and free from burrs,
flash, and similar defects. Thickness of wall shall be uniform.
The interior and ends of conduit fittings shall have no sharp edges; surface and
corners over which the cables are likely to be drawn shall be smooth and well
rounded.
Conduits and fittings shall have adequate mechanical strength. Conduit when bent or
compressed, or exposed to impact or extreme temperatures, either during or after
installation, shall show no cracks and shall not be deformed to such an extent that
introduction of the cables are likely to be damaged while being drawn in.
Boxes, (junction or pull boxes) shall be of ample capacity as sized as per NEC
requirements.
16110 -1
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES for forming and installing conduit and wireway
systems are to be purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance
with manufacturers instructions.
FIXING: conduits and wireway installations are to be concealed as much as possible.
SIZES of conduits and wireways, not shown on the Drawings, are to be selected in
accordance with the Regulations and in relation to the number and size of
conductors. Minimum size of conduit for all applications it to be 20 mm diameter,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
MECHANICAL CONTINUITY: conduits and wireways are to be effectively joined
together and connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide firm
mechanical assembly. Earthing jumpers are to be installed on steel conduits where
required to ensure effective electrical continuity irrespective of whether a separate
protective earth conductor is required or not.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A
Conduits - Metallic
Shall be constructed from solid drawn mild steel, outside and inside
galvanized.
American rigid conduit shall conform to FSWWC-581 , ANSI C 80-1
UL- 6 with fused zinc coating to inside and outside walls.
and
The galvanized coat of zinc shall be of uniform thickness applied to outside

and inside including the threads.
B
Steel Conduit Accessories

FITTINGS shall be threaded type, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to be specially treated.
Fittings and components are to comply with CEE 23 , BS 4568 Part 2 and BS
31 .
LOCKNUTS for securing conduit to metal enclosure are to be heavy
hexagonal or catellated pattern for fastening.
BUSHINGS for terminating conduits are to be smooth rounded brass ring.
MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS including reducers, chase nipples, three
piece unions, split couplings and plugs are to be standard fittings designed and
manufactured for the particular application.
16110 -2
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
Each conduit shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects, cut
square and taper reamed, furnished with coupling in standard lengths,
threaded each end.
Couplings shall be applied at one end of each conduit and color coded
plastic threaded protectors to the other end. The interior threaded surface of
each coupling shall be galvanized to ensure 100% galvanic protection on all
surfaces.
The galvanized coating shall be of such quality and uniformity that a sample
of the galvanized conduit will not show a fixed deposit of copper after four
immersions of dips in a standard copper sulphate solution.
The galvanized coating on the conduit shall be sufficiently elastic to
prevent cracking or flaking when a sample of finished conduit is bent 90 o
at a minimum temperature of 15 oC.
SLEEVES THROUGH OUTSIDE WALLS: shall be cast iron, with end and
intermediate integral flanges, and internal diameter larger than diameter of
through-conduit. Length is to correspond to wall thickness. Space between
sleeve and conduit is to be packed with oakum to within 50 mm of both faces
of wall, remainder of sleeve packed with plastic compound or lead, held in
place by heavy escutcheon plates bolted at both ends to flanged ends of
sleeve. Alternatively, sleeves are to be with cable or conduit bolted pressure
sealing.
SUPPORTS AND HANGERS shall be galvanized malleable cast iron straps
or structural steel sections with hot dip galvanized bolts and nuts.
EXPANSION JOINT FOR EMBEDDED STEEL CONDUITS TYPE A:
watertight, flexible conduit with end fittings to receive fixed conduits. Length
is to allow movement within range of joint and is not to be less than 20 times
diameter of conduit. Conduit is to be covered with thick rubber tubing with 5
mm minimum gap all around tube. Bonding jumber with earth clamp is to
electrically connect both sides of joint. Fitting is to the approval of the
Engineer.
EXPANSION JOINT FOR EXPOSED STEEL CONDUITS TYPE B:
sleeve with fittings to permit telescoping of one conduit into sleeve. Movable
conduit is to be fitted with watertight bushing. Joint is to be weatherproof, of
galvanized malleable iron or steel. Bonding jumper with earth clamp is to
electrically connect both sides of joint. Expansion fitting is to the approval of
the Engineer.
EXPANSION JOINT FOR EXPOSED STEEL CONDUITS TYPE C:
PVC sheathed flexible steel conduit terminating in pull boxes and securely
fixed on each side of structural expansion joint. Bonding jumber is to
electrically connect both sides of joint.
16110 -3
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
C
Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT)

Electric metallic tubes shall be in conformity with FSWW-C-563 , ANSI C80.3
and UL 797 , hot dip galvanized zinc coated.
EMT fittings shall be constructed of plated malleable iron or steel,
compression type and shall be similar to FSW-F-408 .
Conduits & Fittings - Non-Metallic PVC

Non-metallic conduits shall be heavy duty type, rigid PVC flame resistant
complying with SASO 255 .
Light duty rigid grey conduit and orange conduit of all types are strictly
prohibited.
Flexible Conduit - Metallic

Flexible conducts shall be formed from continuous length of spirally wound,
interlocked zinc-coated strip steel.
Flexible metal conduct shall conform to FSWW-C566 and UL 1 (American
type) . Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall be constructed of single strip,
continuous, interlocked and double wrapped steel, galvanized inside and
outside, coated with liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
conforming to UL 360 .
Flexible Conduit -Non Metallic

Only heavy gauge conduit, corrugated type, made of hard PVC, pliable with
additional plain coating and grey colour shall be approved conduits shall
strictly confirm either to BS 4607 Part 3 and IEC 423 .
Boxes - Metallic
Boxes shall be constructed of cast metal as specified hereinafter.
Boxes used for hanging fixtures shall be suitable for ceiling roses. Boxes for
installation in concrete shall be concrete tight. Shallow boxes shall not be
used unless building construction is such that it is impossible to use standard
depth boxes.
Boxes shall be constructed of feraloy cad/zinc electroplated with aluminium
cellulose lacquered.
Blank covers shall be constructed of sheet steel with gasket and stainless
steel screws except for damp and wet locations.
16110 -4
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
In damp and wet locations blank covers shall be constructed from cast
feraloy with gasket and stainless steel screws.
Floor boxes shall be water tight one piece cast iron color- coated inside and
out for additional corrosion resistance. Treaded steel cover shall be electrogalvanized. Boxes shall have adjusting screws.
H
Boxes - Non-Metallic
Boxes shall be standard PVC as specified under Conduits & Fittings
All boxes shall be provided with grounding (earth) terminals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A
Raceway applications and installation :

Rigid heavy gauge PVC conduit is to be used generally in underground
installations and in screed below pavement and in duct banks.
Conduits embedded in ceiling slab, in walls and underfloor shall be nonmetallic type.
Conduits exposed above false ceiling shall be EMT type.
Exposed conduits other than above false ceiling shall be rigid steel type.
Heavy gauge steel flexible conduits shall be used in movable partitions, and
from outlet boxes to recessed lighting fixtures and the final 60 cm of
connection to control items subject to movement or vibration.
Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used for final 60 cm of connection to
motor and in lieu of flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of the
following conditions.
1.
Exterior location. Pump rooms .
2.
Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to

accumulate.
3.
Corrosive atmosphere.
4.
Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.
All conduit work and plastering shall be complete before wires are pulled in
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Conduit shall be plugged with
cork and boxes covered appropriately to avoid filling with plaster.
16110 -5
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
Conduit runs between outlets shall not contain more than three quarter bends
or equivalent. The maximum run between two outlets shall not exceed 25
meters for straight runs and 10 meters for runs with one or more bends. Pull
(draw in) boxes shall be provided otherwise whether so indicated on the
Drawings or not. Location of pull boxes shall be approved by the Engineer.
Conduits shall be installed without causing any damage to the structural
members.
Horizontal and cross runs in buildings partitions or side walls shall be
avoided.
All bends shall be carefully made to prevent distortion of the circular crosssection. Bends made on site in conduits shall have an inside radius of not less
than nine diameters.
Where bends of less than nine diameters are necessary, standard factory
elbows shall be used: however the conduit size chosen shall be such as to
permit a cable-bending radius within the factory elbow of at least eight times
the cable diameter.
Conduits in slabs shall be installed as close to the middle of the concrete slabs
as practicable without disturbing the reinforcement. Conduits shall be placed
between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing steel. The outside
diameter shall not exceed one third of the slab thickness, otherwise the
Contractor shall use more than one conduit. Conduits shall be placed not
closer than three diameters on centers in order to ensure proper conduit bond.
Conduits in slabs shall be placed parallel to the main reinforcement steel in
the slab.
Top of any conduit in slabs shall be at least 2 cm below the finishes floor
surface, unless otherwise indicated or authorized.
Conduits in slabs running parallel to beam axis shall not run above beams.
Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or at right angles to walls and
ceiling beams. All changes in direction shall be made as far as possible with
approved bends, elbows, and pull boxes. The spacing between parallel runs
shall be uniform throughout. Unless otherwise indicated conduits shall be
held securely in place by standard factory spacer bar saddles, spaced not more
than 1.5 , 2.0 and 2.4 meters for 20 mm, 25 mm and 32 mm and larger conduit
sizes respectively for metallic conduits and at 1 meter for non-metallic
conduits.
Unless otherwise indicated, raceways exposed above false ceilings shall be
supported from the slab above the ceiling in the same manner as exposed
raceways. Raceways shall not be supported from false ceiling supports.
16110 -6
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
Couplings, expansion couplings, strap saddles, spacer bar saddles, spring clip
saddles, conduit clips, adaptors, etc. shall all be standard factory conduit
accessories.
Flexible metallic conduits shall be used only for connections to motors, or to
other equipment subject to vibration or adjustment or to make connections to
lighting fixtures in false ceilings. Each connection shall contain at least one
quarter bend so that no vibration can be transmitted behind the flexible
connection.
In damp and wet locations all couplings, expansion coupling, strap saddles,
spacer bar saddles, spring clip saddles, conduits clips, screws, adaptors shall
be corrosion proof, approved for use in damp and wet locations.
In damp and wet locations the entire conduiting system, including boxes,
fittings, panelboards etc.. shall be mounted so that there is at least 7mm air
space between it and the wall supporting surface.
All conduits shall be carefully cleaned before and after installation. All ends
shall be reamed free from burrs, and inside surfaces shall be free from all
imperfections likely to injure the cable.
After installations of each complete new conduit run, the run shall be snaked
with a band to which shall be attached an approved tube cleaner equipped
with an approved cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85% of the
nominal diameter of the conduit. All conduits through which the mandrel
will not pass shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
All field cuts in conduits shall be square, and cut ends shall be filed and shall
have burrs removed. An insulating bushing shall be installed on each end of
conduit, unless the connector is designed to prevent contact with the cut end.
All connections shall be mechanically strong and tight, and made up properly
with approved connectors. No running threads shall be permitted.
B
Installation Of Boxes
Boxes of ample capacity shall be provided at
system and as required by the Specifications.
every junction of conduit
All boxes shall be securely fastened.

Blank plates shall be installed on outlet boxes in which no apparatus is
installed, or the appartus installed does not provide a suitable cover for box.
Device boxes shall be used for all wiring devices.
Non-metallic boxes shall be used only for concealed conwork, and for
conduit work above false ceiling.
16110 -7
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
Exposed boxes for switches, socket outlets and other devices shall be cast
metal boxes.
Cast metal boxes shall be installed in such a manner that the conduit
connections and the gasketed cover are dusttight. All unused openings shall
be closed with pipe plugs and compound.
Boxes for similar equipment shall be mounted at uniform height within the
same or similar area. Mounting shall be as shown on the Drawings.
Device box shapes and sizes shall be determined by the type and size of wiring
devices for which they serve.
Boxes fixed inside false ceiling shall be provided with mounting brackets for
rigid fixing to structure members or other means of support.
C
Sleeves
Sleeves shall be provided for exposed conduit or cables passing through
interior floor slabs and walls. All openings shall be sealed with mastic
compound. The compound shall not cause any corrosion or harmful effects to
the conduit. Sleeves passing through floor slabs shall be flush with the bottom
of the slab, extend approximately 3cm above the surface of the floor and be
watertight between sleeves and floor slab.
Sleeves passing through exterior walls and slabs shall be wall entrance seals of
watertight construction. They shall be watertight between slab and sleeve, and
between sleeve and conduit and cable.
These wall entrance seals shall be of malleable iron with black paint finish and
PVC sleeve, with a watertight sealing gland.
Sealing gland design shall be such that they may be tightened any time after
installation. Wall entrance seals shall have oversized sleeves of proper length
to position the sealing-gland housing with the wall faces.
After the cable has been pulled through the duct, a seal shall be made round it,
within the duct with a bituminous mastic compound, making the seal
watertight.
Adhesives And Joints

Conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilising the appropriate components
as supplied by the conduit manufacturer.
Permanent adhesives to produce a rigid watertight joint shall be used with
standard couplers and accessories.
16110 -8
SECTION 16110
_________________________________________________________________________
A flexible (non-hardening) adhesive shall be used where expansion facilities
are required.
E
Expansion Joints
Expansion coupling shall be provided at every 6 meter run of exposed
conduit work, at joints or as required to compensate for thermal expansion
and contraction of both exposed and embedded conduits.
Conduit entries of fittings shall be so designed that a reliable joint can be
made between the conduit and the fittings.
Conduits and fittings shall be BS tested or approved equal.
All accessories and fittings such as bends, straps, double straps, junction
boxes, bushes, etc. shall be provided as required.
END OF SECTION
16110 -9
SECTION 16111
CABLE TRAYS
_____________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
B.
Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this

section:
1.
"Basic Electrical Requirements"
2.
"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods"
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes metallic cable trays. Types of cable trays in this
section include the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
The following Division Section contains
requirements that relate to this section.
1.
2.
1.3
Ventilated (perforated) bottom.

Ladder.
Division 7 section "Fire Stopping".

Division 16 section "Supporting Devices".
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections:
1.
2.
3.
Product Data: Manufacturer' catalogues and data for cable tray

products and accessories.
Shop Drawings: Layout floor plans and elevations showing cable tray
system. Designate components and accessories including clamps,
brackets, hanger rods, splice plates connectors, expansion joint
assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. Show accurately scaled
components and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment. Show tray
types, dimensions, and finishes.
Factory Test Reports: Certified copies of factory test reports
performed in conformance with Standard approved on cable trays of
types and size specified for this project.
16111 -1
SECTION 16111
CABLE TRAYS
_____________________________________________________________________
4.
5.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Field Test Reports: in compliance with "Field Quality Control" Article

of this section.
Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and maintenance
Manual".
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from
a single manufacturer.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of cable tray with other installations.
1.
Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit

field conditions and as approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS :
Subject to compliance with requirements, the manufacturer must have a sound
experience in the field of cable trays manufacturing for not less than ten
years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied
equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been
2.2
CABLE TRAYS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A.
Cable tray systems shall be of indicated types, sizes, and standard

classes and shall be complete with manufacturer's recommended
covers, barrier strips, dropouts, fittings, conduit adaptors, hold-down
devices, grommets, and blind ends as required and indicated.
B.
Cable tray products shall have rounded edges and smooth surfaces.
C.
Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, with splice

plates, bolts, nuts and washers for connecting units; capable of
supporting concentrated loads of 90kg at any point, over and above
cable load.
D.
Provide cable tray covers, where indicated; construct of metal and

finishes which mate and match cable trays.
E.
Provide cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding

jumpers, as indicated and as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
16111 -2
SECTION 16111
CABLE TRAYS
_____________________________________________________________________
F.
Galvanizing: is to be in accordance with BS EN 1461, applied after

fabrication.Hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
G.
Sizes: trays and ladders are to be standard metric sizes, 300, 600 and
900 mm wide, and at least 2,44 m length of section . Size of tray or
ladder is to be determined by number and sizes of cables in accordance
with the Regulations and/or as shown on the Drawings. Tray or ladder
is to have strength and rigidity to provide support for cables contained
within. Deflection between supports is not to exceed 1/350 under full
loading capacity.
Medium duty tray shall be used when not exposed to physical damage.
Heavy duty tray shall be used in trenches, electrical/ mechanical
rooms,
on roofs.Cables trays on roofs shall be covered.
Medium duty tray : min thickness , 1 mm up to 30 cm width.
1.5 mm up to 90 cm width.
Heavy duty tray : min thickness , 1.2 mm up to 30 cm width
1.5 mm up to 60 cm width
2 mm up to 90 cm width.
H.
2.3
MATERIALS AND FINISHES:

A.
2.4
2.5
2.6
Earthing Connector: for trays or ladders, provide earthing connector

on each coupling between adjacent sections.
Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized

after fabrication.
CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES:

A.
Covers: Solid type, of same materials and finished as cable trays.
B.
Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes and finishes as cable trays.
SUPPORTS AND CONNECTOR:

A.
Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers shall

be as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
B.
Bolts and screws shall be cadmium plated or electrolytically

galvanized.
FASTENERS FOR SUPPORTS:

A.
Fasteners to connect cable tray supports to the building structure shall

be as follows:
B.
Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

16111 -3
SECTION 16111
CABLE TRAYS
_____________________________________________________________________
2.7
C.
Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.
D.
Powder-Driven Threaded Studs:

specifically for the intended service.
Heat-treated steel, designed
FIRE STOPPING:
A.
General : Materials shall be UL listed and labeled and FM approved

for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers.
B.
Sleeves: Schedule 40, welded, black steel pipe sleeves. Sizes as

indicated or minimum NEC size for cable or cable group to be
installed.
C.
Sealing Fittings: Suitable for sealing cables in sleeves or core drilled

holes.
D.
Two-Part Sealant: Formed-in-place sealant as specified in paragraph

"Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers" in Division 16 Section 16050 , "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS:

A.
Install cable trays in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written

instruction.
B.
Remove burrs and sharp edges of cable trays.
C.
Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and

installation of supports.
D.
Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be

adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor
of at least four or the calculated load plus 90 kg , whichever is greater
spacing of supports is not to exceed 1.5 m.
E.
Installation of supports shall be in accordance with cable tray

manufacturer's written instruction and recommendations.
F.
Fastening Supports: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten cable tray

supports securely to the building structure as specified in Division 16
Section "Supporting Devices".
G.
Support at Connections to Equipment: Where cable trays connect to

equipment, provide flanged fittings fastened to the tray and to the
16111 -4
SECTION 16111
CABLE TRAYS
_____________________________________________________________________
equipment. Support the tray separately. Do not carry the weight of the
tray on the equipment enclosure.
3.2
H.
Thermal Contraction and Expansion: Install expansion connectors in

cable tray runs that exceed the following length: Steel Tray: 52.5 m
(175 feet),and on building expansion joints.
Spacing and gap settings for expansion connectors shall not exceed
recommendations of approved applicable standards.
I.
Direction Changes : Make changes in direction of cable tray with

standard cable tray fittings.
J.
Locate cable tray

above piping except as required for tray
accessibility and as otherwise indicated.
K.
Firestopping: Where cable trays penetrate fire and smoke barriers

including walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings, install fire-stopping at
penetrations after cables are installed.
L.
Sleeves For Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables
through firestopped cable tray penetrations of fire/smoke barriers.
M.
Working Space: Install cable trays with sufficient space to permit

access for installing cables.
N.
Barriers: Where trays carry conductors of different systems, such as

power, communications, and data processing, or different insulation
levels, use separate cable trays. In case of absolute necessity, where an
Engineer's approval is required install barriers to separate the systems.
GROUNDING
A.
3.3
WARNING SIGNS:
A.
3.4
Electrically ground cable trays and ensure continuous electrical

conductivity of cable tray system. Use tray as an equipment ground
conductor for itself only, not for connected equipment.
After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs, on

or in proximity to cable trays, where easily seen by occupants of space.
FIELD TESTING:
A.
Earthing: Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding

and grounding connections.
1.
Furnish equipment, including jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated

indicating scales required for reliable testing. Obtain the Engineer's
approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90 percent
16111 -5
SECTION 16111
CABLE TRAYS
_____________________________________________________________________
of rated proof-load for fastener. If fastening fails test, replace fastener
and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
3.5
CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR:

A.
Upon completion of installation of cable trays, inspect trays, fittings,

and accessories. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair
damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B.
Galvanized Finish:
Repair damage with a zinc-rich paint
recommended by the tray manufacturer.
C.
PVC or Paint Finish: Repair damage with matching touch-up coating

recommended by the tray manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
16111 -6
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
This section of the specification covers the provision , installation and

testing of MV cables.
1.2
The latest revision of the following codes and standards shall be applicable
for cables covered in this SPECS. In case of any conflict, the
manufacturer / vendor may propose cables conforming to one group of
codes and standards quoted hereunder without jeopardizing the
requirements.
1.3
Applicable Codes & Standards:

IEC-60228
Conductors of Insulated Cables.
IEC-60502- 2 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories

from 1 kV up to 30kV (Um = 36kV).
1.4
IEC-60811
Common Test Methods of Insulating and Sheathing

Materials of Electric Cables.
IEC-60229
Tests on cable over sheath.
SUBMITTALS:
1.4.1 Dimensional cross-sectional drawings of each cable along with
technical data and
catalogues shall be submitted by the
supplier to facilitate evaluation of submittal.
1.4.2 Type test certificates and reports.
1.4.3 Details of manufacturing and test programs
1.4.4 Factory test reports
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the statutory
laws having jurisdiction and local codes of practice applicable to
the job site.
1.5.2 Conform to applicable codes and regulations .
1.5.3 Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of
electrical wire and cable products of type and sizes required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
16121-1
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
1.5.4 IEC Compliance: Comply with IEC requirements as applicable to
construction, insulation and colour coding of electrical wires and
cables.
The supplier shall guarantee the cables against all the defects
arising out of faulty design or workmanship, or of defective
material for a period of two (2) years from the date of delivery.
1.6
PACKING AND SHIPPING:

1.6.1 Packing and shipping of the cable shall conform to the following:
a) The cable ends shall be sealed with a water-proof, heat
shrinkable end cap. With adhesive type sealing compound.
Cable ends shall be properly secured to the reel.
b) The cable shall be delivered without splices, on standard sized
returnable
Reel of sturdy construction properly packed and lagged
externally to prevent possible damage to the cable during the
transportation. Wood lagging shall also be secured with steel
straps to provided physical protection for the cable during
transit and during customary storage and handling operations.
c) The minimum diameter of the drum of the shipping reel shall
not be less
then the minimum bending diameter of the power cable.
1.7
REEL MARKINGS
1.7.1 Cable reels/drums shall be marked in legible and indelible letters
giving the following particulars:
a) Cable voltage and conductor material and size and number of
cores.
b) Type of insulation.
c) Length and weight of cable on reel.
d) Manufacturers name and country of origin.
e) Year of manufacture.
16121-2
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 -PRODUCT
2.1
GENERAL:
The power cable shall meet or exceed the requirements of this
specification in all respects.
2.2
DESIGN CRITERIA:
2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, the cable shall confirm to IEC 605022
2.2.2 The power cable shall be designed for service conditions relevant
to each site.
2.2.3 Cable design shall facilitate heat shrink, cold shrink or pre-molded
joints and terminations. This requirement shall include the use of
an extruded inner covering under armor where applicable.
2.2.4 The conductor, semi conducting layer, the insulation and the
insulation semi conducting layer shall be a triple extrusion process.
2.3
MATERIALS:
2.3.1 Conductor: The conductor shall be uncoated annealed copper as
per IEC-60228 , and shall be round, compacted and stranded. The
conductor size, shape and material shall be as specified in
Technical Data Schedule.
2.3.2 Conductor semi-conducting Screening: Conductors of the cables
shall be screened. The conductor screen shall consist of an
extruded black semi-conducting material compatible with the
insulation of the conductor and shall have an allowable operating
temperature equal to or higher than the insulation. The outer
surface of the conductor shield shall be cylindrical and shall be
firmly bonded to the insulation. The extruded shield shall be easily
removable from the conductor.
2.3.3 Insulation: The insulation shall be extruded solid dielectric crosslinked polyethylene (XLPE) complying with the appropriate
requirements specified in Section 6.1 of IEC-60502- 2.
The nominal insulation thickness shall be as specified in IEC60502- 2, Table 6. The cross linking process shall not expose the
material to water or steam.
The average insulation thickness shall not be less than the specified
nominal value.
16121-3
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
The minimum thickness at any point shall not fall below the
nominal value by more than 01.mm + 10% of nominal value.
2.3.4 Insulation Semi conducting Screening:
Core insulation of the cables shall be screened. The insulation
semi-conducting screen shall consist of an extruded black semiconducting material applied.
The extruded insulation semi conducting screen shall be easily
strippable without damaging the insulation, leaving no conducting
material that cannot readily be removed. An insulation screen that
requires heat for removal shall not be supplied.
2.3.5 Metallic Screening:
All cores with semi-conducting insulation screening shall have a
supplementary copper wire screen helically applied in intimate
contact with the non-metallic semi-conducting screening.
A copper tape counter helix shall be applied over the copper
wires. The screen size shall be as given below excluding copper
tape.
16 mm2 for up to and including 70 mm2 core.

35 mm2 for sizes in excess of 70 mm2 core.
The minimum size of copper tape binder shall be 0.1 x 15 mm2

2.3.6 Inner Coverings and Assembly of Cores.
For three cores Cables:
An extruded inner covering shall be provided over the cores
assembly. The metallic screens of the cores shall be in contact
with each other.
2.3.7 Inner Covering and Fillers Requirements
The inner coverings and fillers shall be of materials suitable for the
operating temperature of the cable and compatible with the
insulation. The fillers shall be non-hygroscopic. The inner
covering materials shall be PE compound.
2.3.8 Armor :
For Armored cables, single wire galvanized steel shall be provided
over the inner covering. Nominal diameter shall conform to IEC
60502- 2, Table 10, and minimum diameter shall not be less than
90% of nominal value.
2.3.9 Outer Sheath
The outer sheath material shall be red PVC type ST2, as per IEC0502- 2. The nominal thickness of outer sheath shall be as per ICE60502- 2. Minimum thickness at any point shall not be less than
80% of nominal value.
16121-4
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
2.4
CORE IDENTIFICATION
For three core cables: Red, Yellow and Blue identifying tapes shall be
used, and insulation shall not be colored.
2.5
FABRICATION
2.5.1 The conductor shield, the cross-linked polyethylene insulation and
the outer semi conductor shall be extruded by the triple extrusion
method as given in clause 2.2.4.
2.5.2 The power cable shall be free of material and manufacturing
defects, which would prevent it form meeting the requirements of
this specification.
2.6
MARKING
2.6.1 The jacket for all cable shall be marked by embossing at interval
not exceeding one meter with the following minimum information:
a) The manufacturers name or trademark.
b) Voltage designation (In English).
c) Type of insulation, XLPE (in English)
d) Conductor size and material (in Arabic and English).
e) Year of manufacture (in Arabic and English).
f)
Cumulative length at every one meter with the highest length
marked on the outer end of the cable.
2.7 .
TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE 15 KV TO 36 KV XLPE POWER

CABLES:
Description
Specified
Values
Design and Construction Requirements

1.
Reference Manufacturing Standard
2.
Max. Permissible Continuous Conductor Temp

(oC)
Max. Short Circuit Temperature (oC)
3.
4.
6.
Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. of Inner Covering

(oC).
Max. Permissible Cont. Temp. of Outer Sheath
(oC)
Rated Voltage (kV)
7.
Number of Cores
8.
Conductor Material
5.
IEC-60502- 2
90
250
*
*
15 kV
3
Cu
16121-5
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
9.
Shaper of Conductor
Round
10.
Conductor Cross-Section (mm2)
11.
Insulation Material
12.
Nominal Thickness of Insulation (mm)
13.
14.
Minimum Thickness of Copper Tape and Width

(mm)
Inner Covering Material
15.
Core Identification (Red, Yellow, Blue)
16.
Thickness of Outer Sheath (mm)
17.
System Short Circuit for one Second (kA)
18.
Yes
19.
Maximum Partial discharge at 1.5 times rated

voltage, 10 PC
Meets Spark Test requirement for jacket
20.
Meets all Test requirements of IEC-60502- 2
Yes.
As shown on
SLD
XLPE
As per IEC
0.1 x 15
PE
Yes
As per IEC
21 for 15 kV
Yes
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
Directly buried cable shall be laid underground as shown on the Drawings and
as herein specified.
Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall be excavated to
approved formations and dimensions. Trenches shall have vertical sides and
shall be close timbered and strutted where necessary to prevent subsidence.
All unsuitable excavated material shall be removed from site.
All cables laid in the same trench shall be placed in the same horizontal plane
leaving a space of at least 7.5 cm except as otherwise shown on the Drawings
and specified hereinafter.
Cable trench depth shall be as shown on layout drawings, with minimum depth
of 100 cm for a single layer of MV cables unless otherwise indicated on
drawings.
High tension cables shall, where possible, be laid in separate trenches.
Otherwise a space of at least 50 cm shall be left between these cables and any
other cable unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
Direct buried cables shall be laid in a clean soft sand bedding with nominal
depth of 100 mm below cables and at least 100 mm above the top of cables.
16121-6
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
Bedding shall be of clean small-grained sand or equivalent, free of stones and
other material liable to damage the cables.
After the cables have been laid, the trenches shall be backfilled in 150 mm
thick layers which shall be well watered and rammed and consolidated.
Backfill containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large/sharp angular
material, or corrosive material shall not be placed in an excavation where
materials may damage ducts, cables or other substructures, or prevent adequate
compaction of fill or contribute to corrosion of ducts, cables or other
substructures.
Trench filling shall be well-watered and compacted to obtain highest possible
thermal conductivity and to avoid cavities in the trench-top covering following
any settling of the soil.
The surface of refilled trenches shall be temporarily reinstated in a thoroughly
safe condition until complete consolidation of the soil is achieved.
Direct buried cables shall be protected by suitable concrete cable covers tiles,
complete with marking indicating the presence of electrical cable Covers shall
be laid a nominal 100 mm above the top layer of cables throughout their full
length. Covers shall extend to full width of cables laid, giving an overlap of
at least 50 mm, beyond outer cables.
A red PVC strip marked 'DANGER' and as specified in the
specification shall be installed 100 mm above cable protection covers.
design
Adequate guarding and/or fencing shall be provided to all excavations for the
protection and safety of the public, traffic and adjacent properties.
Cables shall be laid direct from drums.
Sufficient number of rollers shall be provided to avoid twisting of cable on its
longitudinal axis during the pulling operation.
Rollers shall be placed as close as possible to avoid abrasion to the cable
serving.
If power driven cable pulling is employed, it shall be by bond pulling method
using steel carrier wire.
Cable laying operations shall be carried out with all care and attention, to
ensure that no damage to the sheath, armour or its serving is caused during
the process. The ends of cross linked polyethylene cables shall be capped to
prevent ingress of moisture into the filler or other hygroscopic elements of
cable. The caps shall remain intact during transport and laying operations.
All cable or armour shall have links to earth to enable testing of sheath.
Earth resistance shall not be greater than 10 ohms.
16121-7
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
Cable screens shall be solidly bonded to earth at each end of the route.
Bonding leads shall be of sufficient cross section to carry the maximum short
circuit current.
3.2
TESTING
3.2.1 General
3.2.1.1 All cable shall be tested in accordance with the latest
standards and as specified herein. The supplier shall
provide all test results for review and acceptance by
supervising agency.
3.2.1.2 The full range of routine, special and type tests specified
in IEC-60505- 2 shall be carried out as applicable.
3.2.1.3 Routine and / or special tests shall be carried out in the
factory. Type test reports and certificate from an
independent testing laboratory shall be submitted to
supervising agency.
3.2.1.4 Sheath of all cables shall be spark tested as per IEC60229 .
3.2.2 . Routine Tests
The following routine tests shall be carried out on each
manufactured length of cable.
3.2.2.1 Electrical Resistance of Conductors:
Resistance measurement shall be made on all conductors
of each cable length submitted to routine tests. Resistance
values shall be in accordance with IEC-60228 .
3.2.2.2 Partial Discharge Test:
The partial discharge test shall be carried out in
accordance with IEC-60885- 3 The magnitude of the
discharge at 1.73 Uo shall not exceed 10 pC.
3.2.2.3 Voltage Test:
The power frequency test voltage shall be 38KV. Values
for single phase test voltage are given below:
Rated Voltage
Test Voltage
15 (17.5) kV
38 kV (15 minutes)
If, for three-core cables, the voltage test is carried out

with a three phase transformer, the test voltage between
the phases shall be 1.73 times the values given above.
16121-8
SECTION 16121
MV CABLES
________________________________________________________________________
3.2.3 Special Tests

3.2.3.1 Conductor examination shall be in accordance with IEC60228 .
3.2.3.2 Dimensional check shall be in accordance with IEC60502- 2.
3.2.3.3 Hot set test for XLPE insulation, as per IEC-60502- 2.
3.2.3.4 Hi-Pot test should be performed on site at 38kV for 15
minutes. Leakage currents to be recorded
END OF SECTION
16121-9
SECTION 16250
LV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
accessories and materials required for the installation of LV Main Switchboards in
accordance with attached specifications and drawings.
1.2

and products:
1. SASO 1609
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear

assemblies-Part 1 : Type tested and partially type tested
assemblies
IEC 60439- 1
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assembliesPart 1 : Type tested and partially type tested assemblies
IEC 60068- 2-11 Basic environmental testing proceduresPart 2 : Tests- test Ka : Salt mist.
IEC 60068- 2-30 Basic environmental testing proceduresPart 2 : Tests- test Db And guidance : Damp heat.
IEC 60529
QUALITY ASSURANCE
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed
switchboards.
3. ISO certification.
D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of LV switchboards for
not less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already
16250-1
SECTION 16250
LV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
___________________________________________________________________________
1.4
SUBMITTAL
provided.
C. Test Reports:
1.5
COORDINATION
installation.
1.6

B. Store switchboards in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory
16250-2
SECTION 16250
LV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
___________________________________________________________________________
switchboard internal components, enclosure and finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
GENERAL
A. The following specifications apply to electrical distribution switchboard fixed type,
in compliance with standard IEC 60439- 1.
B. Extensions to the low voltage electrical switchboards shall be possible on either side
(right or left) with the possibility of connection of a busduct to the main incomer
ACB.
2.2
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC
A. The switchboards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
1. Rated voltage
1000 V three-phase.
2. Rated operating voltage 690V
3. Frequency
60 Hz.
4. Insulated level
2.5 kV- 60 Hz, 1min
8 kV-1,2/50s.
5. Busbar rated current
As shown on the drawings.
6. Short-circuit current
7. Degree of protection (IP) As shown on the drawings.
2.3
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. The switchboard shall be suitable for operations at a height of 2000 meters or less
above sea level.
B. The switchboards shall be capable of operating normally within the following
temperature range
+ 40 C
-5C
C. Manufacturer shall declare weather switchboard is able to operate in air temperature
higher than + 40 C and if current derating is necessary.
2.4
CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION

A. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall comply with standard IEC 60068.2.30
(hot and damp climates) and with standard IEC 60068.2.11 (salt mist).
B. The low voltage switchboard shall have a permissible symmetrical short circuit
current up to short circuit current shown on the drawings for 1 second. The busbars
shall be designed for mounting on insulated supports that are sufficient in number to
16250-3
SECTION 16250
LV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
___________________________________________________________________________
accept the electro-dynamic forces resulting from the flow of the peak asymmetrical
short circuit current.
C. The low voltage switchboard shall have an earthing circuit including a bar that can be
removed for isolation purposes during the necessary insulation measurements
(removal of the bar shall require a tool)
D. The switchboard shall be suitable for front or rear connections.
E. Cable entry shall be via the bottom or the top.
F. The low voltage switchboard shall not be higher than 2200 mm.
G. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall have power closing fixed type air circuit
Air circuit breaker for 1000 A and above, withdrawable type for 1200A and above
with full coordination with BMS ( Control and Monitorin,g breaker as incomer and
moulded case circuit breakers as outgoing branches if less than 1000 A. It shall be
provided with an electronic monitoring device to measure and record currents,
voltages,frequency, active and reactive power, power factor, maximum demand
H. Natural ventilation shall make it possible for the Switchboard components to operate
with in the recommended temperature ranges.
I. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall have small depths, thus optimizing layout
in electrical rooms.
J. The system shall make it possible to implement fixed or withdrawable distribution
and motor control sections, positioned side by side, which together form an assembly
referred to as an electrical switchboard.
K. Selection of switchboard and motor control center components shall be made in
compliance with standard IEC 60947 and related specification in the contract
documents.
L. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall be made up of identified functional
volumes including the busbar compartment, switchgear and control gear component
compartment, connection compartment and auxiliaries compartment.
1. The different busbar shall be the main busbars, distribution busbars and auxiliary
busbars.
2. The busbars shall be made of electrolytic copper.
3 . The compartment shall be located inside a metal enclosure with walls providing
protection against direct contact with live parts and guaranteeing a degree of
protection (IP) requested. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type,
protection code IP 42 for indoor installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations,
in accordance with IEC 144.
4 . CONSTRUCTION: sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick for cabinet/box and
minimum 2 mm thick for trim or trim and door. Fronts are to be single or twin
covers to shield circuit breakers, terminals and live ends.
M. Sheet metal elements in the immediate proximity of high currents shall be of
aluminum.
16250-4
SECTION 16250
LV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
___________________________________________________________________________
Q. The switchboard shall be suitable for installation side by side and back to back and
capable of receiving lateral ducts for busbar, cables and terminals.
R. The switchboard cover panel shall be removable.
S. The construction system shall provide a complete set of elements for installing fixed
or withdrawable switching and protective devices, measurement devices and control/
monitoring devices in the switchboard.
T. Contractor shall insure full discrimination between upstream and downstream
breakers.
2.5
Protection and safety

A. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall ensure the safety of life and property as
well as provide a high level of continuity to service
1. Switching safety shall be ensured by mechanical device preventing on load
withdrawal
2. Operating safety shall be ensured by compartmenting in compliance with standard
IEC 60439- 1 and according to form types 3.
3. Current interruption shall be of the visible break isolation or positive contact
indication type as defined by standard IEC 60947- 3.
B. In view of reducing the risk of electrical shock
1. Power and control circuit shall be separate and completely isolated.
2. Auxiliary circuits shall be of the extra low voltage type.
C. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall be equipped with two types of
mechanical locking compatible with the different positions of drawers. The locking
system shall be partially mobile and implement three padlocks.
D. The safety of persons shall be ensured by complying with the requirements of
standard AS 3439- 1 concerning the propagation of an arc inside electrical
switchboards. Test certificates shall be provided.
2.6
ROUTINE AND SPECIAL TESTS

A. Routine Tests
The switch board shall be subject to routine factory test and shall be substantiated by
a test report signed by the manufacturer's quality control department., in accordance
with IEC 60439 1 as follows:
1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams.
2. Visual Inspection.
3. Functional electrical and mechanical operation
4. Dielectric test.
16250-5
SECTION 16250
LV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
and repairing.
3.2

3.3
EQUIPMENT ERECTION
specifications.
C. Splices shall be implemented to ensure the electrical continuity of the horizontal
busbars, auxiliary buses and the proactive conductor between adjacent sections.
D. It shall be possible to secure the sections to a floor that is flat by anchoring directly to
a concrete floor using anchor bolts or by securing to ordinary metal profiles.
3.4

various tests.
END OF SECTION
16250-6
SECTION 16260
LV SUB-MAIN SWITCHBOARD
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
accessories and materials required for the installation of LV Sub-Main Switchboards
in accordance with attached specifications and drawings.
1.2

and products:
1. SASO 1609
2. IEC 60439- 1
3. IEC 60529
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed
switchboards.
3. ISO certification.
D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of LV switchboards for
not less than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already
1.4
SUBMITTAL
16260 -1
SECTION 16260
___________________________________________________________________________
provided.
C. Test Reports:
1.5
COORDINATION
installation.
1.6

B. Store switchboards in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory
switchboard internal components, enclosure and finish.
16260 -2
SECTION 16260
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. The following specifications apply to electrical distribution switchboard or fixed type,
in compliance with standard IEC 60439- 1.
2.2
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTIC
A. The switchboards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
1. Rated voltage
1000 V three-phase.
2. Rated operating voltage 690V
3. Frequency
60 Hz.
4. Insulated level
2.5kV-60Hz,1min
8 kV-1,2/50s.
6. Short-circuit current
7. Degree of protection (IP) As shown on the drawings.
8. Impact strength (IK)
2.3
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. The switchboard shall be suitable for operations at a height of 2000 meters or less
above sea level.
B. The switchboards shall be capable of operating normally within the following
temperature range
+ 40 C
-5C
C. Manufacturer shall declare weather switchboard is able to operate in air temperature
higher than + 40 C and if current derating is necessary.
2.4

A. The low voltage switchboard shall have a permissible asymmetrical short circuit
current up to short circuit current shown on the drawings for 1 second. The busbars
shall be designed for mounting on insulated supports that are sufficient in number to
accept the electro-dynamic forces resulting from the flow of the peak asymmetrical
short circuit current.
B. The low voltage switchboard shall have an earthing circuit including a bar that can be
removed for isolation purposes during the necessary insulation measurements
(removal of the bar shall require a tool)
C. The switchboard shall be suitable for front or rear connections.
D. Cable entry shall be via the bottom or the top.
16260 -3
SECTION 16260
___________________________________________________________________________
E. The low voltage switchboard shall not be higher than 2000 mm.
F. Natural ventilation shall make it possible for the Switchboard components to operate
with in the recommended temperature ranges.
G. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall have small depths, thus optimizing layout
in electrical rooms.
H. The system shall make it possible to implement fixed distribution , positioned side by
side, which together form an assembly referred to as an electrical switchboard.
I. Selection of switchboard components shall be made in compliance with standard IEC
60947 and related specification in the contract documents.
J. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall be made up of identified functional
volumes including the busbar compartment, switchgear and controlgear component
compartment, connection compartment and auxiliaries compartment.
1. The different busbar shall be the main busbars, distribution busbars and auxiliary
busbars.
2. The busbars shall be made of electrolytic copper.
3. The compartment shall be located inside a metal enclosure with walls providing
protection against direct contact with live parts and guaranteeing a degree of
protection (IP) requested. Panelboards are to be totally enclosed, dead front type,
protection code IP 42 for indoor installations and IP 55 for outdoor installations,
in accordance with IEC 144.
4. INDOOR ENCLOSURE: sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and
minimum 1.5 mm thick for front shield, trim and door.
K. Main incomer and outgoing breakers shall be moulded case breakers.
L. The switchboard shall be suitable for installation side by side and back to back and
capable of receiving lateral ducts for cables .
M. The switchboard cover panel shall be removable.
N. The construction system shall provide a complete set of elements for installing fixed
switching and protective devices, measurement devices and control/ monitoring
devices in the switchboard.
2.5
Protection and safety

A. The low voltage electrical switchboards shall ensure the safety of life and property as
well as provide a high level of continuity to service
1. Operating safety shall be ensured by compartmenting in compliance with standard
IEC 60439- 1 and according to form type 2b.
2. Current interruption shall be of the visible break isolation or positive contact
indication type as defined by standard IEC 60947- 3.
16260 -4
SECTION 16260
___________________________________________________________________________
B. In view of reducing the risk of electrical shock
1. Power and control circuit shall be separate and completely isolated.
2. Auxiliary circuits shall be of the extra low voltage type.
2.6
ROUTINE TESTS
A. Routine Tests
The switchboard shall be subject to routine factory test and shall be substantiated by a
test report signed by the manufacturer's quality control department., in accordance
with IEC 60439 1 as follows:
1. Conformity with drawings and diagrams.
2. Visual Inspection.
3. Functional electrical and mechanical operation
4. Dielectric test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
and repairing.
3.2

3.3
EQUIPMENT ERECTION
specifications.
C. Splices shall be implemented to ensure the electrical continuity of the horizontal
busbars, auxiliary buses and the proactive conductor between adjacent sections.
16260 -5
SECTION 16260
___________________________________________________________________________
D. It shall be possible to secure the sections to a floor that is flat by anchoring directly to
a concrete floor using anchor bolts or by securing to ordinary metal profiles.
3.4

various tests.
END OF SECTION
16260 -6
SECTION 16270
LV FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the manufacture, furnish, installation and testing of all
equipment, accessories and materials required for the installation of LV Final
Distribution Boards LP, ELP, PP and EPP.
1.2

and products:
1. SASO 1611
Saudi Standard for Low Voltage Distribution Boards
2. IEC 60439- 3
Low voltage Final Distribution Boards.
3. IEC 60529
Degree of Protection provided by the encloure (IP Code)
4. IEC 60947- 2
Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Circuit breakers.
5. IEC 61008-1
Residual Current operated Circuit Breakers without integral
Overcurrent Protection (RCCBs)
6. IEC 61009
Residual Current operated Circuit Breakers with integral
Overcurrent Protection. (RCBO)
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed Distribution
Boards.
C. The supplier shall provide proof of application of a quality procedure in the
manufacturing facility complying with standards. This means:
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
GENERAL
A. These specifications apply to LV Final Distribution Boards rated upto 250 Amps.
B. The Distribution Board and the associated Switchgear and Control gear like Circuit
Breakers, Contactors, Switches, etc. should be from the same manufacturer.
16270 -1
SECTION 16270
___________________________________________________________________________
2.2
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
A. The Distribution Boards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical
values:
1. Rated Insulation Voltage
690 V AC.
2. Rated Operating Voltage
380 V AC.
3. Frequency
60 Hz.
upto 250 Amps. (or as indicated on the
drawings)
5. Short-time withstand current
17 kA RMS for 200ms.
6. Peak Short Time withstand
34 kA
7. Degree of protection (IP)
IP31 as per IEC 60529
2.3

A. Metal enclosure of the low-voltage distribution board shall be made of electro
galvanised steel sheet metal without any welding Points which shall have received an
anti-corrosion coating (hot polymerised polyester/epoxy powder).
B. One central slotted hole should be provided to ease accurate levelling of the
distribution board.
C. Additional slotted holes for ease at wall fixing should be provided.
D. The front face of the switchboards shall be removable to facilitate servicing.
E. Removable gland plate should be available at the top and the bottom of the
distribution board
F. Cable knockouts should be available on sides, top and bottom of the distribution
board for quicker and easier installation.
G. Main busbar should be made of tin-plated copper and fully shrouded.
H. Main busbar, in vertical position, should be installed into a rigid and adjustable
suspended pan assembly.
I. In order to provide easy connection and maximum cable space, split neutral bars
should be provided as standard in both sides.
J. Earth bar should be provided as standard.
K. Number of holes per terminal bar should not be less than the number of outgoings.
L. Switchgear and controlgear should be of DIN installation type.
M. Switchgear and controlgear connections to the busbar should be of bolt-on type.
2.4
PROTECTION AND SAFETY

A. The main busbar of the Distribution Board should be fully shrouded to prevent any
accidental direct contact.
B. The split neutral busbar should be completely shrouded to prevent any accidental
direct contact.
C. The Main Incoming shall be a switch disconnector of adequate continuous, making
and withstand rating as shown on drawings.If supplied from a sub distribution board
located in the same electrical room, main lugs may be provided instead of the switch
disconnector.
16270 -2
SECTION 16270
___________________________________________________________________________
D. All outgoing feeders to bathrooms, wet areas should be provided with Residual
Current Protection Devices for protection against direct and indirect contact.
E. All incoming switchgears should be suitable for isolation as per IEC 60947- 2.
F. Keylock facility should be available in order to prevent the opening of the distribution
board by non authorized persons.
G. Keylock should be field installable.
2.5
INDICATION
A. Identification labels should be provided for incoming and outgoing circuits, earth and
neutral busbar.
B. Outgoer labels should be provided next to the branch circuit breakers for easy and
direct outgoers identification
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply and install the followings as indicated on single line
diagrams:
1.
Lighting Contactor shall have totally enclosed silver alloy double break
power contacts capable of continuously carrying, making and breaking any
load within the rating of the contactor without the assistance of auxiliary
arcing contacts. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable. All contacts
shall be removable without disturbing line or load wiring.
2.
Lighting contactors shall be electrically held type.
3.
Lighting contactors shall be manufactured approved by the Engineer.
4.
The Lighting feeder pillar serving the street lighting shall be supplied
through triple pole contactors which shall be photo-electric controlled with
a timer connected in parallel with the photocells. An over-ride facility shall
be provided for maintenance.
5.
The photo-electric controls shall consists of omni-directional Cadmium

cell thermal relay of high quality emptying solid state photo - variable
conductance elements giving a 2:1 On/Off ratio with sensitivity to switch on
lights when the daylight illumination reduces to 70 lux. This allows for the
high pressure Sodium lights striking time, taking account of the rather fast
rate of daylight intensity drop off in the region.
6.
The cell shall be encased in an impact resistant translucent cover to protect

it from damage and ultraviolet rays. The photoelectric cell shall be
completely weatherproof and not effected by moisture, vibration or changes
in temperature.
16270 -3
SECTION 16270
___________________________________________________________________________
7.
The timer shall be of the quartz, electronic type, capable of operating for at
least 500 hours in case of power failure. Timer is to be of the solar type to
be settable once throughout the year and to be set at definite periods for
switching on and off.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP & INSTALLATION

and repairing.
B. All electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications.
3.2

various tests.
a) General equipment check.
b) Field wiring and ground system verification.
c) Equipment adjustment.
END OF SECTION
16270 -4
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
and materials required for the installation of indoor and outdoor lighting fixtures,
control gear, mounting provisions, accessories and connection to circuit wiring and to
corresponding lighting control equipment
1.2

and products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
SASO
IEC 60598
IEC 400
IEC 566
IEC 61 & IEC 238
IEC 82

Luminaires
Lamp Holders
Capacitors
Incandescent Lamp Socket
Ballasts
QUALITY ASSURANCE
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed lighting
fixtures.
1. Use of a quality manual approved and signed by a management representative,
2. Regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable quality
control procedures,
D. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of lighting for not less
than ten years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied
equipment of the same type and same make.
16330 -1
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
1.4
SUBMITTAL
Submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
-
Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution

curves, coefficient of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation
factors etc.
Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including

manufacturer's name, catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall
dimensions, operating characteristics and principles
Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of

installation and to the Specification
Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of

ceiling features, structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as
applicable and pertinent to the installation
Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions
Submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required,

together with colour and texture samples of each fixture.

C. Recommended Spare Parts List:
1.5
COORDINATION
16330 -2
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
1.6

B. Store lighting fixtures in clean and dry space. Inspect for damage. Maintain factory
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

2.1.1. LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
A. GENERALLY: construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply
with the Regulations and Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated,
assembled and wired entirely at factory. Manufacturer's name,
factory inspection stamp and official quality label are to be fixed to
each fixture supplied.
B. LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES): to be manufacturer's
standard, as given in Lighting Fixture Schedules shown on the
Drawings, or equal.
C. SHEET STEEL HOUSINGS: to be not less than 0.6 mm thick, and
thicker when required by the Specification or the Standards.
D. SHEET STEEL REFLECTORS: to be not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E. ALUMINIUM REFLECTORS: to be not less than 0.7 mm thick,
unless otherwise approved.
F. FABRICATION: metalwork is to be mitred, welded and ground
smooth without tool marks or burrs. Flat metal parts are to be
stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication. Metal
parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
G. RUST-PROOF FERROUS BASE: ferrous metal parts are to be
bonderized (treated with corrosion resistant phosphate solution) and
given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat before application of
final finish.
H. FINISH FOR NON-REFLECTING METAL SURFACES:
approved baked enamel paint. Paint colour on fixture frames and
trims is to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
16330 -3
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
I. FINISH FOR LIGHT REFLECTING SURFACES: white baked
enamel paint having reflection factor not less than 85% . Mirror
reflectors, where specified, are to be highly polished, anodized
aluminium with reflection factors not less than 97% .
J. MECHANICAL RESISTANCE OF FINISH: after finish has been
applied on steel surfaces and cured, it is to withstand a 6 mm radius
bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or loosening from
base metal.
K. RESISTANCE OF FINISH TO ULTRA-VIOLET: finish is to
withstand 72 hours exposure to an ultra-violet RS lamp placed 100
mm from surface without discolouring, hardening or warping, and is
to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.
L. HEAT RESISTANCE: finishes, wires and components inside
fixtures are to be certified materials to resist the temperatures or
other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
M. WIRING INSIDE FIXTURES: to be not less than 1.0 mm, up to
(105 C) to resist temperature inside fixtures and insulated for 240 V
application. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type, fixed,
insulating, terminal blocks.
N. HINGES: fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to
have concealed hinges and catches, and stainless steel retaining clips.
Other alternative equally durable products may be submitted for
approval.
O. SUSPENSION ALIGNERS: to be provided for pendant fixtures for
axial, vertical and horizontal alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be
minimum 25 mm.
P. RECESSED FIXTURES: to be constructed to fit into suspended
ceilings without distorting fixture or ceiling. Plaster rings are to be
provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
Q. OUTDOOR FIXTURES: to be non-ferrous metal or specially
moulded material for outdoor use.
R. REMOVAL OF PARTS for maintenance is to be possible without
removing fixture housing.
16330 -4
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
S. VANDAL PROOF FIXTURES:
Luminaire body to be 1.0 mm thickness painted white with
aluminum frame.
Luminaire to be provided with 3 mm thick wire guard.
Diffuser is clear lexan sheet 4 mm thick.
Reflector to be 0.5 mm thickness stainless steel.
Sunken Vandal proof screws and riveted nuts to fix the aluminum
frame with the luminaire body.
Gasket to be provided around the body.
2.1.2. FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. LAMP HOLDERS GENERALLY: heavy duty, moulded white
plastic with non-corroding spring contacts.
B. LAMP HOLDERS FOR INDUSTRIAL FITTINGS: spring loaded
turret type, heavy duty, dust protected.
C. BALLASTS GENERALLY: Only single or two-lamp ballasts are to
be used in any one fixture. Two-lamp ballasts are to be lead-lag,
series type. Equipment is to be enclosed in sheet steel casing with
corrosion resistant finish.
D. BALLAST THERMOSETTING COMPOUND is not to soften,
liquefy or support combustion under any operating condition or upon
ballast failure, and is to fill ballast enclosure and dampen vibrations.
Temperature rise, under normal operating conditions, is not to
exceed 55 deg. C above maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg.
C.
E. BALLAST TYPE: Electronic type high frequency, compact light
weight.
F. BALLAST RATING: ballast is to be manufactured and certified for
the specific lamp it controls and for operation from nominal power
supply, with voltage and frequency equal to nominal voltage and
frequency of distribution network.
2.2
LAMPS
A.
RATED VOLTAGE of incandescent and PL lamps is to be equal to

nominal voltage of distribution network. Lamps with different rated
voltages are not acceptable.
16330 -5
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
B.
TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN LAMPS: tubular, quartz, resistant to high

temperatures. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 2000 hours and
luminous output above the following:
1.
C.
9500 lumens for 500 W lamps
STRAIGHT TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS: unless otherwise

specified, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the fixture description and with
improved fluorescent internal coating. Colour of light is to be cool white
4000 K Lamps are to be low energy type with tube diameter 26 mm.
Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000 hours and luminous output
above the following:
a. 1150 lumens for 18 W lamps (600 mm long)
b. 25 00 lumens for 36 W lamps (1200 mm long)
D.
PL-C COMPACT LAMPS: single ended, compact-miniature lamp,

consisting of four narrow fluorescent tubes welded together, with
integral instant starter and capacitor and with special two-pin plug-in
base and socket. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000 hours and
luminous output above the following:
a. 900 lumens for 13 W lamps (130 mm long)
b. 1200 lumens for 18 W lamps (150 mm long)
c. 1800 lumens for 26 W lamps (170 mm long).
E.
Lamps are to be type PLC .
F.
METAL HALIDE LAMPS: comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed

in clear tubular hard-glass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all
gas discharge tubes with iodide additives indium, thallium and sodium in
the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in three spectral bands; blue,
green and yellow-red with high colour rendering. Lamps are to be to
IEC 188 with E40 base. Guaranteed average life is not to be less than
10000 hours and luminous outputs, after 100 hours burning, are to be
above the following:
a. 5500 lumens for 70 W lamps

b. 11500 lumens for 150 W lamps
Permissible base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C,
and maximum bulb temperature not greater than 550 deg. C. Lamp
16330 -6
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
burning position for 2000 W, 220 V lamp is to be possible up to 75
degrees.
G.
Low Voltage Halogen Lamps: Halogen Lamps shall be equipped with

dichroic reflector coated type.
Average lamp life shall be 3000 hrs, colour rendering Ra100 and color
temperature 3000 deg. K.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. GENERALLY: install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to
building lines and at uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as
approved by the Engineer. Make final height adjustment after
installation.
B. FIXTURE SUPPORT: provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes
with hangers, brackets and flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to
support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers etc. and method
of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures mounted on outlet
boxes to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when
required, for proper installation. Provide one point of support in
addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually mounted
fixtures longer than 600 mm.
C. STEM HANGERS: provide two stem hangers for individually
mounted pendant fixtures. Stems are to have suspension aligners and
are to be of suitable length for suspending fixtures at required height.
D. SUSPENDED CEILINGS: if ceiling construction is unable to
support weight of fixtures without strain or deformation, suspend
fixtures directly from building structure.
E. SOLID CEILINGS: coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings
with exact fixture dimensions and structural elements.
F. CONTINUOUS ROWS: arrange fixtures so that individual fixtures

can be removed without dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide
minimum spacing between fixtures.
G. COVER PLATES: install cover plates over fixture outlet box or
opening in ceiling or structure when left unused.
16330 -7
SECTION 16330
LIGHTING
___________________________________________________________________________
H. FLUSH RECESSED FIXTURES: install to completely eliminate
light leakage within fixture and between fixture and adjacent finished
surface.
I. VENTILATION: keep ventilation channels free after fixture is
installed, if required by the design of the fixture.
J. TIGHTNESS: ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably
insect/dust tight when installed, and completely weatherproof for
installations subject to weather conditions.
K. LAMPS FOR PERMANENT INSTALLATION: place new lamps in
fixtures immediately prior to hand-over and when instructed by the
Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service are not to be used for
final lamping of fixtures.
3.2 .
INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE

A. VISUAL INSPECTION: check neatness of installation, uniformity of
equipment and nameplates etc.
B. ILLUMINATION MEASUREMENTS: to be taken at selected
locations, to determine level and uniformity.
C. OPERATION: check lighting installations for operation including
control and regulation equipment.
D. ELECTRICAL DATA: measure power factor, current and voltage at
start for installations with discharge lamps.
END OF SECTION
16330 -8

SECTION 16340 Medium Voltage Switch Gear - Part 1 - General

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 16340 Medium Voltage Switch Gear - Part 1 - General

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 16340 Medium Voltage Switch Gear - Part 1 - General

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION 16340

MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH GEAR

APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

IEC 62271- 100

Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

POTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL OPERATING MECHANISM INTERFACE

A. The withdrawable switchgear device circuit breaker shall be operating by a mechanism

A. The switchgear shall be equipped with auxiliary indication contacts connected to

TYPE TESTS AND ROUTINE TESTS

A. The following type-test certificates shall be submitted for the equipment :

FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS

EQUIPMENT TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

GENERATOR SET CONSIST

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, GENERAL

Minimum Service and Warranty Qualifications

Warranty Terms - 2 Years

Mechanics and Equipment

Parts Availability - 90%

Pistons shall be a lightweight aluminum alloy, which is elliptically ground

Diesel Fuel System

Primary Fuel Filter

Fuel Priming Pump

Auxiliary Fuel Tank

Governor, Electronic - Load Share/Speed Control

Radiator, Engine Mounted

Inlet Air System

Exhaust Noise Control

Acoustic Treatment of Generator Room

Generator set shall be provided with critical type silencer.

Acoustic lining shall be provided in the inner surface of walls in the

Outdoor air intakes and exhausts shall be provided with sound

Radiator fans shall be upgraded for addition static due to sound

Acoustic proposal shall include detailed calculations, method statement,

Electrical Starting System

Jacket Water Heater

Exciter - Permanent Magnet

Mounting Base - Package Generator Set

Isolator - Spring Type

Storage Below Ground

Automatic Start - Stop Control

Alarm NFPA-99 requirements for the alarm panel shall be satisfied by a

A predelivery inspection must be performed by client representative at the

The installation shall be performed in accordance with shop drawings,

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

The complete installation shall be checked for procedural and operational

The system manufacturer's dealer representative shall be present to assist the

The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation

OPERATION / MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND PARTS MANUAL

PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS - on the genset that

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST - showing all consumables anticipated

WIRING DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS - showing function of all electrical

RING MAIN UNIT SWITCHGEAR (RMU)

APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS